GNS-X C129: Operator's Manual

GNS-X C129
with GNS-X CDU

LS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Operator’s Manual
Global
Rev. 3
Oct/02 N
WARNING
Prior to export of this document, review for export license requirement is

needed.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
©1997 - 2002 Honeywell International Inc.

All rights reserved.
Reproduction of this publication or any portion thereof by any means without

the express written permission of Honeywell International Inc. is prohibited.
For further information contact the Manager, Technical Publications;
Honeywell; One Technology Center; 23500 West 105th Street; Olathe,
Kansas 66061. Telephone: (913) 782-0400.
Record of Revisions
Revision History and Instructions

Manual GNS-X C129 (with GNS-XLS CDU) Operator’s Manual
Revision 3, October 2002
Part Number 006-08872-0000
This revision incorporates AFIS Printer Control, deletes Air Canada and calri-
fies SID/STAR operation.
Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following instruc-
tions:
Title Page Remove and Replace

Revision History Page Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Pages
Table of Contents Remove and Replace Pages v/vi and xiii through
xvi
Section 3 Remove and Replace Pages 3-9 through 3-20
and 3-75/3-76
Section 7 Remove and Replace Pages 7-1/7-2, 7-7/7-8,
7-17 through 7-22 and 7-44 through 7-72
Back Cover Page Remove and Replace
Back Binder Insert Remove and Replace
R-1
Rev. 3
Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System
Record of Revisions

Revision 2, August 2000
Part Number 006-08872-0000
This revision incorporates GNS-X C129 Software Mod 4, 5 and 6.
Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following instruc-
tions:
Front Binder Insert Remove and Replace
Title Page Remove and Replace
Revision History Page Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Pages
Table of Contents Remove and Replace Pages v/vi,ix/x, xi/xii,
xiii/xiv and xv/xvi
Section 2 Remove and Replace Pages 2-1/2-2, 2-51/2-52,
2-57/2-58 and 2-77 through 2-82
Section 3 Remove and Replace Pages 3-1 through 3-4,
3-15/3-16, 3-36.1/3-36.2, 3-39 through 3-50,
3-57 through 3-62, 3-105/3-106 and 3-109/3-110
Back Cover Page Remove and Replace
Back Binder Insert Remove and Replace
R-1
Rev. 2
Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System
Record of Revisions

Revision 1, August 1997
Part Number 006- 08872-0000
This revision consists of the following:
Add Company Routes (vi, 2-2, 3.36.1, 3-36.2, I-2)
Add Dedicated DME Interface (2-59, 2-60)
Add Approach Note (3-36.3)
Typographic/Administrative Corrections (Front Covers, 2-1, 2-3, 2-10, 2-12,
2-82, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-37, Back Covers)
R-1
Rev. 1
Record of Revisions

Revision 0, December 1996
Part Number 006-08872-0000
This revision is a complete manual revision and supersedes previous revi-
sion level manuals. Superseded manuals should be discarded.
R-1
Rev. 0
Feb/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
GENERAL TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
ON: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
BRIGHTNESS (BRT): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
MESSAGE KEY/ANNUNCIATOR (MSG): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
ALPHA KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
NUMERIC KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
HOLD KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
BACK KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
ENTER Key: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
DISPLAY SELECTOR KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
PREVIOUS (PRV) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
NEXT (NXT) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
LINE SELECT KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
COLORS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
SECTION 2
PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
PAGE DISPLAYS AT POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
SELF TEST PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
INITIALIZATION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
FLIGHT PLAN SECTION (FPL KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
FLIGHT PLAN PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
FLIGHT PLAN “X” 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
i
Rev. 0
Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System
Table of Contents
NAVIGATION SECTION (NAV KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
NAVIGATION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
NAVIGATION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
VLF SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
VLF SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
IRS/INS SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
IRS (or INS) SUBSECTION 1/2 (Page 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
IRS SUBSECTION 2/2 (Page 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
VPU SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
VPU SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
GPS SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
GPS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
LORAN-C (LCS) SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
LCS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
ii
Rev. 0
GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Dec/96
Table of Contents
VERTICAL NAVIGATION SECTION (VNAV KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
VNAV 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) - (First line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
VNAV MODE: (Second line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
VNAV 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) - FLIGHT PLAN WayPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
VNAV DATA 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
AFIS SECTION (AFIS KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
PLANNING SECTION (PLAN KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
PLAN PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
PLAN 1/8 (Page 1 of 8) FUEL STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
PLAN 2/8 (Page 2 of 8) TRIP PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
PLAN 3/8 (Page 3 of 8) FUEL PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
PLAN 4/8 (Page 4 of 8) FUEL FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
PLAN 5/8 (Page 5 of 8) DATE/GMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
PLAN 6/8 (Page 6 of 8) AIRCRAFT WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
PLAN 7/8 (Page 7 of 8) FDE PREDICTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
PLAN 8/8 (Page 8 of 8) FDE COMPUTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
HEADING SECTION (HDG KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
HEADING PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
HEADING VECTOR 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
TUNING SECTION (TUNE KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
TUNE 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
TUNE 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
TUNE 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
TUNE 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) XPDR/ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
HOLDING PATTERN SECTION (HOLD KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
iii
Rev. 0
Table of Contents
HOLDING PATTERN PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
HOLDING PATTERN 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
POSITION FIX PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
DIRECT TO SECTION ( d KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
DIRECT TO PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
DIRECT 1/2 (Page 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
WAYPOINT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68
WAYPOINT PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68
DATABASE WPT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68
SPECIAL DATABASE WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
PILOT ENTERED WPT (Personalized) Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
OFFSET WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
SPECIAL WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74
OCEANIC REPORTING WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
MESSAGES (MSG Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76
SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
ACTION REQUIRED: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
ADVISORY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78
SENSOR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81
SECTION 3
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
PRE-DEPARTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
POWER ON/OFF AND PARALLAX ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
INITIALIZATION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
DATE and GMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
INITIALIZATION POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Option 1: Using the IDENT field for non-IRS equipped systems . . . . . .3-3
iv
Rev. 0
Table of Contents
Option 2: Using the POS field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
BUILDING FLIGHT PLANS (FPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
To Delete a Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
MODIFYING A FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
To Access The Desired Flight Plan: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Deleting A Waypoint: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
ADDING A WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

Adding Oceanic Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
ERASING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
USING DUPLICATE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
REVIEWING WAYPOINT DATA/COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
FLIGHT PLAN (FPL) SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
INITIAL LEG SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
BEFORE TAXI (IRS EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
RUNWAY LINE-UP (IRS EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
IRS, VLF (RPU), GPS AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
VLF (RPU) AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
SIDs, STARs, APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
ENTERING A SID ON THE ACTIVE FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
REVIEWING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3-20
EDITING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . .3-21
ERASING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . .3-22
ADDING OR DELETING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A SID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

To Delete a Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
ENTERING AN AIRWAY FROM ANY STORED FPL

OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
v
Rev. 3
Table of Contents
EDITING AN AIRWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

ENTERING A STAR OR PROFILE DESCENT FROM ANY STORED FPL
REVIEWING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE .3-29
EDITING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . . .3-29
ERASING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE . . .3-30
ADDING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
DELETING WAYPOINTS OF A STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
ENTERING AN APPROACH ON A STORED FPL
REVIEWING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL
EDITING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL
ERASING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL
OR THE ACTIVE FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
DELETING AN APPROACH WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
USING A STAR AND AN APPROACH IN THE SAME FLIGHT PLAN . . . . .3-36
SELECTING A COMPANY ROUTE AND ADDING IT TO THE ACTIVE
FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36.1
EXECUTING APPROACHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
LOADING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
EXECUTING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Using Radar Vectors to FINAL APPROACH COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
After receiving the final intercept vector from ATC: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
USING OWN NAVIGATION - NO DME ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
PROCEDURE TURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
USING RADAR VECTORS TO INTERCEPT A DME ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
ENROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
DIRECT TO - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
DIRECT TO - HP WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
vi
Rev. 1
GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Aug/97
Table of Contents
To Select and Go Direct To HP Waypoint: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
To Cancel Holding Pattern:(from the Holding Pattern page) . . . . . . . .3-52
DIRECT TO - RANDOM WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
DIRECT TO - CLOSEST AIRPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
PSEUDO-VORTAC (SELECTED COURSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
USING HEADING VECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
PROGRAMMING A HEADING VECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
CHANGING HEADING VECTOR WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE . . . .3-58
CHANGING TO WAYPOINT WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE . . . . . . .3-58
CANCELING HEADING SELECT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
PROGRAMMING AN INTERCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
PROGRAMMING A HEADING INTERCEPT TO THE

FINAL APPROACH COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61
PROGRAMMING A HOLDING PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63
REVIEWING, EDITING, OR CANCELING A HOLDING PATTERN . . . . . . . . . .3-65
REVIEWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
CANCELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN NEXT TIME OVER HOLDING FIX . . . . . . . .3-67
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY GOING DIRECT TO HOLDING FIX . . . .3-68
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY PERFORMING A LEG CHANGE . . . . . .3-68
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) OPERATION - PRE-DEPARTURE . . . . . . .3-71
SETTING CRUISE ALTITUDE, TRANSITION LEVEL,

AND DEFAULT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71
CREATING/CHANGING VNAV WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-72
To program a Path Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-74
REVIEWING VNAV WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
vii
Rev. 0
Table of Contents
Using Active Flight Plan Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
Using VNAV Flight Plan Waypoints Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
VERTICAL NAVIGATION - ENROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
PROGRAMMING VERTICAL PATH DESCENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
Using Database (DB) FPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77
Using Default ( DEF) FPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77
Using Manual (MAN) FPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77
Using Automatic (AUTO) FPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-78
EDITING ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Option 1: Using VNAV Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Option 2: Using VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Option 3: Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
DIRECT TO - VNAV WAYPOINT AS LATERAL WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . .3-81
DIRECT TO - VNAV WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
CREATING VNAV PROFILE WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
Top of Climb (#TOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
Top of Descent (#TOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85
Pre-Selected Altitude Intercept Point (#PRESL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
Descent Reference Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
REMOTE TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
TUNING COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
TUNING NAVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
Keyboard Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
TRANSPONDER AND ADF KEYBOARD TUNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
PLANNING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
FUEL PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
TRIP PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-96
viii
Rev. 0
Table of Contents
To Enter Manual Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-98
To Return to Automatic Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-98
To update the TRIP PLAN leg to the current TO waypoint

with an Active Flight Plan selected: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100
FLIGHT PLAN FUEL PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100
To Enter Manual Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
To Return To Automatic Groundspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
To Enter A Manual Fuel Flow: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
To Return to Automatic Fuel Flow: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
VERIFYING OR CHANGING DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-104
VERIFYING OR CHANGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT PARAMETERS . . . . . .3-105
RESETTING FUEL USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-106
SPECIAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107
PILOT ENTERED LEG CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107
PREVENTING AUTOMATIC LEG CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-109
DEAD RECKONING (DR) TO PRIMARY NAVIGATION MODE -

VLF (RPU) ONLY EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
POSITION CHECK AND UPDATE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
Using a Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
Over Known Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-111
Using An Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-112
PARALLEL COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-114
MANUAL MAGNETIC VARIATION ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115
RETURNING TO AUTOMATIC VARIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115
SELECTING ETE, ETA, DIS, OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115
SELECTING NAV PAGE ETA OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . .3-116
INITIALIZATION ENROUTE VLF (RPU) ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-117
Position Update: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-118
ix
Rev. 2
Table of Contents
MANUAL TAS ENTRY only VLF is available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-118
MANUAL HEADING ENTRY only if IRS or VLF is available . . . . . . . . . . .3-119
VLF/OMEGA STATION DESELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-120
LORAN-C MANUAL OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-121
SENSOR DESELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-121
EXTERNAL WAYPOINT ACCEPTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-122
PRESENT POSITION AS A WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-123
NAVIGATION AT EXTREME LATITUDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128
TRUE HEADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-124
Aircraft Equipped With TRUE/MAG Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-124
Aircraft Not Equipped With A TRUE/MAG Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-125
SET HEADING ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-125
LOSS OF POWER IN FLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-126
CREATING/CHANGING PILOT ENTERED

(PERSONALIZED) WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-127
Creating Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128
Changing Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128
CREATING AN OFFSET WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-129
SECTION 4
LORAN-C OPERATING AREAS (LOA) AND VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES .4-1
LORAN-C OPERATING AREAS (LOA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
VLF COMMUNICATIONS STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
SECTION 5
DATABASE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
DATA BASE UPDATE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
TO UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
x
Rev. 2
Table of Contents
WHEN UPDATE IS COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
IF UPDATE FAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
SECTION 6
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Global Data Center (GDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Data Transfer Unit (DTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Data Management Unit (DMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Antenna Switching Unit (ASU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Satellite Communications Unit (SCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
High Power Amplifier/ Low Noise Amplifier (HPA/LNA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
AFIS Flight Plan List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Flight Plan Progress (NAVIGATION Page 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
AFIS Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
AFIS FLT PLAN Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
AFIS FLT PLAN Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Fuel and Time Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
AFIS FLT PLAN Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Weights, Flight Level and Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
AFIS FLT PLAN Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Operator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
AFIS FLT PLAN Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Performance Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
SIGMETS Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
xi
Rev. 2
Table of Contents
TERMINAL WEATHER Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
TERMINAL WX DATA Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
WINDS ALOFT Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
WINDS ALOFT Data Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
RECALL AFIS FPL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
SEND AFIS MESSAGE Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
PPM MENU Page (Preprogrammed Messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
DISPLAY AFIS MSG Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
OPERATING MODES Page (For AFIS Users Equipped with

Satellite Data Communications System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
AUTO REPORT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
AUTO WX UPDT (weather update): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
VHF LINK CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
SAT LINK CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
OPERATING MODES Page (For AFIS Users NOT Equipped with

AUTO REPORT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
AUTO WX UPDT (weather update): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Active Flight Plan Page (for AFIS Flight Plan Updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
AFIS UPDATE Verification Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
SYSTEM MESSAGES Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
ADVISORY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Pre-Departure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
AFIS Flight Plan Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
To enter an AFIS Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
xii
Rev. 2
Table of Contents
ENROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Reviewing Flight Plan Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Reviewing AFIS Planned Leg Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Reviewing AFIS Flight Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
AFIS Flight Plan Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
SIGMETS Review/update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Terminal Weather Menu - Data update and Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
To insert a new identifier: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
To delete text when there is no data entry in progress: . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
Winds Aloft Menu - Data update and Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
To insert a new identifier: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
To delete text when there is no data entry in progress: . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Recalling AFIS Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Recall Option 1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Recall Option 2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Sending a Text Message or PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
To Return to the AFIS Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
Sending/building a Preprogrammed Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Editing/entering a Preprogrammed Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Continue Sending Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
AFIS Messages Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Selecting Operating Modes (For AFIS Users Equipped with

Auto Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Turning AUTO REPORT / Auto WX Update OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44

xiii
Rev. 2
Table of Contents
Returning to AUTO REPORT/auto WX Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Auto Weather Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Turning AUTO WX UPDT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Returning to AUTO WX UPDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
VHF and Satellite Network Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Turning VHF Network OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Turning VHF Network ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Turning AUTO to MAN or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50
Returning to AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50
Turning Satellite Network OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51
Turning Satellite Network ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Turning AUTO to MAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-53
PRINTER CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Message DEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Weather DEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Auto Form Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
Auto Print MSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
Auto Print WX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
PRINTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
Printing Flight Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
Printing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
Printing Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-58
SELECTING OPERATING MODES (For AFIS Users NOT Equipped with

Auto Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Turning AUTO REPORT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Returning to AUTO REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-61

xiv
Rev. 3
GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Oct/02
Table of Contents
Auto Weather Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
Turning AUTO WX UPDT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
Returning to AUTO WX UPDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63
Ground Network Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64
AUTO to MAN or OFF Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64
Updating AFIS Flight Plan and Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66
Updating AFIS Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66
Selecting Update as Active Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67
Updating SIGMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-68
Updating Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69
To Update Terminal Weather Data Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
To insert a new identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
Updating Winds Aloft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
To update the Winds Aloft Data Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
To insert a new identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
xv
Rev. 3
Table of Contents
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
xvi
Rev. 0
Description
SECTION 1
DESCRIPTION
OVERVIEW
The GNS-X C129 Flight Management System is an integrated sys-
tem designed to give the pilot centralized control for the navigation
sensors, computer based flight planning, fuel management, and radio
management. The GNS-X C129 has a full color flat panel LCD dis-
play, alpha-numeric and function keys, a Global Positioning Sensor
(GPS), and a navigation data base. All these are housed in a
panel/pedestal mounted Control Display Unit (CDU).
All aircraft interface requirements are accomplished through the
GNS-X C129. The system supports analog and digital inputs in any
combination. Specific aircraft requirements are programmed into a
Configuration Module. This module mounts directly to the rear con-
nector, thus remaining in the aircraft. This allows hardware to be
easily moved between aircraft types without changing system config-
uration. The following is a summary of the digital and analog inter-
faces:
DIGITAL ANALOG
AFIS Altitude
Air Data Computer Altitude Rate
EFIS Cross Track Deviation
Fuel Flow Discretes
Inertial Navigation Sensor Dual VOR/DME
Inertial Reference Sensor Fuel Flow
VOR/DME, ADF, XPDR, COMM Heading
Radio Tuning HSI Course & Bearing
RPU - VLF/Omega Roll Steering
Cross Side FMS True Air Speed
LORAN-C Vertical Deviation
In addition to the GPS sensor, position information is accepted from

up to eight navigation sensors, such as an optional VLF/Omega
RPU, inertial position sensors, LORAN-C sensors, or VOR/DME
radios. These navigation sensor inputs can be blended to form a sin-
gle composite position. Accuracy of this composite position is
Rev. 0
Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 1-1
Description
enhanced by using the best characteristics of each type of sensor.

For example, an Inertial Reference System (IRS) has excellent short
term characteristics while VLF/Omega has excellent long term stabili-
ty. The internal GPS sensor has excellent overall characteristics and
will usually be the dominant sensor during blending. However, when
RAIM is available, the GPS sensor is the sole contributor to the com-
posite position.
NOTE: RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a quali-
ty factor used to determine the accuracy of the GPS position. It is an
internal function of the GPS receiver and determines the accuracy of
it’s navigation solution.
The navigation data base is updated on a 28-day cycle by way of a
Database Disk. This Database Disk is inserted in a Data Transfer
Unit (DTU) or Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU) to download the
database. This worldwide database contains over 50,000 waypoints,
navaids and airports. It also contains altitudes at appropriate way-
points, SID, STAR, AIRWAY, and APPROACH procedures. In addi-
tion to this database, the memory can store up to 999 operator gener-
ated waypoints. Individual navigation points can be organized into 56
different stored flight plans, each containing up to 50 waypoints.
Due to the way the GNS-X C129 database is structured, waypoints
must have unique identifiers. However, some duplicate ICAO identi-
fiers exist for more than one waypoint. In these cases the waypoint
identifiers are renamed in the database. Two naming conventions are
used, one for four character identifiers and one for five character
identifiers.
Four character waypoints keep the first four characters and the last
two characters of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following
example.
MA11 at KPRC becomes MA11RC in the database.
Five character waypoints keep the first five characters and add the
last character of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following
example.
MA27L at KOAK becomes MA27LK in the database.
Additional capabilities of the GNS-X C129 include direct navigation
from present position to any waypoint, and data crossfill capability for
dual installations. Trip Plan and Fuel Plan functions are also avail-
able. There is capability for creating a PSEUDO-VORTAC (selected
course) to any waypoint and establishing an offset parallel course.
Rev. 0
1-2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Dec/96
Description
NAVs, COMMs, ADFs and transponders can be tuned through the

system or by using the individual control heads.
GENERAL TERMS
FIELD: A line of information.
CURSOR: Yellow rectangular box placed over a field to enter or
change the information in that field. The cursor is nor-
mally out of view unless brought into view by depressing
the Line Select Keys on either side of the screen. When
information is entered into a field and the ENTER Key is
depressed, the cursor will move to the next enterable
field or disappear from the screen when the last field is
entered. Blinking of a field indicates that the computer
has not accepted the entry because of unreasonable or
invalid information.
PAGE: Information is arranged in sections and subsections
much like chapters in a book. Individual screen displays
are referred to as pages. Each section is selected by
depressing the appropriate Display Selector Key located
at the top of the GNS-X C129. Each subsequent push of
the key will select the next page of that section. A sub-
section page is selected by depressing the Line Select
Key next to the topic desired, then depressing the
ENTER Key. The PRV, NXT, or BACK Key can be used
to move forward or backward through pages of a sub-
section. If the first page of a subsection is displayed, the
BACK Key will exit the subsection.
WAYPOINT:A navigation point consisting of 1 to 6 alpha, numeric
characters that has a specific latitude and longitude.
Rev. 0
Description
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
ON:
NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG TUNE
Depress and release the ON HOLD
Key to apply power to the sys- MSG

1 2 3
tem. There is a warm-up period P 4 5 6

R
of approximately 30 seconds. V
N 7 8 9
X
The display illumination will ini- T
# 0
D
tially be set at 75% of full bright. BACK
Depressing the ON Key for A B C D E F G H ENTER
approximately three seconds I J K L M N O P Q R
will initiate the system power off S T U V W X Y Z * SP
sequence. During the sequence

the display will show SYSTEM TURNING OFF. This is to prevent
inadvertent system shutdown.
NOTE: The system is also capable of being turned on and off by
cycling aircraft power.
BRIGHTNESS (BRT): HOLD
The BRT Key is used to change MSG

1 2 3
the illumination of the display. P

R
4 5 6
V
This key is also used for paral- N
X
7 8 9
T
lax adjustment of the Line D
# 0
Select Keys BACK
A B C D E F G H
NOTE: The illumination of the ENTER
I J K L M N O P Q R
front panel and keyboard is nor-
mally controlled through the air- S T U V W X Y Z * SP
craft panel lighting control.
MESSAGE KEY/ANNUNCIA- HOLD
TOR (MSG): 1 2 3
MSG
The MSG annunciator will flash P

R
4 5 6
V
to alert the operator that a mes- N
X
7 8 9
T
sage needs to be viewed on D
# 0
one of the SYSTEM MES- BACK
SAGES or SENSOR MES- A B C D ENTER E F G H

SAGES Pages. I J K L M N O P Q R
S T U V W X Y Z * SP
Rev. 0
Description
Depressing the MSG Key will display the message page. The
newest message will be indicated with a flashing asterisk to the left of
the message. If the message requires some action be taken by the
operator, the MSG annunciator will remain on steadily until the action
is completed. If no action is required, the MSG annunciator will extin-
guish when the message page is exited.
HOLD
ALPHA KEYS:
1 2 3
MSG
The alpha keys are used to P

R
4 5 6
enter the 26 letters of the alpha- V
N 7 8 9
X
bet and an asterisk. T
# 0
D
BACK
A B C D ENTER E F G H
I J K L M N O P Q R
NUMERIC KEYS: NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG TUNE
HOLD
The numeric keys are used to 1 2 3

MSG
enter numbers 0 to 9, # and ±. P 4 5 6
R
V
N 7 8 9
X
T
# 0
D
BACK
HOLD KEY: I J K L M N O P Q R
If the cursor is positioned over a
waypoint identifier, and it is
appropriate to program a NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG TUNE
Holding Pattern at that way- HOLD
point, depressing the HOLD MSG

1 2 3
Key accesses the Holding P 4 5 6
R
Pattern page. V
N 7 8 9
X
T
If the cursor is not displayed, D

# 0
depressing the HOLD Key BACK
accesses the POSITION FIX A B C D ENTER E F G H
Page and is used for position I J K L M N O P Q R
updates and verification as well S T U V W X Y Z * SP
as entering the primary naviga-

tion mode.
Rev. 0
Description
BACK KEY: NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG TUNE
HOLD
The BACK Key is used to
1 2 3
erase errors and page back- MSG
ward when the cursor is not dis- P

R
V
4 5 6
played. It can also be used to N

X
T
7 8 9
change data in a field if the cur- D

# 0
sor is present. BACK
I J K L M N O P Q R
SPACE (SP) KEY: NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG TUNE
The SP Key is used to enter a HOLD
1 2 3
space when entering a mes- MSG
sage on an AFIS Page. This P

R
V
4 5 6
key is not functional if AFIS is N

X
T
7 8 9
not installed in the system. D

# 0
BACK
I J K L M N O P Q R
ENTER KEY: S T U V W X Y Z * SP
When the ENTER Key is

depressed, data is entered into NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG TUNE
the computer memory. HOLD
1 2 3
MSG
P 4 5 6
R
V
N 7 8 9
X
T
DISPLAY SELECTOR KEYS: D
# 0
BACK
NAV (Navigation), VNAV
(Vertical Navigation), AFIS A B C D ENTER E F G H
(Airborne Flight Information I J K L M N O P Q R
System), FPL (Flight Plan), S T U V W X Y Z * SP
PLAN (Planning), HDG

(Heading), TUNE (Radio
Tuning), and d (Direct) are
HOLD
1 2 3
used to select the pages per- MSG
taining to that particular section. P

R
V
4 5 6
The first page of a section is dis- N

X
T
7 8 9
played first when a Display D

# 0
Selector Key is pressed. With BACK
each subsequent press of the A B C D ENTER E F G H

Key, the next sequential page I J K L M N O P Q R
will be displayed. S T U V W X Y Z * SP
Rev. 0
Description
PREVIOUS (PRV) KEY: NAV VNAV AFIS FPL ON BRT PLAN HDG TUNE
The PRV Key is used to display HOLD
1 2 3
the previous page of a section MSG
or subsection. This key also P

R
V
4 5 6
allows the operator to remain in N

X
T
7 8 9
a section or subsection by loop- D

# 0
ing from the first to the last and BACK
back to the first page of that A B C D ENTER E F G H

section or subsection. I J K L M N O P Q R
NEXT (NXT) KEY: HOLD
1 2 3
The NXT Key is used to display MSG
4 5 6
the next page of a section or P
R
V
subsection. This key also N

X
T
7 8 9
allows the operator to remain in D

# 0
a section or subsection by loop- BACK
ing from the first to the last and A B C D ENTER E F G H
back to the first page of that I J K L M N O P Q R
section or subsection. S T U V W X Y Z * SP
LINE SELECT KEYS: HOLD
1 2 3
These keys are used to place MSG
4 5 6
the cursor in the field next to P
R
V
that key. Each line select key N

X
T
7 8 9
controls 2 lines of text. White D

# 0
symbols (< or >) displayed on BACK
either side of the display indi- A B C D ENTER E F G H
cate active Line Select Keys for I J K L M N O P Q R
each individual page. S T U V W X Y Z * SP
Rev. 0
Description
COLORS:
The CDU displays are color coded to assist the operator in recogniz-
ing information. The following is a list of these colors and their mean-
ings:
Magenta Lateral TO Waypoint, Vertical TO Waypoint,

and TO Waypoint
Yellow FROM Waypoint
Caution Messages
Data entered, but not yet accepted by the computer.
Cyan Date and Times
Tuned Frequencies or Codes
Altitudes
Green Navigation and Fuel Data
General Page Data
White Page Titles and Prompts
Red Warnings
Blue Waypoint Numbers
Rev. 0
Page Display Definitions
SECTION 2
PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS

The following section contains definitions pertaining to information
and format seen when a particular function key is depressed.
PAGE DISPLAYS AT POWER-UP

For a better understanding of the GNS-X C129 functions, this section
should be reviewed prior to operating the system.
SELF TEST PAGE SELF TEST

For the first 40 seconds after
GLOBAL
the system if is turned on, the
computer performs extensive HONEYWELL
internal tests that must be INTERNATIONAL INC.
successfully completed
before proceeding further. If
the system detects a problem COPYRIGHT 2000
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
the SELF TEST display may
be replaced by a NO DATA
RECEIVED message. The Figure 2-1
unit may have to be removed
for service.
INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZATION PAGE DATE 01 JUL 00
GMT 18:42
After the Self Test is success- >
fully completed, the INITIAL- IDENT KDAL >

IZATION Page will be dis- POS ----------
played. Refer to Figure 2-2. ----------
DATE: >
14141-0624 SM06
The current Greenwich Date
is displayed as day, month Figure 2-2
and year.
GMT:
Time of day is displayed in Greenwich Mean Time hours and minutes.
Rev. 2
Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-1
IDENT:
Displays the airport identifier for the airport closest to the system shut
down position. Dashes will be displayed when the cursor is placed
over the position (POS) field.
POS:
Displays the last system position at shut down. Dashes are dis-
played when the cursor is over the IDENT field.
PART NUMBER AND SOFTWARE MODIFICATION STATUS:
The bottom line of the display shows the unit part number and the
software level of the unit.
NOTE: This page cannot be recalled once DATE, GMT, and POS
have been entered. In order to display this again, the system must
be turned off and then turned back on.
FLIGHT PLAN SECTION (FPL KEY)

Upon pressing the FPL Key the FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 Page will be
displayed and the following can be observed. Figure 2-2 shows a
sample part number and software mod status.
NOTE: The FLIGHT PLAN LIST page will be automatically displayed
if the ENTER key is depressed at least three times while on the ini-
tialization page.
FLIGHT PLAN PAGES

NOTE: If AFIS equipped the first page displayed after system initial-
ization will be the AFIS FPL LIST page in lieu of the FLIGHT PLAN
LIST page. See the AFIS Section 7-4.
NOTE: If the data base contains company routes, the first page dis-
played after system initialization will be the COMPANY ROUTES
page in lieu of the FLIGHT PLAN LIST page. If both AFIS and
Company Routes are present, the COMPANY ROUTES page is dis-
played first.
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)

The FLIGHT PLAN LIST page will be displayed automatically after
system initialization. If the initialization airport matches a departure
airport on the FLIGHT PLAN LIST, the cursor will automatically be
positioned over the first matching Flight Plan.
Rev. 1
2-2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Aug/97
There are seven pages pos-

sible with a maximum of 56 FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1
flight plans stored in non- KABQ KMSY 1
volatile memory. Each >
KDAL KHPN 6
stored flight plan's origin and KDAL KSFO 8
>
destination points are listed KHPN KORD 2
in alphabetical order. (Figure KHPN KORD 9
>
2-3) KLAX KSTL 4
KPRC KSNA 3
>
A new FLIGHT PLAN LIST KSFO KHPN 7
Page is created when the
previous page has eight flight Figure 2-3
plan origin-destination pairs
on it. Using the PRV or NXT Key pages through the Flight Plan List
subsection. (Figure 2-3)
FLIGHT PLAN "X" 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)

"X" can be Flight Plan num-
bers 1 through 56. (Figure <
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/1
KDAL
2-4)
<
BUJ
This stored flight plan page is HOT
BWZ
accessed through the <
ISLET
FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page
<
by pressing the Line Select DEPART XFILL
Key corresponding to the <
ARRIVE SELECT <
desired flight plan number, APPROACH ERASE
thus, placing the cursor over
that number, then pressing Figure 2-4
ENTER. (Figure 2-3)
Waypoint Identifiers:
Waypoint identifiers may consist of from one to six alphanumeric
characters. Up to 50 waypoint identifiers may be placed on each
stored Flight Plan. An identifier may be used more than once on the
same Flight Plan. (Figure 2-4) Other indications can be as follows:
• Indented Waypoints: Indicates a SID, STAR, or APPROACH pro-
cedure is part of the Flight Plan. (Figure 2-4)
Rev. 1
• HP (Holding Pattern):
FLIGHT PLAN 6 2/2
Indicates a holding pattern is <
RW34
programmed at a particular +++++
<
waypoint. (Figure 2-5) HP CMK
#####
• PT (Procedure Turn): <
Indicates a procedure turn is

<
programmed at a particular DEPART XFILL
waypoint. <
ARRIVE SELECT <
APPROACH ERASE
• ++++++: A flight plan dis-
continuity "fence" separating Figure 2-5
the missed approach way-
point from the rest of the approach (Figure 2-5). The system will fly
current track beyond the last waypoint prior to the fence but no Auto
Leg change will occur. No Altitude constraints will be displayed
beyond the fence. This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the
active flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond
the fence is selected using the d function.
• IAF (Initial Approach Fix): Automatically loaded from the data base
when a non-precision approach is selected.
• ARC (DME Arc end waypoint): Automatically loaded from the data
base when a non-precision approach is selected.
• FAF (Final Approach Fix): Automatically loaded from the data base
when a non-precision approach is selected.
• MAP (Missed Approach Point): Automatically loaded from the data
base when a non-precision approach is selected.
• ------: "fence" indicating a discontinuity in the flight plan. No Auto
Leg changes will take place beyond the last waypoint prior to the
fence and no ALT, ETE, ETA, or DIS will be displayed. If a d isper-
formed to a waypoint beyond this type of fence all waypoints prior to
the fence will be deleted from the active flight plan.
• ****** : Follows the last waypoint on the Flight Plan and indicates
where the next waypoint entry will normally begin.
DEPART:
Used to access the DEPARTURE Page to enter a Standard
Instrument Departure (SID). (Figure 2-5)
ARRIVE:
Used to access the ARRIVAL Page to enter a Standard Terminal
Rev. 0
Arrival (STAR) or Profile Descent. (Figure 2-5)

APPROACH:
Used to access the APPROACH Page to enter a non-precision
approach. (Figure 2-5)
XFILL: Used to transfer information between systems in a dual sys-
tem installation. In a single system installation, this prompt will not be
displayed.
SELECT or INVERT:
Used to transfer a Stored Flight Plan to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Page. Depressing the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field
brings up INVERT?, which is used to transfer the waypoint of a
Stored Flight Plan to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page in reverse
order. (Figure 2-5)
ERASE:
Used to clear an entire flight plan. (Figure 2-5)
DEPARTURE Page
Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to DEPART on
the FLIGHT PLAN Page. With the cursor over DEPART press
ENTER.
NOTE: Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that partic-
ular field or DEPARTURE airport field will flash if no Departure is
available. A NO SIDS AVAILABLE message will appear at the bot-
tom of the screen.
DEPARTURE:
Departure airport identifier. This field prefills if first waypoint on the
flight plan is an airport or runway, or it can be manually entered.
(Figure 2-6)
DEPARTURE KLAX 1/1 <
RUNWAY: RUNWAY ------
SID ------ <
Departing runway. This field TRANSITION ------
prefills if first waypoint on the RW06L
<
flight plan is a runway, or it RW06R
can be selected from a list RW07L
<
RW07R
made available by pressing
the Line Select Key adjacent ‘ erase
to the RUNWAY field.
(Figure 2-6) Figure 2-6
Rev. 0
SID:
The Standard Instrument Departure (SID) can be selected from a list
made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the SID
field. This is the default field if the departure airport is preprogrammed
on the flight plan.
TRANSITION:
The Transition waypoint can be selected from a list made available by
pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSITION field.
WAYPOINTS OF SID:
DEPARTURE KLAX 1/1 <
The waypoints that constitute RUNWAY RW06L
the SID. (Figure 2-7) SID GMN1 <
TRANSITION AVE
SELECT?: WAYPOINTS OF SID:
GMN
Used to select the defined COREZ
SID. (Figure 2-7) AVE
< <
ERASE: SELECT? ‘ eraseERASE
Used to erase a SID. (Figure

2-7) Figure 2-7
ARRIVAL Page
Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to ARRIVE on the
FLIGHT PLAN Page. With the cursor over ARRIVE press ENTER.
NOTE: Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that particu-
lar field or ARRIVAL field will flash if no Arrival is available, and a NO
STARS AVAILABLE message will appear at the bottom of the screen.
ARRIVAL:
ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 <
Arrival airport identifier. This RUNWAY ------
field prefills if the last way- TRANSITION ------ <
point on the flight plan is an STAR ------
RWO6L
airport or runway, or can be <
RW06R
manually entered. (Figure 2- RW07L
<
8) RW07R
RUNWAY:
Arriving runway. This field
prefills if the last waypoint on Figure 2-8
the flight plan is a runway, or
can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line
Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field. (Figure 2-8)
Rev. 0
TRANSITION:
The Transition waypoint may be prefilled or selected from a list made
available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSI-
TION field. This is the default field if the airport ID is preprogrammed
on the flight plan.
STAR:
The Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be selected from a list
made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the
STAR field.
WAYPOINTS OF STAR: ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 <
RUNWAY RW06L
The waypoints that constitute TRANSITION CIVET <
the STAR. (Figure 2-9) STAR CIVET1
WAYPOINTS OF STAR:
SELECT?: CIVET
BREMR
Used to select the defined ARNES
STAR. (Figure 2-9) < <
SELECT? ERASE
ERASE:
Figure 2-9
Used to erase a STAR.
(Figure 2-9 )
APPROACH Page
Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to APPROACH
on the FLIGHT PLAN Page. With the cursor over APPROACH
press ENTER.
NOTE: Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that partic-
ular field or Approach Airport field will flash if no Approach is avail-
able and a NO APPROACH AVAILABLE message will appear at
the bottom of the screen.
APCH: <
APCH KLAX 1/2 <
RUNWAY ------
Approach airport identifier. <
TYPE ------
<
This field prefills if last way- TRANSITION ------
point on the flight plan is an RW24R
<
RW24L
airport or runway, or can be RW07R
manually entered. (Figure 2- <
RW07L
10) <
‘ eraseERASE
Figure 2-10
Rev. 0
RUNWAY:
<
APCH KLAX 1/1 <
Approach runway prefills if RUNWAY RW24R
only one runway is available, TYPE NDB <
last waypoint on Flight Plan TRANSITION LAHAB
WPTS OF APPROACH:
is a runway, or can be select- IAF LAHAB MAP RW24R
ed from a list made available LAX16 +++++
by pressing the Line Select DOWNE HP RAFFS
Key adjacent to the RUN- <
FAF OSNB <
WAY field. (Figure 2-11) SELECT?erase ERASE
This is the default field if the
airport ID is preprogrammed Figure 2-11
on the flight plan.
TYPE (Circle, VOR, NDB, or RNAV):
Type may be prefilled or selected from a list made available by press-
ing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TYPE field. In order to bring
up a circling approach, the type field must be selected with no runway
in the runway field.
NOTE: If the runway selected on the Approach Page differs from the
runway dictated by the STAR, "SEL RWY FROM STAR PG" is dis-
played at the bottom of the screen.
TRANSITION:
The Transition waypoint may be prefilled or selected from a list made
available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSI-
TION field. (Figure 2-10)
WAYPOINTS OF APPROACH:
The waypoints that constitute the APPROACH. (Figure 2-11)
Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at a particular waypoint.
(Figure 2-11)
• PT (Procedure Turn):
Indicates a Procedure Turn is programmed at a particular waypoint.
• ARC (DME ARC):
Indicates a DME ARC is programmed at a particular waypoint.
• IAF:
Indicates the Initial Approach Fix.
• FAF:
Indicates the Final Approach Fix.
Rev. 0
• MAP:
Indicates the Missed Approach Fix.
• FCF :
Indicates Final Approach Course Alignment Fix.
• ++++++:
Separates the missed approach procedure waypoint from the rest of
the approach. When the approach is flown, the system will continue
to provide guidance along the final approach course and beyond the
MAP until the pilot manually sequences to the missed approach way-
point by using a DIRECT TO or HEADING mode procedure. (Figure
2-11) No Auto Leg changes will occur beyond the last waypoint prior
to the fence. This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the active
flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond the
fence is selected using the d function.
SELECT?:
Used to select the defined APPROACH. (Figure 2-11)
ERASE:
Used to erase an APPROACH. (Figure 2-11)
AIRWAY Page
Enroute Airways may be manually entered on a Flight Plan Page by
preceding the route or airway ident with a pound sign (#), e.g., #J (Jet
Airway), #V (VOR Airway), #UG (Upper Green) or #R (Red Airway).
The waypoint on the Flight Plan that the cursor is placed over or after
must be part of the Airway being entered in order for the Airway to be
accepted. This waypoint will normally be the From waypoint on the
AIRWAY Waypoint Page.
AIRWAY:
< AIRWAY J29 1/1 <
Airway identifier. (Figure 2-12) FR MEM ROD
< TIGRS DJB <
FR: TINGS CXR14
< PXV DORET <
Starting point on airway. IMPEL JHW
(Figure 2-12) <
JUDDI SYR
<
KURTZ TUPER
TO: TO KURTZ? LAGGS <
<
SELECT ENDING WPT
Ending point on airway as
selected by the operator.
Rev. 0
SELECT ENDING WPT:

Select the desired ending waypoint on the airway, by moving the cur-
sor up or down and depress ENTER. (Figure 2-12)
ACTIVE FPL (Flight Plan)Page
FR:
ACTIVE FPL 1/2
Current FROM waypoint. FR MEM
TO BWG 205 11
May also display DIRECT, <
PSEUDO VORTAC, DME ------

<
ARC, or PROCEDURE KDAL -CMK
TURN. (Figure 2-13) DFW
<
KHART
TO: DEPART
< <
ARRIVE DIS
Current TO waypoint.
(Figure 2-13)
Figure 2-13
Waypoint Identifiers:Up to
100 waypoint identifiers may be placed on the Active Flight Plan
Pages. An identifier may be used more than once on the same Flight
Plan.
• Indented Waypoints: indicate a SID, STAR, or APPROACH
Procedure is part of the Flight Plan. (Figure 2-13, DFW)
• HP (Holding Pattern): indi- ACTIVE FPL 2/2
cates a holding pattern is RYMES -10 3000
programmed at a particular <
ISLET 2000G
waypoint. (Figure 2-14) MAPRW34 435G
++++++
<
• PT (Procedure Turn): indi- HP CMK
cates a procedure turn is <
******
DEPART
programmed at a particular ARRIVE ALT
waypoint. < <
APPROACH ERASE
------:
Figure 2-14
A "fence" separating the cur-
rent FR/TO leg from the originally selected Active Flight Plan when the
TO waypoint is not on the original Flight Plan. Also separates non-con-
tinuous Flight Plan segments. (Figure 2-13) No Auto Leg change will
occur to waypoints that appear after the fence. This type of fence will
not cause waypoints of the active flight plan to be deleted prior to the
fence if a waypoint beyond the fence is selected using the d func-
tion.
Rev. 1
NOTE: When a "fence" (++++++) appears in an Approach it separates

the missed approach holding fix from the rest of the approach. (Figure 2-
14) No Auto Leg change will occur to waypoints beyond the fence.
******:
Same as stored Flight Plan Page.
DEPART:
ARRIVE:
APPROACH:
ETA: (ETE/DIS/ALT)
Estimated Time of Arrival at
each waypoint on the Active
ACTIVE FPL 1/2
Flight Plan based on current DIRECT
groundspeed. (Figure 2-15) TO KHART 19:37
19DFW 19:49
NOTE: When the cursor is ELD 20:13
placed over the ETA field and MEI 21:03
the BACK Key is pressed, DELBE 21:22
<
ETE, DIS, or ALT can be dis- DEPART
played. Press ENTER to <
ARRIVE ETA
<
APPROACH ERASE
select the desired option. No
ETE, ETA, ALT or DIS infor-
mation is displayed for way- Figure 2-15
points beyond the missed
approach "fence" (++++++) or the flight plan discontinuity (------).
ETE:
Estimated Time Enroute between waypoints on the Active Flight Plan
based on current groundspeed.
DIS:
Distance between each waypoint on the Active Flight Plan.
Rev. 0
ALT:
ACTIVE FPL 2/2
Constraint altitude and way- RYMES -10 3000
point offset of programmed <
ISLET 2000G
MAPRW34 435G
VNAV waypoints for applica-
++++++
ble waypoints on the Active <
HP CMK
Flight Plan (Figure 2-16). ******
<
DEPART
NOTE: No database altitude ARRIVE ALT <
<
constraints will be displayed APPROACH ERASE
at the MAP if the MAP is
abeam or beyond the run- Figure 2-16
way threshold . No altitude
constraints are displayed on an approach if a PT is part of the
approach procedure.
The following may appear in the waypoint altitude field:
• FL: Flight Level
• A: at or above
• B: at or below
• G: glide path (programmed Flight Path Angle)
NOTE: If an approach is programmed at the destination airport, and
the MAP is the end of the runway, the altitude value displayed next to
the MAP is approximately 50 feet above the runway threshold eleva-
tion. If the MAP is prior to the end of the runway and the approach is
straight-in, the altitude displayed at the MAP is computed based on a
line drawn from the FAF through the MAP to a point 50 feet above
the runway threshold. The altitude may not be the MDA (Figure 2-
16). If no approach is programmed, the altitude value will be the air-
port elevation regardless of runway selection.
The Waypoint VNAV offset is given in nautical miles where a nega-
tive (-)offset is prior to the waypoint (Figure 2-16, interpreted as
"cross ten miles before RYMES at 3000 feet") and a positive offset is
after the waypoint. If dashes appear in the altitude constraint field,
NO altitude is programmed at that waypoint.
ERASE:
Same as for Stored Flight Plans except the current FROM/TO leg
cannot be erased. The Active Flight Plan is automatically erased
upon system shut-down.
Rev. 1
NAVIGATION SECTION (NAV KEY)

Upon pressing the NAV Key the NAVIGATION 1/4 Page will be dis-
played and the following can be observed.
NAVIGATION PAGES
NOTE: If AFIS is installed in the system, the NAV section will consist
of five pages.
NAVIGATION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4)

FR:
The FROM waypoint identifier
is displayed on the left. If the < NAVIGATION 1/4
FR 19DFW 20:28
system has a valid ground TO ELD 20:30
< >
speed, the time of departure
or time overhead at that way- DIS 1.6
>
point displayed on the right. ETE 00:00.6
This line can also display DTK 074
DIRECT, HOLD, PROCE- GS 156
WIND 284/ 7
DURE TURN, DME ARC or -AUTO-
>
PSEUDO VORTAC. (Figure

2-17)
Figure 2-17
TO:
The TO waypoint identifier is displayed on the left. If the system has a
valid ground speed, the ETA at that waypoint is displayed on the right.
The TO field may also display AR, HP or PT if the waypoint indicates
a DME ARC, Holding Pattern or Procedure Turn. The ETA field can
be changed to display constraint altitude and waypoint offset distance
if an altitude constraint has been programmed at the current TO way-
point by placing the cursor over this field and dressing the BACK Key
(Figure 2-17) See Section 3 for the procedure.
NX:
This line is normally blank (Figure 2-18) except during Waypoint Alert
(30 seconds prior to crossing the TO waypoint). In this case the next
(NX) waypoint identifier on the Active Flight Plan and the ETA at that
waypoint is displayed (Figure 2-19). When a Procedure Turn, Holding
Pattern, Heading, or Heading Intercept mode is in use, appropriate
information pertaining to that mode will be displayed in this field.
Rev. 0
DIS:
<
NAVIGATION 1/4
The distance in nautical miles FR 19DFW 20:28
and tenths from the aircraft <
TO ELD 20:30 <
present position to the TO NX MEI 21:49
DIS (42) 1.6
waypoint. During Waypoint ETE 00:00.6
Alert, the distance in whole DTK (90) 074 <
nautical miles to the NX way- GS 156
point on the Active Flight WIND 284/ 7 <
Plan is displayed in parenthe- -AUTO-
ses. (Figure 2-18)
Figure 2-18
ETE:
The estimated time enroute in hours, minutes and tenths, from the air-
craft present position to the TO waypoint based on current ground-
speed. (Figure 2-18)
DTK:
The desired track is the Great Circle course in whole degrees
between the FROM and TO waypoints. When in the PSEUDO VOR-
TAC mode, the DTK is entered by the operator. During the Waypoint
Alert, desired track to the next (NX) waypoint on the Active Flight Plan
is displayed in parentheses. (Figure 2-18)
NOTE: The DTK field will be dashes if the FROM waypoint or pre-
sent position are north of N 70° or south of S 60° Latitude, unless a
manual MAG VAR is entered or a discrete MAG/True switch is moved
to the True position.
GS:
< NAVIGATION 1/4
The current groundspeed. FR KHART 20:02
(Figure 2-19) <
TO 19DFW -10 15000A <
WIND: DIS 47.3

ETE 00:19.4
The current wind direction DTK 079
<
referenced to True North and GS 146
speed in knots. (Figure 2- WIND 160/ 14 <
XFILL? -AUTO-
19)
Figure 2-19
XFILL:
If the aircraft is configured for dual systems, the XFILL prompt will
appear on line 10 indicating the systems contain dissimilar data.
Rev. 0
NOTE: XFILL will not appear when DME ARC, ARC Intercept,
Procedure Turn or Holding Pattern are in progress on the system
performing the procedure.
AUTO:
The leg change mode. AUTO or MAN, may be selected if the cursor
is over this field using the BACK Key. (Figure 2-19) If AUTO is
selected the system will sequence to the next leg on the FPL. If MAN
is selected the system will not sequence to the next leg on the FPL
and fly the current track.
NAVIGATION 1/4 with a Holding Pattern, Procedure Turn, Heading,
or Heading Intercept Programmed.
HOLD:
Indicates that a Holding <
NAVIGATION 1/4
Procedure has been initiated HOLD RIGHT MANUAL
AT MEI 20:41
and is displayed 30 seconds <
HOLDING
<
prior to crossing the HP way- DIS 3.3

point. (Figure 2-20) ETE 00:08.3
INBOUND CRS 101
• RIGHT or LEFT: <
GS 159
WIND 292/ 10 <
Indicates the programmed
turn direction around the
holding pattern as entered on
the HOLD Page. (Figure 2- Figure 2-20
20)
• MANUAL or AUTO:
Indicates the programmed EXIT MODE as entered on the Hold Page.
Selecting MANUAL initiates a continuous hold at the fix until some
action is taken by the pilot to exit the hold. Selecting AUTO will cause
the aircraft to EXIT HOLD the next time the aircraft passes over the
fix (Figure 2-21). If AUTO is programmed during the hold procedure,
the aircraft will sequence to the next waypoint on the Active Flight
Plan the next time the hold fix is crossed. This field can be edited
using the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field. (Figure 2-20)
AT:
The Holding Pattern procedure is in progress at the TO waypoint and
the ETA next time over the holding fix if ETA has been selected and
the system has a valid ground speed. This field can also display the
following: (Figure 2-20)
Rev. 0
Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at the TO waypoint.
• PT (Procedure Turn):
Indicates a procedure turn is programmed from the database at the
TO waypoint. The airplane will fly the procedure turn. The next time
over the PT waypoint, the system will sequence to the following way-
point on the flight plan.
• AR (DME Arc)
Indicates a DME Arc is programmed at the TO waypoint.
HOLDING STATUS MESSAGE: (Line 4)
• DIRECT ENTRY:
Indicates the system will use a direct entry to the holding pattern.
(This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the holding pro-
cedure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix.) (Figure 2-
20)
• TEARDROP ENTRY:
Indicates the system will use a teardrop entry to the holding pattern.
(This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the hold proce-
dure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix the second
time.)
• PARALLEL ENTRY:
Indicates the system will use a parallel entry to the holding pattern.
(This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the hold proce-
dure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix the second
time.)
• HOLDING:
Normal status while holding.
• EXIT HOLD:
Indicates the system will exit the holding pattern the next time over
the holding fix. The ETE to the holding fix is also displayed.
Rev. 0
DIS:
<
NAVIGATION 1/4 <
The direct distance in nauti- HOLD RIGHT AUTO
cal miles and tenths from the <
AT MEI 20:41 <
EXIT HOLD 00:07.9
aircraft present position to DIS 4.8
the holding fix. (Figure 2-21) ETE 00:07.9
INBOUND CRS 101
ETE: GS 154
WIND 286/ 12
The estimated time enroute
to the next time over holding
fix based on the path around
the Hold “racetrack”. (Figure Figure 2-21
2-21)
INBOUND CRS (course):
The inbound holding course in whole degrees. (Figure 2-21)
GS:
The current groundspeed. (Figure 2-21)
WIND:
The current wind direction referenced to True North and speed in
knots. (Figure 2-21)
NOTE: The leg change mode (AUTO or MAN normally displayed on
the last line of NAVIGATION Page 1) is not displayed while holding.

Pressing the NAV Key again will display the second NAVIGATION
Page and the following can be observed.
FR/DIRECT/HOLD/PROCEDURE TURN/DME ARC:
Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1/4.
TO/AT/AR/HP/PT:
NX/Holding Status:
Rev. 0
WIND:
<
NAVIGATION 2/4
The first field displays head- DIRECT 09:20
wind/tailwind in knots with an <
AT D259J 09:44
up arrow (↑) for tailwind or a
WIND % 11 8&
down arrow (↓) for headwind. ETA-RW11RC 09:54
The second field displays the FUEL-RW11RC 1727
crosswind component in TKE R 008
knots with a right pointing XTK TRMNL L 0.06
arrow (→) for a left cross- SXTK ------
wind or a left pointing arrow
(← ) for a right crosswind. Figure 2-22
(Figure 2-22)
ETA:
Estimated Time of Arrival at the last waypoint on the Active Flight
Plan prior to a “fence” (- - - - - or ++++++ ). A “fence” is a discontinu-
ity in the flight plan. No data is computed beyond the fence and there
is no Auto Leg change across the fence. (Figure 2-22)
FUEL:
Estimated fuel remaining at destination. (Figure 2-22)
TKE:
The Track Angle Error as defined as the difference between the
desired track and the actual track in degrees. R (right) and L (left)
are displayed to show the direction of error in relation to the desired
track.
XTK:
The crosstrack distance is the lateral displacement of the aircraft in
nautical miles and tenths left or right of the desired track (125 NM
maximum). TRMNL, APRCH or ENRTE is displayed to indicate the
current CDI sensitivity. A parenthesis around any of these indicates
the displayed sensitivity has been selected manually. See Section 3
for operating procedures (Figure 2-22). Scaling for the TRMNL,
APPR, and ENRTE CDI sensitivity is as follows:
Enroute: 5NM full scale deflection.

Terminal: 1NM full scale deflection.
Approach: 0.3NM full scale deflection.
Rev. 0
SXTK:
The selected crosstrack distance entered by the pilot to provide
steering to an offset course parallel to the desired track (99.9 NM
maximum). (Figure 2-22)

Pressing the NAV Key again will display the third NAVIGATION
FR/DIRECT/HOLD/PROCEDURE TURN/DME ARC:
Same as NAVIGATION 1/4.
TO/AT/AR/HP/PT:
NX/Holding Status:
DRIFT:
<
NAVIGATION 3/4
The drift angle, in whole FR VUZ 19:36
degrees, left or right of air- < TO VXV 20:04 <
craft heading compared to
DRIFT R 001
current track. (Figure 2-23) VAR (MAN) E 2
TAS 420 <
VAR:
HDG 044
The magnetic variation value BRG 045 <
TK 045
in whole degrees computed
automatically between N70
00.0 and S 60 00.0 latitude. Figure 2-23
Manual variation can be
entered and overrides the automatic computation. Manual entry of
variation is required north of N70:00.0 and south of S60:00.0 latitude.
(MAN) will be displayed in the VAR field after a manual entry is
made. See Section 3 for procedures. (Figure 2-23)
TAS:
The aircraft true airspeed in knots received from the Air Data
Computer. If TAS is manually inserted, MAN will be displayed.
(Figure 2-23)
NOTE: The maximum enterable manual TAS is 850 knots. The TAS
field is enterable only if air data is invalid.
Rev. 0
HDG:
The heading input received from an IRS or the aircraft compass sys-
tem. If HDG can be manually inserted, MAN will be displayed.
(Figure 2-23)
BRG:
The bearing in whole degrees from the aircraft present position to
the TO waypoint. (Figure 2-23)
TK:
The track angle in whole degrees. (Figure 2-23)

Pressing the NAV Key again will display the fourth NAVIGATION
IDENT:
A waypoint identifier of a fix to NAVIGATION 4/4
be overflown can be entered
here to update the system IDENT ------ >
position. (Figure 2-24)
POS N 34 42.56 >
POS: W112 37.31
IRS 0.1 VPU 0.0 >
<
The current composite posi-
LCS 0.1 GPS 0.0
tion (latitude and longitude) >
computed in degrees, min-

utes, and hundredths of min-
Figure 2-24
utes. (Figure 2-24)
VLF, IRS/INS, VPU, LCS, and GPS:
A listing of all interfaced sensors. The radial difference between the
individual sensor position and the composite position is displayed in
nautical miles and tenths. Sensors not being used in the composite
position solution will display the radial difference in yellow. Sensors
being used will display the radial difference in green. The GPS sen-
sor will normally be the sole contributing sensor to the composite
position as long as RAIM is available. (Figure 2-24)
NOTE: IRS radial error is always green because velocity values are
used to aid GPS position.
Rev. 0
VLF SUBSECTION PAGES

NOTE: The sensor SUBSECTION Pages may be accessed by plac-
ing the cursor over the individual position sensor and pressing the
ENTER Key. Use the NAV, PRV or NXT Key to page through the
sensor SUBSECTION pages.
Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4/4 Page (if AFIS is installed in
the system, access is through the NAVIGATION 4/5 Page) by press-
ing the Line Select Key corresponding to the VLF sensor, then press-
ing ENTER.
VLF SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4)

POS:
Same as on NAVIGATION 4/4.
VLF:
VLF SUBSECTION 1/4
The actual position computed
POS N 38 49.90
by the sensor, when in the W094 53.40
NAV mode. (Figure 2-25) VLF N 38 49.90
W094 53.40
DIF:
The difference between the DIF‘ N 0.00
composite position and the E 0.00
sensor computed position in
degrees, minutes and hun-
Figure 2-25
dredths. (Figure 2-25)
Pressing the NXT Key will display the second VLF SUBSECTION
QUALITY:
Quality Factor is a numerical display that indicates the reliability of
position data and determines the weight of the VLF/Omega Sensor
input to the composite position. The number will range from 2 to 7
(with 2 being optimum) in the primary navigation mode, and from 8 to
99 in the dead reckoning mode (DR). NO STD will be displayed if the
rubidium frequency standard in the RPU is unstable. (Figure 2-26)
Rev. 0
DR#:
VLF SUBSECTION 2/4
The number of times the
VLF/Omega Sensor has QUALITY 2
DR# 1
been in DR since first enter- DR TIME: 3
ing the VLF (primary) naviga- VLF‘ RCVD 8
tion mode. This information USED 6
is not displayed if the system OMEGA RCVD 8
has never been in DR. USED 2
(Figure 2-26)
DR TIME: Figure 2-26
The total number of minutes
the VLF/Omega Sensor has been in DR since the operator last man-
ually verified position. This information is not displayed if the system
has never been in DR. (Figure 2-26)
VLF RCVD:
The number of U.S. Naval Communication stations being received by
the VLF/Omega Sensor. (Figure 2-26)
USED:
The number of communication stations being used for navigation.
(Figure 2-26)
OMEGA RCVD:
The number of Omega stations being received by the VLF/Omega
Sensor. (Figure 2-26)
USED:
The number of Omega stations being used for navigation. (Figure 2-
26)
NOTE: A maximum of eight stations in any combination can be used
for navigation.
Rev. 0

Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third VLF SUBSECTION
Column 1: (Figure 2-27) VLF COMM Stations

• WSH: Jim Creek, Washington
• AUS: Northwest Cape, Australia
• ANT: Anthorne, England
• MNE: Cutler, Maine
• HAW: Lualualei, Hawaii
• JPN: Yosami, Japan
• GBR: Rugby, England or
• ANN: Annapolis, Maryland
VLF SUBSECTION 3/4

Column 2:
<
WSH 99 +
The station amplitude rang- AUS 00 TOO FAR
ANT 99 +
ing from 01 (minimum <
MNE 99 +
acceptable) to 99 (maximum HAW 99 +
<
strength). Dashes (-) indicate JPN 99 SPARE
the station amplitude is less <
GBR‘ 99 +
than the minimum accept- ANN 99 +
able. (Figure 2-27)
Figure 2-27
Column 3: Status Messages. (Figure 2-27)

+: The station is being used for navigation.
-: The station is weak or unacquired.
TOO FAR:
The station is not used because of its distance from the aircraft posi-
tion.
Rev. 0
SPARE:
The station is acquired and acceptable but is not needed for naviga-
tion.
DESELECT:
The station has been manually deselected.
CUTOUT:
The station has been eliminated from use because its position deter-
mining information is unacceptable.
UNSTABLE:
The station has sufficient amplitude for use but has not passed the
stability test.
FAILED:
The computer has detected a failure in the receiver assigned to that
station. A message indicating a VLF/OMEGA receiver has failed will
be displayed on the sensor messages page as RCVR FAIL
Pressing the NXT Key again will display the fourth VLF SUBSEC-
TION Page and the following can be observed.
Column 1: (Figure 2-28) OMEGA Stations
• NOR: Aldra, Norway
• LIB: Liberia, Africa
• HAW: Haiku, Hawaii
• DAK: LeMoure, N.
Dakota VLF SUBSECTION 4/4
• REN: Reunion Island, <

NOR 99 SPARE
Indian Ocean LIB 99 SPARE
<
HAW 99 +
• ARG: Gulfo Nuevo, DAK 99 +
Argentina REN 00 TOO FAR
<
ARG 99 SPARE
• AUS: Darriman, <
AUS‘ 99 SPARE
Australia JPN 99 SPARE
• JPN: Tsushima, Japan Figure 2-28
Rev. 0
Columns 2 and 3:
Same as VLF SUBSECTION 3/4.
IRS/INS SUBSECTION PAGES
IRS (or INS) SUBSECTION 1/2 (Page 1 of 2)

POS:
The position in this field is
the same as POS on NAVI- IRS SUBSECTION 1/2
GATION 4/4. (Figure 2-29)
POS N 49 50.20
IRS/INS: W111 41.60
IRS N 38 50.10
The actual position comput- W094 55.20
ed by the specified sensor
when in NAV mode. (Figure
DIF‘ N 11 00.10
2-29) W 16 46.30
DIF:
Figure 2-29
The difference between the
composite position and the sensor computed position in degrees,
minutes, and hundredths. (Figure 2-29)
IRS SUBSECTION 2/2 (Page 2 of 2)

TIME TO NAV:
The time remaining until alignment is complete. (Figure 2-30)
CURRENT MODE:
IRS SUBSECTION 2/2
This field annunciates the cur-
rent mode of the IRS. The IRS STATUS
messages that can appear TIME TO NAV ----
are ATTITUDE, ALIGN, or
NAV. (Figure 2-30) CURRENT MODE:
NOTE: Page 2 is only dis-

played with an IRS. NAV
Figure 2-30
Rev. 0
VPU SUBSECTION PAGES

ing the Line Select Key corresponding to the VPU sensor, then
pressing ENTER.
VPU SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4)

POS:
VPU SUBSECTION 1/4
The position in this field is
the same as POS on NAVI- POS N 38 49.90
W094 53.40
GATION 4/4. (Figure 2-31) VPU N 38 49.90
W094 53.40
VPU:
The actual position computed
DIF N 0.00
by the sensor, when in the E 0.00
NAV mode. (Figure 2-31)
DIF: Figure 2-31
The difference between the composite position and the sensor com-
puted position in degrees, minutes and hundredths. (Figure 2-31)
Pressing the NXT Key again will display the second VPU SUBSEC-
TION Page and the following can be observed.
QUALITY:
The numerical display in this field indicates the reliability of the posi-
tion data from the VPU. The number will range from 2 to 99 (with 2
being optimum and 99 as dead reckoning). (Figure 2-32)
ADVISE IF>:
VPU SUBSECTION 2/4
This field is an enterable field
in which the operator may QUALITY 99 >
ADVISE IF > --
input a quality factor value
from 2 to 98. If the VPU CURRENT MODE:
QUALITY exceeds this value
a message is displayed on
SENSOR MESSAGES NO MEASURMENTS
Page. (Figure 2-32)
Figure 2-32
Rev. 0
NOTE: Entering 99 in this field will eliminate any previously entered

value and no CHECK QUALITY message will appear.
CURRENT MODE: Indicates the current mode of VPU navigation.
The messages that can appear under it: (Figure 2-32)
• NO MEASUREMENTS indicates that VPU is not receiving valid
data for navigation.
• VOR/DME indicates that distance and bearing (rho/theta) informa-
tion is used to generate VPU position.
• DME/DME indicates distance (rho/rho) data is received and used
to generate VPU position.
• BAD GEOMETRY indicates that station geometry is inadequate for
navigation.
NAV 1 - CONFLICT or NAV 2 - CONFLICT:
The VPU is not using a manually or keyboard tuned station because
of a possible station frequency conflict within the aircraft’s current
line-of-sight. (Figure 2-32)

Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third VPU SUBSECTION
VPU Sensor With Single Channel DME Inputs (Figure 2-33)
NAV 1 and NAV 2:
VPU SUBSECTION 3/4
The station identifier and fre- VPU STATIONS
quency being used for navi- NAV 1 PRX 113.60
gation. RNG 51.2
BRG 304
RNG:
NAV 2 UIM 114.00
The range in nautical miles RNG 34.7
and tenths from aircraft pre- BRG 252
sent position to the DME sta-
tion.
Figure 2-33
BRG:
Bearing in whole degrees from aircraft present position to the VOR.
Rev. 0
VPU with Multiple Channel DME Inputs (Figure 2-34)

NAV 1:
VPU SUBSECTION 3/4
The stations received by the VPU STATIONS
NAV 1 VOR/DME receivers. NAV 1 TCL 117.00
The station identifier is RNG 83.4
shown adjacent to the field BRG 315
with the ACTIVE frequency. CH 2 MXF 113.70
RNG 10.6
RNG: CH 3 TGE 117.30
RNG 42.5
Same as above.
BRG: Figure 2-34
Same as above.
CH 2:
The station identifier and frequency for an additional station that the
multiple channel DME is receiving. This frequency may or may not
be displayed on the control head.
RNG:
The range in nautical miles and tenths from the aircraft’s present
position to the Channel 2 DME station.
CH 3:
The station identifier and frequency for the third station that is being
received. This frequency is not displayed on the control head, and is
automatically tuned by the system.
RNG:
Same as for CH 2.

Pressing the NXT Key again will display the fourth VPU SUBSEC-
TION Page and the following can be observed. If the VPU has multi-
ple channel DME inputs VPU SUBSECTION 4/4 appears and dis-
plays NAV 2 data. The page appears the same as VPU SUBSEC-
TION 3/4.
Rev. 0
GPS SUBSECTION PAGES

ing the Line Select Key corresponding to the GPS sensor, then
pressing ENTER.
GPS SUBSECTION 1/3 GPS SUBSECTION 1/3

(Page 1 of 3)
See Figure 2-35.
POS N 34 38.83
POS: W112 25.08
GPS N 34 38.82
The current composite posi- W112 25.10
tion (latitude and longitude) DIF N 0.01
computed in degrees, min- E 0.02
utes, and hundredths of min-
utes.
Figure 2-35
GPS:
The current GPS position. This information is only displayed when
GPS is in the NAV mode.
DIF:
The difference between the composite position and sensor computed
position in degrees, minutes and hundredths.
GPS SUBSECTION 2/3 (Page 2 of 3)

Pressing the NXT Key will display the second GPS SUBSECTION
Page and the following can be observed. See Figure 2-36.
HPE:
Horizontal Position Error dis- GPS SUBSECTION 2/3
played in nautical miles as a
measure of GPS accuracy. HPE 03.65NM
POS UNCERT 07.30NM
POS UNCERT: GPS TIME 23:43:55
Estimated Position STATE NAVIGATION

Uncertainty, in nautical miles, MODE OCEANIC/REMOTE
when GPS is in navigation ALT AIDED? YES
RAIM/FDE YES/YES
mode.
Figure 2-36
Rev. 0
GPS TIME:
GPS Time in hours, minutes and seconds. The advisory time is dis-
played when at least one satellite is being tracked, other-wise the
time field displays dashes.
NOTE: GPS TIME may vary several seconds from GMT due to leap
second input of UTC.
STATE: The GPS receiver state can be one of the following:
Dashes: Idle or no mode data.
INITIALIZE: The receiver is updated with initial position and time
information.
SKY SEARCH: No almanac is available. The system searches for
any satellite in the visible table based on the internal
or external time, data, and position and then assigns
channels in order received.
ACQUISITION: Constellation selection and channel assignments are
being done. Carrier and code lock are in progress.
TRANSITION: The receiver is transitioning from one state, such as
ACQUISITION, to another state, such as NAVIGA-
TION.
NAVIGATION: The GPS receiver is in navigation mode and has at
least a two dimensional position fix.
DR: The system is in dead reckon mode. When the posi-
tion is valid and sufficient satellite measurements are
unavailable, the receiver will continue to output valid
position for a maximum of 30 seconds while using
the last known velocity and track information. The
position is invalid after 30 seconds.
MODE:
Possible receiver modes are ENROUTE, TERMINAL, and
APPROACH. These modes are used to determine what accuracy
parameters should be used for a particular phase of flight.
ALT AIDED?:
Indicates the GPS receiver is using an externally supplied altitude
input for position calculation.
Rev. 0
RAIM:/FDE
Indicates RAIM or FDE is Available or Unavailable. YES/YES -
Available; NO/NO - Not Available
SATS TRACKED:
Indicates the number satellites presently being tracked.
GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3)

Pressing the NXT Key again
will display the third GPS GPS SUBSECTION 3/3
SUBSECTION Page and the SAT AZ EL SNR HLTH T
-- --- -- --- ---- -
following can be observed. 14 304 71 44 GOOD Y
This page displays the GPS 15 214 23 40 GOOD Y
22 124 47 44 GOOD Y
receiver status. The GPS 25 46 35 43 GOOD Y
receiver is an 8 channel 29 304 40 40 GOOD Y
receiver, therefore, up to 8 18 288 10 36 GOOD Y
lines of satellite information -- --- -- -- ---- -
is displayed. The information
displayed is as follows: Figure 2-37
(Figure 2-37)
GPS SAT:
This is the satellite (PRN) number.
AZ:
This is the satellite azimuth position displayed in degrees.
EL:
Satellite elevation displayed in degrees above the horizon.
SNR:
This the received signal-to-noise ratio for each satellite.
HLTH:
Satellite health is displayed as BAD or GOOD.
T:
YES or NO displayed as to whether this satellite is presently being
tracked.
Rev. 0
LORAN-C (LCS) SUBSECTION PAGES

If multiple Loran sensors are installed each sensor has its own sub-
section of pages (e.g. LCS1)
LCS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3)

POS: The position in this
field is the same as POS on LCS1 SUBSECTION 1/3
NAV Page 4.
LCS: The actual position POS N 33 29.80
computed by the Loran-C W075 43.30
sensor, when in the NAV LCS1 N 33 29.60
mode. W075 43.20
DIF: The difference between DIF N 0.20

the NMU composite position E 0.10
and the sensor computed
position, in degrees, minutes, Figure 2-38
and tenths.

ESTIMATED ERROR:
LCS1 SUBSECTION 1/3
(Estimated Position Error)
Loran position based on the
geometry of the Loran sta- POS N 33 29.80
tions contributing to the sen- W075 43.30
sor position. The number will LCS1 N 33 29.60
range from 0.1 to 9.9 nm, 3.0 W075 43.20
or greater EPE will cause the
DIF N 0.20
Loran sensor to DR. The E 0.10
higher the EPE the less
weight the Loran sensor
input is given in the compos- Figure 2-39
ite position.
Rev. 0
CURRENT MODE: Indicates the current mode of Loran navigation.

The messages that can appear:
INSUF STATIONS indicates that there is an insufficient
number of stations for navigation.
NO CONVERGENCE indicates the the Loran-C sensor can
not acquire and track from initial position or cannot converge
through base line extension region.
LORAN FAIL indicates that the sensor interface is not
operable.
ACCURACY WARN indicates that EPE > 2.9 nm.
NAV indicates that the Loran is suitable for navigation.
STATION SEARCH indicates that the Loran receiver is
attempting to locate stations.

(AUTO Mode)
AUTO: The Loran-C Sensor LCS1 SUBSECTION 3/3
Mode of operation.
<
AUTO
Column 1: The numerical 9960 MXYZ NE USA
display for the Loran-C chain 8970 MWX GT LKE
GRI (Group Repetition
Interval).
NOTE: The identifier 9960
(NE USA) indicates that the
gap between the transmis-
sions of any two consecutive Figure 2-40
master signals is 99,600
microseconds long.
Column 2: The stations being used.
Column 3 and 4: The Loran-C chain identifier. .
NOTE: Up to two chains can be displayed in the AUTO mode. See
Section 4 for a complete listing of possible chains.
Rev. 0

(MANUAL Mode)
9960: The selected GRI. LCS1 SUBSECTION 3/3
NE USA: The Loran Chain <

MANUAL >
identifier. 9960 NE USA
<
M 85 4.5 TRACK
Status of Stations in W 30 5.1 TRACK

<
Chain: X 70 6.0 SPARE
<
Y -- ---
Column 1: M, V, W, X, Y, or Z 45 4.0 TRACK
Z Station
Column 2: Signal to Noise Figure 2-41
Ratio (SNR, 01 to 99).
NOTE: Dashes in Column 2 and 3 indicate station is not being
received.
Column 3: Envelope to Cycle Discrepancy (ECD, 0.0 to 9.9 where
5.0 is optimum).
Column 4: Status Messages
• DESELECT: Station has been manually deselected.
• TRACK: Station being used for navigation.
• SPARE: Station acquired but not used to navigation.
• BLINK: The coded warning contained in a Loran signal
indicating the transmitted signal is in error.
• TOO FAR: Station is out of ground wave range.
Rev. 0
VERTICAL NAVIGATION SECTION (VNAV KEY)

Upon pressing the VNAV Key the VNAV 1/3 Page will be displayed
and the following can be observed.
VNAV PAGES
NOTE: AFIS flight plans do not support any altitudes, including air-
port elevation. As a result no altitude constraints will be provided for
SIDS, STARS or Approaches. If the airport, SIDs, STARS or
Approaches are obtained from the database altitudes will be provid-
ed.
In some programmed approaches, the altitude associated with the
MAP waypoint is computed from the FAF through the MAP waypoint
to a point 50 feet above the runway threshold. MDA may be reached
prior to the MAP waypoint. The MDA must be observed if the run-
way is not in sight.
VNAV 1/3 (Page 1 of 3)
VNAV MODE:
Mode required to fly to the vertical TO waypoint and Baro Altitude in
feet. Can display one of the following:
• INVALID: Indicates VNAV function is invalid. In order to be set
valid the following must be met:
1. Air Data valid (baro altitude and altitude rate)
2. Valid lateral TO Waypoint
3. Valid vertical TO waypoint
4. NO SXTK programmed
5. Crosstrack (XTK) < 12.5NM
• INACTIVE: VNAV system is not activated because non-volatile
memory was erased during software update or it was manually set
inactive before shutdown. Using BACK Key with the cursor over the
inactive field can display one of the following:
NOTE: When VNAV Mode is inactive, all external VNAV outputs are
disabled, including VERT DEV, EFIS altitude constraints at waypoints
and VNAV WPT ALERT annunciation.
Rev. 0
• CLIMB: Indicates climb

required to cruise altitude or to <
VNAV 1/3 <
CLIMB 5566
next altitude restriction. TO #TOC FL350
< <
(Figure 2-42) RANGE (NM) 300.4
ETE 01:13.5
• CRUISE: Indicates holding
altitude while enroute to Top ACTUAL FPM UP 400
<
of Descent (#TOD) point.
(Figure 2-43) CLIMB GRAD 97 /NM
<
DATA
• PATH DESCENT: Indicates
descent via programmed Figure 2-42
Flight Path Angle. Vertical
Deviation will be enabled on
the Vertical Deviation needle < VNAV 1/3 <
and the VERT DEV field is CRUISE FL350
active. The VERT DEV field <
TO #TOD FL350 <
will not be displayed if there is RANGE (NM) 1214.4
ETE 08:06.8
no vertical path programmed. @ #TOD FPM DN 800
(Figure 2-44) ACTUAL FPM UP 0
<
• DESCENT: Indicates non- VERT DEV -----

<
path or Air Mass descent to DATA
altitude restriction.
• LEVEL: Indicates aircraft Figure 2-43
should fly level to next con-
straint. VNAV 1/3
< <
PATH DESCENT FL345
TO Waypoint:
<
TO ELD -5 FL250G <
Vertical TO waypoint with con- EST CROSSING FL250
straint altitude and applicable REQUIRED FPM DN 600
waypoint offset. Letters pre- ACTUAL FPM DN 600
ceding or following the altitude
constraint have the following <
VERT DEV HIGH 87
meaning: FL=Flight Level, A= DATA?
At or Above, B=At or Below,
G=Glide Path, and a blank Figure 2-44
space=At constraint.
One of the following system generated VNAV profile points may also
appear as the TO waypoint:
• #TOC: Indicates the Top of Climb target altitude. This point becomes
the Vertical TO Waypoint once the aircraft has passed the final climb
constraint waypoint and is climbing. (Figure 2-44)
Rev. 0
• #TOD: Indicates the Top of Descent target altitude where the aircraft
should begin its descent in order to arrive at the Descent Reference
Waypoint at the required altitude. (Figure 2-43)
NOTE: If no Descent Reference Waypoint with crossing altitude is pro-
grammed, the system will use the arrival airport elevation to fix the #TOD
as long as an airport is the last waypoint on the Active FPL.
EST CROSSING:
Altitude trajectory computed by the system to the Vertical TO waypoint
based on current groundspeed and vertical speed (Figure 2-40). This
field will display RANGE (NM) in miles and tenths when the Vertical TO
Waypoint is a #TOD or #TOC profile point. (Figure 2-43)
ETE:
The estimated time enroute in hours, minutes and tenths, from the aircraft
present position to the Vertical TO Waypoint #TOC or #TOD. (Figure 2-
43)
REQUIRED FPM:
Required vertical speed in feet per minute to make the altitude constraint
based on current ground speed. UP indicates a positive vertical speed
and DN indicates a negative vertical speed (Figure 2-44). This field will
display @#TOD FPM DN when the Vertical TO Waypoint is the Top of
Descent and indicate the descent target vertical speed. (Figure 2-43)
ACTUAL FPM:
Actual vertical speed in feet per minute. UP indicates a positive vertical
speed and DN indicates a negative vertical speed. (Figures 2-43 and 2-
44)
VERT DEV:
Vertical deviation of aircraft from this descent path in feet. HIGH indicates
aircraft is above the path (Figure 2-44); LOW indicates aircraft is below
path. CLIMB GRAD xxx/NM is displayed during CLIMB mode to indicate
current aircraft climb performance in feet per nautical mile. (Figure 2-42)
NOTE: VERT DEV data field is dashes if the ETE to descent path inter-
cept is greater than one minute. This line will be blank if no FPA is pro-
grammed at descent reference waypoint. In this case #TOD will be deter-
mined using the default FPA from the VNAV DATA Page. However the
FPA must still be entered for the system to provide a path.
Rev. 0
DATA:
A prompt to access the VNAV DATA Page, by placing the cursor over the
DATA field and pressing the ENTER Key. (Figure 2-44)
Figures 2-45 and 2-46 further illustrate the meanings of the fields on
VNAV Page 1.
<
VNAV 1/3 < < VNAV 1/3 <
CLIMB 15276 CRUISE FL230
<
TO #TOC FL250 < TO #TOD FL230
< <
RANGE (NM) 33.4 RANGE (NM) 150.5
ETE 00:13.2 ETE 01:05.2
@ #TOD FPM DN 595
ACTUAL FPM UP 595 ACTUAL FPM UP 0
< <
CLIMB GRAD 233 /NM VERT DEV -----

< <
DATA DATA
#TOC #TOD
HEMET -5
15000A
XYZ
10000G
< VNAV 1/3 < < VNAV 1/3 <

CLIMB 1862 PATH DESCENT 12030
TO HEMET -5 15000A <
TO XYZ 10000G <
< <
EST CROSSING 15329 EST CROSSING 10500
REQUIRED FPM UP 575 REQUIRED FPM DN 1000

ACTUAL FPM UP 575 ACTUAL FPM DN 950
CLIMB GRAD 233 /NM <

VERT DEV HIGH 446
<
DATA DATA
Progression of Vertical Waypoints from Climb to

Path Decent on VNAV 1/1
Figure 2-45
Rev. 0
<
VNAV 1/3 <
CLIMB 15276
<
TO #TOC FL250 <
RANGE (NM) 33.5
ETE 00:13.2
ACTUAL FPM UP 595

CLIMB
CLIMB GRAD 233 /NM
<
DATA
#TOC Cruise Altitude =FL250
Vertical
Last Departure altitude
Groundspeed
#TOC Range
1nm
NOTE: Top of Climb appears as a Vertical Waypoint on the

VNAV FPL Page when the aircraft is within 1 NM of
the last departure waypoint that has an altitude
< VNAV 1/3 <

PATH DESCENT 12030
<
TO XYZ 10000G <
EST CROSSING 10500
REQUIRED FPM DN 1000

ACTUAL FPM DN 950
DESCENT
<
VERT DEV HIGH 446
DATA
Vert Dev Actual Vert Spd
Required Vert Spd
Est Crossing Alt

Programmed Descent Path
Direct
FPA Programmed FPA XYZ
10000G
Descent Reference
Wpt (at altitude constraint)
Definition of Climb and Decent on VNAV 1/1

Figure 2-46
Rev. 0
VNAV 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) - FLIGHT PLAN WayPoint

Pressing the VNAV Key will display the second VNAV Page and the
following can be observed.
VNAV MODE: Mode required to fly to the vertical TO waypoint and
Baro Altitude in feet. Can display one of the following:
• INVALID: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• INACTIVE: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• CLIMB: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• CRUISE: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• PATH DESCENT: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• DESCENT: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
• LEVEL: Same as on VNAV 1/1.
WAYPOINTS: <
VNAV 2/3 <
PATH DESCENT FL338
Lateral and Vertical way- ELD -5 FL250G
< <
points listed in order of #PRESL FL250
occurrence with respect to <
MEI ----- <
the vertical profile, with con- DELBE -----
VUZ FL180
straint altitude and applicable < <
VXV -----
waypoint offset, where BOSEY -----
< <
FL=Flight Level, A= At or ERASE
Above, B=At or Below,
G=Glide Path, and a blank Figure 2-47
space=At constraint. (Figure
2-47)
<
VNAV 3/3 <
One of the following system PATH DESCENT FL338
generated VNAV profile <
#T0D FL250 <
points may also appear: BDR -----
<
ALIXX ----- <
• #TOC: Indicates the Top of ISLET 2000G
Climb target altitude. RW34 435G
< <
+++++++ -----
• #TOD: Indicates the Top <
CMK 2000A <
of Descent target altitude. ERASE
(Figure 2-48)
Figure 2-48
Rev. 0
• #PRESL: Indicates the estimated position where the aircraft will

arrive at the altitude shown on the Altitude Pre-Selector. Field does
not appear unless the system is configured for an altitude preselector
and the aircraft is flying toward this altitude. (Figure 2-48)
++++++ :
A discontinuity in the flight plan that separates the missed approach
waypoint from the rest of the approach. (Figure 2-47) No Auto Leg
change will occur beyond this point.
WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS:
May consist of from one to VNAV 1/X
six alphanumeric characters. DEN -----
KAPA 5883
If more identifiers are present <
than can be listed on this

page, subsequent pages will
list the remaining waypoints.
(Figure 2-49)
< <
NOTE: Waypoints cannot DATA ERASE
be added to the active flight
plan from the VNAV section. Figure 2-49
Enter new waypoints on
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
ERASE:
Used to erase all altitude constraints, except the altitude constraint at
the current lateral TO Waypoint.
VNAV DATA 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)

NOTE: This page is accessed by using the Line Select Key to place
the cursor over the DATA prompt on VNAV Page 1/X and pressing
ENTER Key.
CRUISE ALT:
Manually entered cruise altitude in feet or Flight Level (FL). Any alti-
tude entered greater than the transition level is converted and dis-
played as flight level (rounded off to the nearest hundred feet). An
altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero.
(Figure 2-50)
NOTE: In a climb, when the aircraft is within 200ft of the Preselect
Altitude, the CRUISE ALT changes to the same value as the PRE-
SEL ALT.
Rev. 0
The field also goes to dashes during a descent (digital systems only)
when the aircraft is 200ft lower than the CRUISE ALT and the
Preselect is set to a lower value. If the PRESEL is analog the altitude
value will remain in the CRUISE ALT field. When the aircraft is within
200ft of the PRESEL ALT the CRUISE ALT changes again to the
same value as the PRESEL ALT.
TRANS LEVEL:
Transition Level used to < VNAV DATA 1/1 <
CRUISE ALT FL250
determine the altitude at TRANS LEVEL FL180
< <
which the system converts DEFAULT FPA 3.0
altitudes to Flight Levels.
This field defaults to FL180 if
the pilot does not enter a PRESEL ALT FL250
<
RANGE (NM) 33.7
value. (Figure 2-50)
<
ETE 00:13.6
DEFAULT FPA:
The FPA defaults to the 3.0 Figure 2-50
unless it is manually entered.
The default descent Flight Path Angle can be manually entered in
degrees and tenths (0.1 to 6.0 range) (Figure 2-46). DEFAULT FPA
is used to calculate #TOD to the first altitude constraint on the Active
Flight Plan. However an FPA must be entered on the VNAV way-
point page to establish a PATH DESCENT and for Vert Dev or verti-
cal deviations to be valid.
NOTE: Pilot enters numbers only, as the decimal point (.) prefills as
a default.
PRESEL ALT:
If configured, Preselected Altitude input from system, in feet or Flight
Level. (Figure 2-50)
NOTE: An analog type preselector only displays PRESEL ALT
when the aircraft is within 1000ft of actual altitude.
RANGE (NM):
If configured, Range to Pre-selected Altitude in nautical miles and
tenths (0.0 to 999.9 range). (Figure 2-50)
ETE:
If configured, the estimated time enroute to the Pre-selected Altitude
in hours, minutes and tenths. (Figure 2-50)
Rev. 0
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)
Accessed by placing the cursor over a lateral WPT and pressing

the VNAV Key or by placing the cursor over a WPT in the VNAV
section and pressing ENTER key.
WAYPOINT:
VNAV waypoint will consist of from one to six alphanumeric charac-
ters.
ALT:
Constraint altitude prefills from database or can be manually entered.
Any altitude entered greater than the transition level (from the VNAV
DATA Page) is converted and displayed as flight level rounded off to
the nearest hundred feet. An altitude less than 1000 feet must be
entered with a preceding zero. Altitudes below sea level are limited
to -1000 feet. The following may appear in the altitude field:
• FL: Flight Level (Preceding the Altitude Value)
• A: At or Above (Following the Altitude Value)
• B: At or Below (Following the Altitude Value)
• Blank space: At (Following the Altitude Value)
NOTE: If the destination airport or runway is manually entered, or if

the airport/runway is loaded from the database, the airport elevation
will be displayed in the altitude field. If the flight plan is loaded
through AFIS, the airport elevation will not be available.
EST CROSSING: VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT ISTET
Altitude trajectory computed ALT 2000 <
by the system to the Vertical EST CROSSING FL250
TO Waypoint based on cur- OFFSET ---
<
rent groundspeed and REQ FPM DN 825
Vertical speed. (Figure 2-51) FPA (AUTO) DN 3.0
<
This field is displayed for the
DIRECT FPA DN 2.8
active vertical waypoint.
Figure 2-51
Rev. 0
PLAN CROSSING:
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
System determined crossing WAYPOINT VUZ
based on programmed con- ALT FL180 <
straints and flight path angles EST CROSSING FL180
OFFSET ---
for descent. (Figure 2-52) REQ FPM DN 825
<
This field is displayed for FPA (AUTO) DN 3.0

<
other than the Active Vertical
Waypoint and will be dis- DIRECT FPA DN 0.4
played in place of EST
CROSSING.
Figure 2-52
OFFSET:
Pilot entered value in nautical miles (-99 to +99 range) where a posi-
tive entry (+) indicates an offset beyond the waypoint and a negative
(-) entry is prior to the waypoint.
NOTE: Pilot must enter the leading (+) sign for the offset to be
beyond the fix, but a (-) prefills as a default to cross prior to the fix.
REQ FPM (Required Feet Per Minute):
Required vertical speed in feet per minute the aircraft must maintain to
reach the Vertical waypoint. UP indicates a positive vertical speed
and DN indicates a negative vertical speed is required.
NOTE: If PLAN CROSSING is displayed, then the REQ FPM is the
planned vertical speed for the waypoint. REQ FPM will be dashes if
ground speed or air data is not valid.
FPA (Flight Path Angle):
Flight Path Angle for path descent to waypoint in degrees and tenths
with valid range 0.1 to 6.0. The following may appear in parentheses:
• DB: Indicates FPA from
database. VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT ELD
• MAN: Indicates manually ALT FL250 <
entered FPA. EST CROSSING FL254
OFFSET -5
<
• DIR: Indicates direct FPA REQ FPM DN 625
programmed. (Figure 2-53) FPA (DIR) DN 2.3
<
• AUTO: Indicates system DIRECT FPA DN 2.3

computed FPA.
Figure 2-53
Rev. 0
• DEF: Indicates FPA default from VNAV DATA Page.

NOTE: DIR, AUTO, and DEF can be accessed using the BACK Key.
DIRECT FPA:
Direct Flight Path Angle from the current aircraft altitude to the Vertical
waypoint in degrees and tenths (valid range 0.0 to 90.0), where DN
indicates negative FPA and UP indicates positive FPA.
AFIS SECTION (AFIS KEY)

Refer to Section 7 for description and operation of AFIS.
PLANNING SECTION (PLAN KEY)

Upon pressing the PLAN Key the PLAN 1/8 Page will be displayed
NOTE: The number of PLAN pages (which can vary from 6 to 8) is
dynamically allocated deprending on system configuration and whether
FDE has been calculated. These examples show the maximum num-
ber of pages available.
PLAN PAGES
PLAN 1/8 (Page 1 of 8) FUEL STATUS

FUEL STATUS LB:
PLAN 1/8
Indicates that fuel is being FUEL STATUS LB
computed in pounds. This REMAINING 2990 >
unit can be manually changed RESERVE 1000
to KG if desired, using the FLOW 1200 >
BACK Key when the cursor
is over the LB field. (Figure HOURS 01+39
2-54) RANGE 229
NM/LB 0.115
NOTE: The cursor must first
be placed over the remaining Figure 2-54
field so the LB field can be
activated.
REMAINING:
The total fuel on board in pounds or kilograms. This quantity must be
initially entered or verified by the pilot and may require periodic verifica-
tion or update. (Figure 2-54)
Rev. 0
RESERVE:
The desired reserve, as entered or verified by the operator, displayed
in pounds or kilograms. This may require periodic verification or
update. (Figure 2-54)
FLOW:
The current fuel flow in PLAN 1/8
pounds or kilograms input FUEL STATUS LB
automatically from fuel flow REMAINING 2990 >
indicators. (MAN) indicates a RESERVE 1000
pilot manual entry and the FLOW (MAN) 1200 >
entry must be manually veri- LAST INPUT: 00:15
fied and periodically updated.
HOURS 01+39
(Figure 2-55) RANGE 229
NM/LB 0.115
NOTE: The above three
quantities will flash after 15
minutes and will require veri- Figure 2-55
fication by using the Line
Select and ENTER Keys if MAN fuel flow was selected.
VERIFY INPUTS:
Each of the flashing values must be verified or entered by pressing
the ENTER Key when the cursor is over each field. This field is only
displayed after the system is turned on and will be displayed in place
of the LAST INPUT field on line 6. (Figure 2-55)
LAST INPUT:
The time in hours and minutes since the above three quantities were
verified. This field only appears if fuel flow is input manually. (Figure
2-55)
NOTE: This field displays VERIFY INPUTS at system turn-on since
REMAINING and RESERVE are stored in non-volatile memory dur-
ing system shut-down.
HOURS:
The hours and minutes of fuel remaining until the reserve fuel quanti-
ty is reached. (Figure 2-55) Fuel flow and ground speed must be
valid.
RANGE:
The nautical mile range available until the reserve fuel quantity is
reached. (Figure 2-55) Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid.
Rev. 0
NM/LB:
The number of nautical miles for each pound (or kilogram) of fuel
consumed. (Figure 2-55)Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid.
PLAN 2/8 (Page 2 of 8) TRIP PLAN

Pressing the PLAN Key again will display the PLAN 2/8 Page.
This page may be used to monitor the Active Flight Plan progress or a
stored flight plan may be loaded on this page for planning purposes.
TRIP PLAN:
The flight plan selected will
be designated by an "A" for PLAN 2/8 <
TRIP PLAN A
the Active Flight Plan, a DIRECT KDAL
<
number (1 to 56) for a stored TO ELD RW34
flight plan, or - - - dashes if GS (MAN) 254
<
no active Flight Plan is DIS/DTK 21.0/T073
loaded. (Figure 2-56) ETE 00:16.5
FPL 1346/05+18
FR: ETA @ LIT 16:18 <
RAIM @ LIT AVAIL
The FROM waypoint identifi-
er is followed on the same Figure 2-56
line by the first waypoint (ori-
gin) on the selected flight plan (KDAL). The FROM waypoint is usual-
ly replaced by DIRECT. (Figure 2-56)
TO:
The TO waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the last
waypoint (destination) on the selected flight plan (RW34). (Figure 2-
56)
NOTE: The TO field is not dynamic as long as the Trip Plan page is
displayed. When a leg change occurs it will not be evident as long as
the Trip Plan page is displayed.
GS:
The groundspeed in knots is input automatically when the ground-
speed is valid or can be inserted manually which is indicated by
(MAN). The GS value, (MAN) and ETA value will change to yellow.
(CALC) will replace (MAN) field if a manual ETA is entered on line 9.
(Figure 2-56)
Rev. 0
DIS/DTK:
The distance in nautical miles and tenths between either the FROM
and TO waypoints or between the aircraft's present position and the
TO waypoint. The desired track is the Great Circle course between
the FROM and TO waypoints. The DTK will have a T adjacent to it if
a true heading input is received or if the FROM waypoint is north N
70° or south S 60° latitude. (Figure 2-56)
ETE:
The estimated time enroute in hours, minutes and tenths of minutes
between the aircraft's present position and the TO waypoint or the
FROM and TO waypoints based on the GS value. (Figure 2-56)
FPL:
The total active or stored flight plan distance and time remaining via the
Flight Planned route from the FROM waypoint, (or the aircraft's present
position when a Direct To leg is displayed), to the last waypoint on the
selected flight plan that precedes a "fence". Distance is displayed in
whole miles and time is in hours and minutes. (Figure 2-56)
ETA @:
Estimated time of arrival at the destination, or last waypoint on the
Active Flight Plan that precedes a "fence", appears when a DIRECT
TO leg is displayed. (Figure 2-56)
NOTE: The ETA value field will turn yellow if a ground speed is
entered manually, indicating that the ETA is calculated based on the
manual ground speed value. The GS field will turn yellow and
(CALC) will be displayed if a manual ETA value is entered.
RAIM @:
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring at the last flight plan way-
point will display AVAIL (available) or NOT AVAIL (not available) at
the ETA. If a manual ground speed or ETA has been entered,
STANDBY will be displayed momentarily while the system calculates
RAIM availability. If GPS is not functioning, NO NAV will be dis-
played.
Rev. 0
PLAN 3/8 (Page 3 of 8) FUEL PLAN

Pressing the FPL Key again will display the PLAN 3/8 Page.
FUEL PLAN:
The "A" indicates that Active PLAN 3/8 <
Flight Plan information is FUEL PLAN A
being displayed. A numeric DIRECT KDAL
<
entry in the field provides fuel TO ELD RW34
planning for stored flight GS (MAN) 250 <
plans. (Figure 2-57) Dashes FLOW (MAN) 400
LEG FUEL 105
are displayed if there is no
FPL FUEL 2148
active Flight Plan.
REM @ RW34 675
FR:
The FROM waypoint identifi- Figure 2-57
er is followed on the same
line by the first waypoint (origin) on the selected flight plan. The
FROM waypoint is usually replaced by DIRECT. (Figure 2-57)
TO:
The TO waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the last
waypoint (destination) on the selected flight plan. (Figure 2-57)
GS:
The ground speed in knots is input automatically when the ground-
speed is valid or can be input manually, which is indicated by (MAN).
GS value and (MAN) will be yellow. (Figure 2-57)
FLOW:
The fuel flow in pounds or kilograms is input automatically from fuel
flow indicators/transmitters or can be inserted manually, which is indi-
cated by (MAN). (Figure 2-57)
LEG FUEL:
The amount of fuel in pounds (or kilograms) used on the current
FROM/TO leg or from the aircraft's present position to the current TO
waypoint, based on groundspeed, fuel flow and distance. (Figure 2-
57)
FPL FUEL:
The total amount of fuel anticipated to be consumed to the last way-
point on the flight plan that precedes a "fence". This calculated value
Rev. 0
is based on the current fuel flow, groundspeed values and distance.

(Figure 2-57)
REM @:
Appears only if a DIRECT TO leg is displayed. It indicates the
amount of fuel remaining overhead at destination, or the last way-
point on the Flight Plan that precedes a "fence", under current condi-
tions. This value is based on the REMAINING fuel quantity from the
FUEL STATUS page minus the total FPL fuel (Figure 2-57). The
entire REM @ field will turn yellow if the REM @ value is less than
the programmed reserve on PLAN 1/8 Page.
PLAN 4/8 (Page 4 of 8) FUEL FLOW

Pressing the FPL Key again will display the PLAN 4/8 Page.
ENGINE:
The fuel flow, in pounds or PLAN 4/8
kilograms per hour, for each FUEL FLOW
engine as taken from the fuel
flow indication system. the ENGINE 1 300
number of engines shown ENGINE 2 298
will depend on system con- ENGINE 3 295
ENGINE 4 307
figuration. (Figure 2-58).
TOTAL: TOTAL 1200
The total fuel flow, in pounds
or kilograms per hour, from Figure 2-58
all engines. (Figure 2-58)
NOTE: This page will appear only if the system is configured for
automatic fuel flow and the individual engine fuel flow is available.
PLAN 5/8 (Page 5 of 8) DATE/GMT

DATE:
Same as the Initialization Page.
GMT:
Same as the Initialization Page.
NOTE: If necessary, both DATE and GMT can be corrected on this
page but the takeoff and time values will be affected.
Rev. 0
TAKEOFF:
PLAN 5/8
The GMT at weight-off-
wheels plus 10 seconds. DATE 18 FEB 95 <
(Figure 2-59) GMT 14:13
LAND: TAKEOFF 20:43

LAND 22:45
The GMT at weight-on-
wheels. This field is not dis- FLIGHT TIME 02+02
played until weight-on-wheels
plus 10 seconds occurs.
NOTE: TAKEOFF and LAND times may be based on groundspeed

and/or TAS valids depending upon system configuration.
FLIGHT TIME:
The elapsed flight time is displayed in hours and minutes. (Figure 2-59)
PLAN 6/8 (Page 6 of 8) AIRCRAFT WEIGHT

BASIC OP WT:
The combined weight in
pounds or kilograms of the PLAN 6/8
empty aircraft, crew mem-
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
bers, and crew baggage.
(Figure 2-60) BASIC OP WT 7400 <
PAYLOAD 400
PAYLOAD: FUEL ON BOARD 2937 <
VERIFY FUEL
Weight in pounds or kilo-
FUEL USED 101 <
grams of passengers, cargo, GROSS WT 10737
and baggage (excluding
crew). (Figure 2-60)
Figure 2-60
FUEL ON BOARD:
Weight in pounds or kilograms of fuel on board. (Figure 2-60)
VERIFY INPUTS:
Each of the flashing values must be verified or entered by pressing the
ENTER Key when the cursor is over each field. This field is displayed
only after system turn on.
Rev. 2
VERIFY FUEL:
This is displayed in the same field as VERIFY INPUTS if a manual fuel
flow has been entered and has not been verified for 15 minutes or
more.
FUEL USED:
If configured for Automatic Fuel Flow, the weight in pounds or kilo-
grams of fuel consumed. (Figure 2-60)
NOTE: This field appears as dashes at power up and increments as
auto fuel flow data is available.
GROSS WT:
The total weight in pounds or kilograms of basic operating weight,
payload and fuel on board displayed after all values have been
entered. (Figure 2-60)
PLAN 7/8 (Page 7 of 8) FDE Prediction

Pressing the PLAN Key
again will display the PLAN PLAN 7/8
7/8 Page. This page is used FDE
if GPS will be the sole navi- DEPART DT 20 DEC 95 <
DEPART GMT --:--
gation source in ROUTE SPACING -- <
Oceanic/Remote operation. EXPECTED GS ---
The following information is START FDE WPT ----- <
entered to make the neces- END FDE WPT -----
sary FDE prediction to deter- EXCLUDE SATS (QTY 0) <
mine sufficient satellite avail- PREDICTION UNAVAIL
ability, integrity, and accura-
cy. All entries made on this Figure 2-61
page will remain until
changed or the system is powered down. See Figure 2-61.
DEPART DT:
Date for which FDE prediction is to be calculated.
DEPART GMT:
Time for which FDE prediction is to be calculated.
ROUTE SPACING:
Centerline to centerline route spacing of segment for which FDE is
being calculated. 1 to 99 nautical miles may be entered. 60NM is a
normal entry.
Rev. 0
EXPECTED GS:
Estimated ground speed for the route segment. A value of 100 to 999
may be entered.
START FDE WPT:
First waypoint on the Oceanic/Remote route segment. Placing the
cursor over this field allows waypoint entry. Pressing the BACK Key
will cycle through the waypoints on the active flight plan. Dashes are
displayed prior to the last waypoint on the flight plan. Pressing
ENTER while the dashes are displayed will clear the start and end
waypoints, resulting in an undefined Oceanic/Remote segment.
END FDE WPT:
Last waypoint in the Oceanic/Remote route segment. The BACK and
dashes operate the same here as in the START FDE WPT field.
EXCLUDE SATS (QTY x):
Displays the number of satel- PLAN 7/8
lites currently being excluded FDE
from the FDE prediction. Up DEPART DT 25 DEC 95 <
DEPART GMT 13:00
to seven satellites may be ROUTE SPACING 35 <
excluded at a given time. EXPECTED GS 300
When the cursor is placed START FDE WPT JFK <
over this field and ENTER is END FDE WPT EBBR
pressed, the FDE EXCLUDE EXCLUDE SATS (QTY 0) <
SATS 1/1 Page will be dis- START CALC? ENTER
played. See Figure 2-63
Figure 2-62
ENTRY REQUIRED:
This is displayed If the aircraft is on the ground and not all the data
has been entered. The following is a list of the other possible mes-
sages displayed in this field:
• START CALC? ENTER: FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1
This is displayed when the
aircraft is on the ground and EXCLUDED SATS LIST
all data has been entered.
Pressing ENTER will start the <
SAT #--
FDE calculation and display
<
PLAN 8/8 FDE COMPUTA-
TION. See Figure 2-65
OK? ENTER
Figure 2-63
Rev. 0
• NEED ACTIVE FPL: This will be displayed if there are less than two
waypoints on the active flight plan.
• BACK FOR NEXT WPT: Displayed when the cursor is over the start
or end waypoint field.
• PRED IN PROGRESS: This is displayed when an FDE prediction is
in progress. All other fields are disabled at this point.
• PREDICTION UNAVAIL: This will be displayed if the GPS is not in
the idle state or the aircraft is not on the ground.
FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)

This page is accessed by
FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1
placing the cursor over the
EXCLUDE SATS (QTY x) EXCLUDED SATS LIST
field on PLAN 7/8 Page and 12 14 02 16 19 22 07
pressing ENTER. <
SAT #02
EXCLUDE SATS LIST: CLEAR ALL <
The designated satellite num-
ber being excluded from the OK? ENTER
FDE prediction is listed here.
SAT #: Figure 2-64
The desired satellite being excluded from FDE prediction is entered by

pressing the Line Select Key by this field and entering the number of
the satellite. Press ENTER to add the satellite to the list. Entering a
number already listed and pressing ENTER will remove the number
from the list. Pressing the Line Select Key next to CLEAR ALL and
pressing ENTER will remove all satellites from the exclusion list.
PLAN 8/8 (Page 8 of 8) FDE COMPUTATION

COMPUTING - STANDBY: PLAN 8/8
This display will flash while FDE COMPUTATION
FDE prediction is being cal-
culated. See Figures 2-65 COMPUTING - STANDBY
xx% COMPLETE: 51% COMPLETE
The number displayed is the
CANCEL COMPUTE
percentage of calculation <
completed.
Figure 2-65
Rev. 0
When the FDE prediction is

complete, the system will dis- PLAN 8/8
play either FDE and NAV are FDE COMPUTATION
available or unavailable.
FDE AVAILABLE
Normal calculation time is NAV AVAILABLE
from ten to twenty minutes.
See Figures 2-66 and 2-67. GPS PRIMARY MEANS
NAV OK
Figure 2-66
PLAN 8/8
FDE COMPUTATION
FDE UNAVAILABLE
NAV UNAVAILABLE
GPS PRIMARY MEANS

NAV NOT ALLOWED
Figure 2-67
Rev. 0
HEADING SECTION (HDG KEY)

Upon pressing the HDG Key the HEADING VECTOR 1/1 Page will
be displayed and the following can be observed.
HEADING PAGE
HEADING VECTOR 1/1 (Page 1 of 1)

HDG:
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
Commanded heading in
whole degrees. This field <
HDG 348
may also prefill with current
CANCEL
aircraft heading if heading is
valid. Pilot may manually TO DFW DTK 270
<
enter heading. A turn direc-
tion R or L may also be
entered. A T indicates the ENTER HDG
system is operating in the
true heading mode. After a Figure 2-68
heading entry is made and
the ENTER Key is pressed, the cursor will move to the Heading
Mode field and HDG SELECT? will be displayed.
HEADING MODE:
Use BACK Key to select one of the following:
• INTERCEPT: indicates
HEADING VECTOR 1/1
Heading Mode is ON and will
intercept next leg of the flight HDG 348
<
plan if the remaining fields
are verified or entered. <
INTERCEPT
(Figure 2-69)
<
TO DFW DTK 270 >
• CANCEL: indicates NO COURSE INTERCEPT
Heading Mode is OFF.
OK? ENTER
• HDG SELECT: indicates
Heading Mode is ON, but no Figure 2-69
intercept.
NOTE: If any of the mode words are followed by a ? the mode is not
active. The ENTER key must be pressed to activate the mode.
Rev. 0
TO WAYPOINT:
Prefills with current TO Waypoint or is enterable (from one to six
alphanumeric characters). (Figure 2-69)
NOTE: With the cursor over the TO Waypoint field, using the BACK
Key will step through to the end of the Active Flight Plan waypoints.
The system will identify an IAF, ARC, PT, HP, FCF, FAF or MAP
waypoint above the TO waypoint field.
DTK:
Desired track is the Great Circle course in whole degrees between
the FROM and TO waypoints from Navigation Page 1. (Figure 2-69)
If the system is displaying Direct TO a waypoint, the DTK will be from
present position to the current TO waypoint.
NOTE: If the default desired track is changed, a Pseudo Vortac
(selected course) leg will be programmed on the NAVIGATION 1/4
Page.
INTERCEPT Messages:
If the Intercept Mode is programmed one of the following messages
may appear. (Figure 2-69)
• INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX indicates the commanded heading will
cause the aircraft to intercept the programmed course on the FROM
side of the fix.
• NO COURSE INTERCEPT indicates the commanded heading will
cause the aircraft to diverge from the programmed course (crosstrack
deviation will increase).
• No Message indicates an intercept is not programmed, or the com-
manded heading will intercept the programmed course prior to the fix.
(The TO side of the fix)
• NO ARC INTERCEPT indicates commanded heading will not inter-
cept the arc programmed on the approach procedure.
OK? ENTER:
The procedure for accepting the entered heading, TO waypoint or
DTK is to depress the ENTER Key. (Figure 2-69)
Rev. 2
TUNING SECTION (TUNE KEY)

Upon pressing the TUNE Key the TUNE 1/4 Page will be displayed
TUNING PAGES
TUNE 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) COMM

NOTE: If the system is configured for two or less communications
radios, the tune section will display only three pages.
COMM 1 or COMM 2:
The information for each Comm radio. (Figure 2-70)
ACTIVE:
NOTE: If the frequency currently tuned and displayed on the respec-
tive control head, appears briefly but turns to dashes, the system
interface does not provide a return frequency input.
(MAN) in this field indicates
the frequency was manually TUNE 1/4
entered via the control head COMM 1
(Figure 2-70). If the (MAN) ACTIVE (MAN) 121.50
field is blank, the system was PRESET 135.20 >
tuned via the CDU keyboard. TRANSFER?
COMM 2
PRESET: ACTIVE (MAN) 132.55
PRESET 127.77 >
The pilot can enter and store
a frequency in this field
through the keyboard. Figure 2-70
(Figure 2-70)
TRANSFER?:
The displayed PRESET frequency can be transferred to ACTIVE
when the ENTER key is depressed. The control head will reflect this
change. (Figure 2-70)
TUNE 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) COMM

The same information from the first page is displayed here for addi-
tional COMM radios.
Rev. 0
TUNE 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) NAV

Pressing the TUNE Key again will display this page and the following
information may be observed.
NAV 1 or NAV 2:
The station identifier to which the respective NAV receiver is tuned.
(KEY) will be displayed when the frequency or identifier of the station
has been entered using the CDU keyboard.
FREQ:
The frequency currently tuned and displayed on the respective con-
trol head. (MAN) in this field indicates the frequency was manually
entered via the control head.
The field may also show TUNE 3/4
(KEY) if the ident is unknown
and the frequency was tuned NAV 1 SGF <
FREQ (MAN) 116.90
via the CDU keyboard. RANGE 105.0
(KEY) will appear in the NAV BRG 350
1 or NAV 2 field if the IDENT NAV 2 ARG <
is known. No annunciation in FREQ (MAN) 114.50
this field indicates the VPU is RANGE 109.2
automatically tuning the NAV BRG 071
radio. (Figure 2-71)
Figure 2-71
RANGE:
The range in nautical miles and tenths from aircraft present position
to the DME. (Figure 2-71) The station identifier can also appear in the
field between the range and range value field if the control head is
placed in the DME HOLD mode. NO ID is displayed in this field if the
identifier of the held station is unknown.
BRG:
The bearing in whole degrees from aircraft present position to the
VOR. (Figure 2-71)
Rev. 1
When the dedicated

DM441B is configured, the TUNE 3/4
TUNE 3/4 page is different
DME 1 DRK <
(Figure 2.71a). The Bearing FREQ 114.1
information is suppressed RANGE 4.3
and DME is annunciated
instead of NAV. DME 2 ARG <
FREQ 118.2
RANGE 54.6
When the non-dedicated Figure 2-71a

DM441B is configured, the
TUNE 3/4 page is different TUNE 3/4
(Figure 2.71b). The Bearing
information is suppressed . DME 1 DRK <
FREQ 114.1
RANGE 4.3
TUNE 4/4 (Page 4 of 4)
XPDR/ADF DME 2 ARG <
FREQ 118.2
Pressing the TUNE Key RANGE 54.6
again will display this page
and the following information
may be observed. Figure 2-71b
XPDR:
NOTE: If the transponder reply code appears briefly after tuning but
turns to dashes, the system interface does not provide a return fre-
quency input. (MAN) indicates the entry was made through the con-
trol head. (Figure 2-72)
ADF:
NOTE: If the frequency that
the ADF is tuned to appears TUNE 4/4
briefly but turns to dashes
because the system interface XPDR 1 (MAN) 1200 >
does not provide a return XPDR 2 (MAN) 2400
frequency input. It may also >
be annunciated with (MAN). ADF 1 (MAN) 610
ADF 2 (MAN) 930
(Figure 2-72) >
NOTE: If either the XPDR or

ADF frequencies are tuned
via the CDU keyboard the
(MAN) field will be blank. Figure 2-72
Rev. 1
HOLDING PATTERN SECTION (HOLD KEY)

HOLDING PATTERN PAGE
This page is accessed by
depressing the HOLD Key PLAN 8/8
when the cursor is positioned FDE COMPUTATION
over a Waypoint Identifier.
FDE AVAILABLE
NAV AVAILABLE
HOLDING PATTERN 1/1
(Page 1 of 1) GPS PRIMARY MEANS
NAV OK
AT:
The Holding Fix and country
name or airport ident.
Figure 2-73
(Figure 2-73)
• HOLDING PATTERN ENTRY AND STATUS MESSAGE:

If the entry course to the holding fix can be determined, the entry pro-
cedure will be annunciated after all the holding pattern parameters are
entered.
• DIRECT ENTRY: indicates the system will use a direct entry to the
holding pattern. See Figure 2-74 for Direct Entry pattern.
• TEARDROP ENTRY: indicates the system will use a teardrop entry
to the holding pattern. See Figure 2-75 for Teardrop Entry pattern.
• PARALLEL ENTRY: indicates the system will use a parallel entry to
the holding pattern. See Figure 2-76 for Parallel Entry pattern.
Rev. 0
Entry Course
Outbound
End Turn
Point
70°
Holding Course
Outbound
End Turn
Point
70°
Holding Course
Entry Course
Direct Entry Pattern

Figure 2-74
Rev. 0
Turn Anticipation
se
C our
ld ing
m Ho
Fro
30° Leg Le
ngth
Holding Course
Entry Course Direct to
Holding Fix
70°
se
C our
lding
m Ho
Fro
30°
ngth
Leg Le
Holding Course
Entry Course
70°
Teardrop Entry Pattern

Figure 2-75
Rev. 0
Entry Course
Go Direct to
110° Holding Fix
Holding Course
Leg Length
Out Bound End Turn Point
Note Path of 1st

lap of holding
pattern after
entry procedure
110°
Entry C
ourse
Holding Course
Parallel Entry Pattern

Figure 2-76
Rev. 0
• HOLDING: indicates the system has entered the Holding Pattern.

(Figure 2-77)
• EXIT HOLD: indicates the system will exit the holding pattern the
next time over the holding fix.
INBOUND CRS (course):
HOLDING PATTERN 1/1
The inbound holding course AT DILLY
in whole degrees. This field HOLDING <
can be True or Magnetic INBOUND CRS T305
according to the display MAX HOLDING TAS 261
<
TURN DIR RIGHT
mode selected by the LEG TIME 1.5
TRUE/MAG switch input. A <
LEG DIS (5.8)
T appears if in the True EXIT MODE MANUAL <
mode (Figure 2-77). The T CANCEL?
field will be blank if the sys-
tem is Magnetic mode. Figure 2-77
MAX HOLDING TAS:
This field is computed based on configuration module max holding
indicated airspeed and worst case winds. It represents the maximum
true airspeed in the holding pattern that will assure that the aircraft
remains in protected airspace. (Figure 2-77)
TURN DIR (direction):
RIGHT indicates the standard default holding pattern turn direction.
The non-standard LEFT turn can be accessed using the BACK Key
when the cursor is over this field. (Figure 2-77)
LEG TIME:
Holding Pattern inbound leg time in minutes and tenths (1.0 to 9.9).
(Figure 2-77)
NOTE: The LEG TIME may be in parentheses indicating that the
time has been calculated using LEG DIS.
LEG DIST (distance):
Holding Pattern inbound leg distance in nautical miles (1.0 nm to
50.0 nm). (Figure 2-77)
NOTE: The LEG DIS may be in parentheses indicating that the dis-
tance has been calculated using LEG TIME.
Rev. 0
EXIT MODE:
The MANUAL default indicates the system will stay in the holding
pattern indefinitely. Using the BACK Key with the cursor over this
field AUTO can be selected if the ENTER key is pressed. The system
will then execute a holding pattern entry and exit the next time cross-
ing the fix waypoint. (Figure 2-77)
NOTE: If a holding pattern is selected an HP is annunciated next to
the waypoint on Flight Plan, Navigation and Direct To Pages.
OK? ENTER:
Depressing ENTER Key when this prompt appears at the bottom of
the Holding Pattern Page programs a Holding Pattern for a particular
waypoint.
NOTE: The cursor will not appear in this field.
CANCEL:
Used to cancel a holding pattern. (Figure 2-77)
POSITION FIX PAGE

This page is accessed by depressing the HOLD Key anytime the cur-
sor is not displayed over a waypoint.
POS:
The composite (system) position coordinates at the moment the
HOLD Key was depressed in degrees, minutes, and hundredths of
minutes. (Figure 2-78)
IDENT:
The alphanumeric designator POSITION FIX
of the reference waypoint
used to check or update POS N 33 37.50
position. (Figure 2-78) W116 09.50
<
FIX : IDENT -----
<
FIX ---------- <
The actual coordinates of the ----------
reference point in degrees, DIF ----------
minutes, and hundredths of ----------
minutes. (Figure 2-78)
Figure 2-78
Rev. 0
DIF:
The difference between the composite position and the FIX (or other
sensor) position in degrees, minutes and hundredths of minutes.
(Figure 2-78)
NOTE: Position coordinates of individual sensors and the difference
between those sensor positions and the composite (system) position
may be displayed by moving the cursor over the FIX field and
depressing the BACK Key. The composite position may be updated
to the most accurate sensor by pressing the BACK Key until the
desired sensor appears, then pressing the ENTER Key twice.
DIRECT TO SECTION ( d KEY)

DIRECT TO PAGES
DIRECT 1/2 (Page 1 of 2)

This display is accessed through the d key and presents a listing of
all Active Flight Plan waypoints on as many pages as is appropriate
to display all of the waypoints. The cursor may be positioned over
any desired identifier (ahead of or behind the aircraft) to proceed
DIRECT (Figure 2-79). A new waypoint may be added to the flight
plan to proceed direct.
TO:
<
DIRECT 1/2 <
When this page is accessed, KDAL BOSEY
the cursor is displayed over DFW BULEY
< <
the current TO waypoint. TO HART HNN
(Figure 2-79) <
19DFW SUMET
<
HP ELD AIR
The following may also be <
MEI CYN
<
displayed with a waypoint: HP DELBE BUONO
(Holding Pattern), PT <
VUZ DPK <
VZV GWENY
(Procedure Turn), MAP
(Missed Approach Point),
FAF (Final Approach Fix), Figure 2-79
and IAF (Initial Approach Fix).
Rev. 0
DIR CLOSEST ARP 2/2

(Page 2 of 2) <
DIR CLOSET ARP 1/2 <
TO 312 344/ 10 >
DIRECT TO CLOSEST AIR- I18 045/ 14 <

<
PORT: The Closest Airport I43 301/ 29 >
KUNI 344/ 29
page is the last page in the <
KCRW 141/ 31
<
>
DIRECT TO section. Up to KHTS 230/ 34
< <
nine airports are displayed, I28 254/ 35 >
in order of their proximity to KPMH 281/ 39 <

>
<
the aircraft, with the closest KPKB 040/ 45
airport listed first. (Figure 2-
80) Figure 2-80
NOTE: Airports listed from the database on this page have runways
4000 ft long or greater and are hard surfaced.
WAYPOINT SECTION
WAYPOINT PAGES
Waypoints fall into four categories:
• Database generated
• Pilot entered (personalized/ offset)
• Special
• Obsolete
Waypoint Pages can be accessed from any FLIGHT PLAN, NAV,
d , HOLD, INITIALIZATION, HEADING, or TRIP PLAN/FUEL
PLAN Pages.
DATABASE WPT 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) Database Generated

Waypoints
This page is accessed by typing in a waypoint identifier or by placing
the cursor over a waypoint identifier and pressing ENTER.
Database Generated Waypoints are automatically updated when
accessed and cannot be modified by the operator. The four basic
types of waypoints residing in the data base are navaids, airports,
intersections and special waypoints.
Rev. 0
VHF Navaids
DATABASE WPT 1/4
WAYPOINT:
WAYPOINT TRM
Alphanumeric designator for USA
the Navaid. (Figure 2-81) POS N 3337.70
W11609.60
NOTE: If the waypoint has a FREQ 116.20
duplicate identifier in the VAR E 13
database, for another loca- ELEV -110
tion, the closest waypoint to NDB-ENTER
the aircraft position will be
shown and the country code Figure 2-81
will be displayed beneath the
waypoint identifier. (Figure 2-81)
Press the NXT Key to sequence to the next waypoint page with a dif-
ferent country code. The PRV Key can be used to sequence back-
ward through the waypoint pages. Additional country codes and cor-
responding POS coordinates will be sequentially displayed.
POS:
The coordinates of the waypoint as stored in the database memory.
(Figure 2-81)
FREQ:
The VHF frequency for the station. (Figure 2-81)
VAR:
The magnetic variation of the station. (Figure 2-81)
ELEV:
The elevation in feet of the station (DME equipped VHF Navaids
only). A (-) indicates elevation is below sea level. (Figure 2-81)
NDB -ENTER: DATABASE WPT 2/4
The procedure for accepting
WAYPOINT TRM
the waypoint from the PORTU
Navigation Data Base is to POS N 3845.60
depress the ENTER Key. W02705.60
(Figure 2-82) FREQ 116.20
VAR W 14
ELEV 172
NDB-ENTER
Figure 2-82
Rev. 0
Non-Directional Beacons (NDBs)

NDBs stored in the internal
database are listed in DATABASE WPT 1/14
Jeppesen publications with a
WAYPOINT PRNB
1, 2 or 3 letter identifier. To CAN
distinguish these NDBs from POS N 54 15.80
VHF NAVAIDS, you must W130 25.40
add an "NB" suffix to the
database identifier. Example:
To access the Prince Rupert
(PR) NDB, you must enter NDB-ENTER
PRNB. (Figure 2-83)
Figure 2-83
Airports
International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) identifiers are used to
access data in the database.
ICAO identifiers differ in some cases from those familiar to many
pilots.
The following are guidelines to access information from the database:
Except for a few hundred 3 or 4 letter/number airport identifiers in
Alaska, Canada and the Continental USA, all airport identifiers stored
in the database have 4 letters.
In most cases, these identi-
fiers begin with a letter that
DATABASE WPT 1/1
corresponds to the geo-
graphic area in which the air-
WAYPOINT KSNA
port is located. The ICAO ARP
code letter prefix for POS N 33 40.50
Continental USA airports is W117 52.10
"K". Hawaii and Alaska OM19R RW19R
identifiers begin with "P". RW01L
RW01R
To access a 4 character RW19L
identifier, use the IDENTIFI-
ER found in the Jeppesen Figure 2-84
charts. For example, enter
KSNA for Santa Ana. (Figure 2-84)
Rev. 0
• If the airport shows a 3 let-

ter IDENTIFIER, add the cor- DATABASE WPT 5/8
rect ICAO prefix letter.
WAYPOINT KNEW
Example: NEW (New ARP
Orleans Lake Front) add a POS N 30 02.60
"K" prefix and enter KNEW W090 01.70
(Figure 2-85). <
RW09 RW36L >
RW18L RW36R
• If the airport shows a 3 < RW18R
character (letters and num- RW27
bers) IDENTIFIER, enter the
identifier as printed. Figure 2-85
Example: 31J (Lake City,
Florida) enter 31J. (Figure 2-86)
Airport Reference Points, DATABASE WPT 6/8
Outer Markers, Runway
Thresholds WAYPOINT 31J
ARP
Airport Reference Point POS N 30 10.90
(ARP) coordinates are W082 34.60
always displayed in <
RW10
response to the airport identi- RW26
fier.
Some outer markers and all
runway thresholds for which Figure 2-86
data is stored in the data-
base are also displayed on
the airport waypoint page DATABASE WPT 7/8
(also known as airport con-
tinuation records page) and WAYPOINT OM19R
can be accessed by pressing KSNA
the PRV or NXT Key or Line POS N 33 46.70
Select Keys. (Figure 2-87) W117 48.30
<
OM19R RW19R >
The selected outer marker or RW01L
runway threshold will then be < RW01R
RW19L
displayed in place of the air-
port identifier in the waypoint
field. The airport identifier Figure 2-87
Shifts to and replaces the
ARP field below. (Figure 2-87)
Rev. 0
Intersections/Enroute Waypoints
Most intersection waypoint identifiers consist of 5 letters. However, 3,
4, and 5 letter and number combinations exist. To access these way-
points, simply enter the identifier from the Jeppesen chart. Example:
WHALE intersection. (Figure 2-88)
SPECIAL DATABASE DATABASE WPT 1/2

WAYPOINTS
WAYPOINT WHALE
USA
PILOT ENTERED WPT POS N 42 11.87
(Personalized) Waypoint W066 59.96
The operator is responsible
for generating the waypoint
data and maintaining its NDB-ENTER
accuracy.
WAYPOINT: Figure 2-88
The alphanumeric designator selected by the pilot. Identifiers can

consist of up to six characters, and can be composed of any of the
characters on the keyboard. (Figure 2-89) However, the asterisk (*)
and pound sign (#) have special functions.
POS:
Blank fields for entering the PILOT ENTERED WPT
latitude and longitude of the
WAYPOINT GLOBAL
waypoint. When initially USA
accessed (waypoint not yet POS ---- -----
in memory) the coordinate ---- -----
fields are both dashed and
covered by a double cursor.
(Figure 2-89)
944 WPTS AVAIL
WPTS AVAILABLE:
Figure 2-89
The number of waypoints
available in memory after this waypoint is defined. Maximum way-
point storage in non-volatile memory is 999. (Figure 2-89)
Rev. 0
WAYPOINT:
PILOT ENTERED WPT
(Figure 2-90). Same as pre-
vious. WAYPOINT GLOBAL
USA
POS: POS N 33 39.70
W117 51.00
If the waypoint has been pre-
viously defined, the coordi-
nates of the waypoint will be
944 WPTS AVAIL
displayed as stored in mem-
ory. These coordinates may
be changed at any time. Figure 2-90
(Figure 2-90)
OK? ENTER:
The procedure for accepting the waypoint if the coordinates are cor-
rect is to depress the ENTER Key. (Figure 2-90)
OFFSET WAYPOINT
An offset waypoint is a set of
OFFSET WPT 1/1
coordinates determined by a
selected radial and distance WAYPOINT TRM*
from a previously defined or USA
database (parent) waypoint. RAD 090.0
>
An * following the parent DIS 10.0
waypoint denotes an offset POS N 33 46.70
waypoint. (Figure 2-91) W117 48.30
<
More than one offset way- OK? ENTER
point is allowed from one
parent, using [*], [*1], [*A1], Figure 2-91
etc. as identifying notation.
NOTE: The offset waypoint uses station declination, if available, or it
uses the calculated magnetic variation of the parent waypoint. All
waypoints defined by a VHF Navaid in the National/International
Airspace System are based on the VHF Navaid station declination.
Since the magnetic variation and station declination may not be the
same at a given Navaid, the FMS calculated position and the defined
position may differ.
WAYPOINT:
The parent waypoint identifier followed by an *. When an offset way-
point identifier is entered and the waypoint has not been previously
defined, the RAD, DIS, and POS fields are all dashed.
Rev. 0
When the waypoint has been previously defined the coordinates will
be displayed and the radial and distance values will be computed
based on the location of the parent waypoint. (Figure 2-91)
If the parent waypoint is a waypoint from an airport continuation
record (runway or outer marker associated with a specific airport), the
airport identifier will be displayed immediately below the offset way-
point identifier.
If a parent waypoint has a duplicate identifier in the database, the
country code will be displayed immediately below the offset waypoint
identifier. (Figure 2-91)
RAD:
The radial from the parent waypoint in degrees and tenths of degrees,
along which the offset is established. This entry will be annunciated
with a T if a true heading input is received or if the parent waypoint is
north of N 70° or south of S 60° latitude. (Figure 2-91)
NOTE: The radial can be entered in whole numbers without a trailing
0. i.e. enter 070 or 70 and 070.0 will be displayed. To enter a tenth of
a radial all 4 digits must be entered. i.e. 0701 will be displayed as
070.1. The DIS entry requires a trailing 0 be entered for any DIS
value greater than .9. i.e. enter 100 to display 10.0.
DIS:
The distance from the parent waypoint to the offset waypoint (1999.9
maximum enterable). (Figure 2-91)
POS:
The computed offset waypoint coordinates based on the pilot entered
radial and distance from the parent waypoint. (Figure 2-91)
OK? ENTER:
The procedure for accepting the waypoint if the coordinates are cor-
rect is to depress the ENTER Key. (Figure 2-91)
SPECIAL WAYPOINTS
#0,#1 and #OFF are special waypoints defined automatically by the
system based on the airplane position.
#0 After pressing the d key and ENTER key the position after the
turn where the airplane intercepts the course to the direct to waypoint.
The #0 waypoint is defined as the point from which a DIRECT TO
Rev. 0
waypoint leg has begun. Should the DIRECT TO procedure require a

turn, #0 will be defined as the point at which the aircraft completes the
turn and intercepts the direct course to the fix. #0 will momentarily be
displayed on an EFIS map. #0 can only be defined by the system.
#1 The position at the point where the POSITION FIX Page was last
accessed via the HOLD Key. #1 can only be defined by the system.
Power Off Waypoint
The Power Off Waypoint is a set of coordinates retrieved as the last
known position when power is lost enroute. This page should be
accessed by inserting #OFF in the IDENT field on the POSITION FIX
Page after power has been restored and Initialization Enroute has
been performed.
SPECIAL WPT
WAYPOINT #OFF:
The Power Off Waypoint des- WAYPOINT *OFF
ignator. (Figure 2-92)
POS N 42 08.00
POS: W074 49.90
GMT OFF 00:13
The last present position MINUTES OFF 01.1
LAST TK 281
coordinates at loss of power.
LAST GS 251
Coordinates are stored in
non-volatile memory. (Figure
2-92) Figure 2-92
GMT OFF:
The actual time (Greenwich Mean Time) of power loss. (Figure 2-92)
MINUTES OFF:
The total time elapsed during power off. (Figure 2-92)
LAST TK:
Aircraft track at time of power off. (Figure 2-92)
LAST GS:
Last groundspeed in knots at time of power off. (Figure 2-92)
OCEANIC REPORTING WAYPOINTS

These waypoints are in the database and are used for oceanic posi-
tion reporting. These waypoints can be added to the FPL by typing
special numbers. See Section 3, ADDING A WAYPOINT.
Rev. 0
OBSOLETE WAYPOINT
Obsolete Waypoints are typically created when a multiply defined
database waypoint used on a stored flight plan is no longer found in
the database. This may happen when a new data-base is loaded. An
obsolete waypoint can be accessed only by verifying it as an existing
waypoint on a flight plan. It will be lost once it is erased from a stored
flight plan.
MESSAGES (MSG KEY)

System and Sensor messages are displayed on separate pages in the
Message Section. They are accessed by depressing the MSG Key.
The Message Section will consist of as many pages as are required to
display current messages. The MSG Key is used to sequence
through the System and Sensor Message Pages and to return to the
page that was displayed before accessing the Message Section.
NOTE: If no messages exist
on the sensor message SYSTEM MESSAGES 1/1
page, you will be unable to
*ENTRY REQUIRED
access this page. If the NAV RDY
MSG light illuminates and no *-HOLD/ENTER
new message is displayed NO NAV
when the system message NDB-WW EXP 27DEC
page is accessed, press the
MSG key again to display
the sensor messages page.
NXT, BACK, and PRV keys Figure 2-93
can be used to page forward
and backward through the
message pages. SENSOR MESSAGES 1/1
System Messages describe VLF - NO NAV

the system's operation with IRS - LINK FAIL
all related aircraft systems GPS - NAV RDY
(Figure 2-93). Sensor VPU - DR
Messages describe the oper- LCS - STN BLINK
ational status of each naviga-
tion sensor (Figure 2-94).
In most instances when new
messages are added, the Figure 2-94
Message light will flash and a
flashing yellow asterisk will appear adjacent to the new message.
Rev. 0
SYSTEM MESSAGES
In the event that the NMU fails, a message will be dispayed on the
CDU. The message will read “NO DATA RECEIVED. THE SYSTEM
IS INOPERATIVE.”
ACTION REQUIRED:
The following are the action required messages that may appear on
the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. All will cause the message annun-
ciator to flash.
System Message Explanation
ENTRY REQUIRED Information required on the Initialization
Page must be verified/entered. (Date, GMT
and Position).
HOLD/ENTER Manual procedure for putting the VPU (non-
IRS equipped) into the Primary Navigation
Mode when groundspeed is less than 50
knots.
MAN HDG REQD There is no heading input to the system and
an H-field antenna is installed with the RPU.
A manual heading entry must be made on
NAV Page 3.
MAN TAS REQD There is no TAS input to the system and the
RPU is using fewer than three Comm sta-
tions for navigation. A manual TAS entry
must be made on NAV Page 3.
VERIFY POSITION Aircraft composite (blended) position is in
question and must be manually verified.
VAR WARNING Magnetic variation cannot be automatically
computed, and MAN VAR REQD. A manual
variation entry must be made on NAV Page
3 (i. e. aircraft position is north of 70° N lati-
tude or south of 60° S latitude).
Rev. 2
Aug.00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 2-77
ADVISORY:
The following are the advisory messages that may appear on the
SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. All will cause the message annuncia-
tor to flash unless otherwise noted with an asterisk *.
ALTITUDE FAIL The altitude input to the system has failed.
*APRCH ARMED Approach is ready to be executed. Pressing
ENTER TO CANCEL? ENTER will cancel the sequence. Displayed
within 30NM radius of the airport. CDI sensi-
tivity changes to 1NM full scale deflection.
VNAV Deviation changes to 500 ft. full scale
deflection. The message annunciator will
not illuminate.
*APRCH NEXT Aircraft is within 3NM of the FAF. CDI sen-
ENTER TO CANCEL? sitivity changes from 1NM to .3NM full scale
deflection. The message annunciator will
not illuminate.
*APRCH ACTIVE Approach sequence is being executed.
ENTER TO CANCEL? Pressing ENTER will cancel the approach.
The message annunciator will not illuminate.
APRCH CANCELED System is in an Approach Mode and the
approach is changed or deleted from the
Active Flight Plan.
APRCH WARN The aircraft is within 2 NM from the FAF and
GPS is in Dead Reckoning (DR) or there is
no RAIM available. HSI is flagged.
CNFG DATA LOST CDU non-volatile memory has lost its config-
uration information and the configuration
module has failed.
CNFG MODULE FAIL Configuration module has failed. CDU non-
volatile memory configuration information
will be used.
COMPASS FAIL The aircraft's compass heading input to the
system is invalid.
DATA BASE INVALID The data base is invalid because the last
UPDATE ABORTED attempt to update the data base was aborted.
Rev. 0
ADVISORY: (continued)
DR HDG/TAS The system is in the Dead Reckoning (DR)
DR TK/TAS Mode and is using one of these four combi-
DR TK/GS nations of inputs to compute position.
DR HDG/GS
EXT WPT REJECT CDU has rejected an external waypoint input
from a radar or EFIS. (Maximum 99 external
waypoints received or 999 waypoints
stored).
HIGH HOLDING SPD During Holding or when system is about to
enter a Holding pattern, TAS is high enough
to cause the aircraft to stray outside the
boundaries of protected airspace.
IRS ONLY>30 MIN System has been operating enroute in IRS
Only Mode for more than 30 minutes. The
message annunciator will not illuminate if the
aircraft is Weight On Gear.
IRS ONLY>10 MIN System has been operating in the terminal
area in IRS Only Mode for more than 10
minutes. The message annunciator will not
illuminate if the aircraft is Weight On Gear.
MEM FAIL Non-volatile memory has failed at least par-
tially.
*NAV RDY The system is ready to be placed in the
Primary Navigation Mode. Message annun-
ciator will not illuminate. This message is
displayed only when GPS is unavailable and
another sensor is being used.
NDB FAIL Database has failed.
NDB OUTDATED Expiration date of the database has been
reached. Database should be updated.
NDB-WW EXP 27OCT Worldwide (WW) or North American/
European (NA) database and expiration
date.
NMU LINK FAIL Data link between the NMUs has failed.
Dual systems are required beofre this mes-
sage will appear.
Rev. 2
NO AUTO LEG CHG An automatic leg change will not occur upon
reaching the TO waypoint. Message annun-
ciator will not illuminate most of the time.
NO NAV The system is not navigating. Message
annunciator will not illuminate.
POS WARN>1.7 NM Based on the signal strength or geometry,
the VPU sensor quality may be such that the
composite position may have more than 1.7
nm error and may not be suitable for naviga-
tion in the terminal areas.
the VPU or VLF sensor quality may be such
that the composite position may have more
than 2.8 nm error and may not be suitable
for enroute navigation on J/V routes.
the VPU or VLF sensor quality may be such
that the composite position may have more
than 3.8 nm error and may not be suitable
for enroute navigation on J/V or Random
routes.
POWEROFF POS The system has lost power in flight for more
than 7 seconds and the #OFF waypoint is
available. Reviewing the #OFF waypoint
page removes this message.
SENSOR MISCOMPARE The difference between the CDU composite
(blended) position and a sensor position
exceeds a predetermined amount.
*STRG INVALID The system has stopped computing a roll
command steering output due to invalid
navigation leg, groundspeed or crosstrack
distance. Invalid Heading and Auto TAS
may cause this message if the GPS is
invalid. Message annunciator will not illumi-
nate.
Rev. 0
TAS FAIL The True Airspeed input to the system from
the Air Data Computer is invalid.
USING MAN HDG An H-field antenna is installed with the RPU
and a manual heading input is being used.
*WPT ALERT The aircraft is within 30 seconds ETE of the
next leg lateral change. Message annuncia-
tor will not illuminate.
WPT MEM FULL All 999 waypoint locations have been used
in flight plans or as FROM or TO waypoints.
VNAV WPT ALERT Aircraft is within 1 minute ETE of #TOD or
path intercept point. Message annunciator
will not illuminate. However the discrete
WPT annunciator will flash for 10 seconds
then go steady
VSPD FAIL The system vertical speed input has failed.
SENSOR MESSAGES
The following are sensor messages that may appear on the SEN-
SOR MESSAGES Page. All messages will cause the MSG annunci-
ator to flash unless other wise noted with an asterisk*.
Sensor Message Explanation
ACCURACY WARN The integrity monitoring system that moni-
tors the satellite constellation (RAIM) has
detected a GPS horizontal position error that
is outside the alarm threshold for the phase
of flight in progress. (.3NM Approach; 1NM
Terminal; 2NM Enroute)
ALIGN The IRS is in the alignment mode and is not
yet NAV RDY.
ATTITUDE The IRS is in the Attitude mode.
BATTERY WARN The sensor is operating on its own internal
battery.
CHECK QUAL The VPU quality factor has exceeded the
pilot entered advisory quality factor.
Rev. 0
SENSOR MESSAGES: (continued)

Sensor Message Explanation
CYCLE SLIP The Loran sensor has detected a cycle slip
condition on one of the stations being
tracked.
*DESELECTED The sensor has been manually deselected
and will no longer contribute to the computa-
tion of composite (blended) position.
Message annunciator will not illuminate.
DR Either the VLF (RPU), GPS, LCS, or VPU
sensor is in the Dead Reckoning (DR) mode
of navigation. The message annunciator will
not illuminate for VPU.
ENTR SET HDG The IRS is in the attitude mode and a head-
ing value must be entered.
LINK FAIL Data exchange between the sensor and
CDU has failed.
*NAV RDY The sensor is capable of navigation, but has
not been placed in the navigation mode.
Message annunciator will not illuminate.
Only displayed when GPS is not available.
*NO NAV The sensor has not navigated since power
up. Message annunciator will not illuminate.
OSC WARN Inoperable oscillator on Loran-C sensor.
NO RAIM RAIM is not available at this time.
NO RAIM @ DEST RAIM is available at the present time, but
will not be available at the destination arrival
time.
NO SYNC Omega synchronization has not been com-
pleted.
RCVR FAIL At least one Communication or Omega
receiver has failed.
STD FAIL The rubidium frequency standard in the RPU
has failed.
STN BLINK Transmitted Loran-C signal is in error and
will not be used for navigation.
Rev. 2
System Operation
SECTION 3
SYSTEM OPERATION
PRE-DEPARTURE
POWER ON/OFF AND PARALLAX ADJUSTMENT

1. ON Key - DEPRESS
(momentarily). The SELF TEST
SELF TEST Page
(Figure 3-1) will be dis- GLOBAL
played for approximately
30 seconds. During the HONEYWELL
INTERNATIONAL INC.
time the SELF TEST
message is displayed,
the system is performing COPYRIGHT 2000
internal self tests. These ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
tests verify the inputs and
outputs from the Control Figure 3-1
Display Unit (CDU) and
Navigation Management Unit (NMU). If the system was turned
OFF last by the removal of aircraft power, the system will turn ON
automatically when aircraft power is applied.
2. BRT Key - Adjust as required. The display will initially come on
at 75% of full bright. DEPRESS and hold the BRT Key to dim
the display. Release the BRT Key. DEPRESS and hold again to
brighten the display. To attain 100% brightness depress and hold
BRT Key again until the display no longer gets brighter.
NOTE: The display may be changed instantaneously to 75% of full
bright from any brightness level by momentarily depressing the ON
Key.
3. Parallax Adjustment - If the Line Select Keys do not align with the
line select prompts on the screen, DEPRESS the BRT Key (If the
screen begins to dim, release the BRT Key then depress again
and hold while momentarily pressing the d Key, then the P
Key). Using the U (Up) or D (Down) Key, adjust the display to
the desired alignment. DEPRESS any key when alignment is
complete.
4. To turn the system off, depress the ON Key and hold for three
seconds.
Rev. 2
System Operation
INITIALIZATION PAGE
INITIALIZATION
It is important that the initial-
ization position and the first DATE 01 JUL 00 >
waypoint of the Active Flight GMT 18:42
Plan are the same so that >
IDENT KDAL
the TO/FROM Leg Distance POS ----------
displays the correct informa- ----------
tion. The DIRECT TO func-
>
tion to the first waypoint on 14141-0624 SM06
the flight plan may also be
used to insure distance Figure 3-2
accuracy.
The Initialization Page gives the pilot access to the required initializa-
tion data (Date, GMT and Position). Following confirmation or entry
of this data, the page disappears and cannot be retrieved unless the
system power is removed and then restored. GMT and Date are
available for display in the PLAN section and Position is available in
the NAV section.
DATE and GMT

The DATE and GMT are continuously updated while the system is
off. If non volatile memory is erased the date and time field will be
dashes. When the system is turned on, the DATE and GMT will
appear on the Initialization Page. If the DATE is incorrect, move the
cursor to the DATE field to update manually.
1. DATE - INSERT, if required (day/month/year - digits only). For
example: March 1, 1995 would be entered as 01 03 95. Enter a
leading 0 for months with a numerical value of less than 10.
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to verify display.
3. GMT - INSERT, if required (hours and minutes). If the GMT is
incorrect, update manually.
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to verify display.
5. MSG Key - DEPRESS to verify Database Expiration Date and
review other System Messages. Continue depressing MSG Key
to review SENSOR MESSAGES and to return to INITIALIZA-
TION Page.
Rev. 2
System Operation
INITIALIZATION POSITION
The Initialization Position for non-IRS equipped systems should be
the departure runway threshold. For IRS equipped systems, the
ramp or alignment LAT/LONG position should be inserted as
Initialization Position.
NOTE: Once the INITIALIZATION Page appears, and after a brief
delay, the IDENT field normally prefills with the ICAO ident of the air-
port closest to the aircraft position at shut-down, provided the air-
craft’s real position and system position were the same at system
shutdown.
The Departure Position may be entered using either:
Option 1: Using the IDENT field for non-IRS equipped systems
Option 2: Using the POS field
Option 1: Using the IDENT field for non-IRS equipped systems

(Entering Alpha and Numeric Identifiers on the Initialization Page)
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the IDENT
field (if required).
Enter letters of the departure airport’s ICAO identifier. Enter let-
ters and numbers of the departure airport if it is a non-ICAO iden-
tifier.
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
3. Airport Reference Point INITIALIZATION
(ARP) coordinates will be
displayed with continua- DATE 01 JUL 00 >
tion records listed below. GMT 18:42
>
To access the airport IDENT KDAL
continuation records, POS ----------
position the cursor over a ----------
departure runway identi- >
14141-0624 SM06
fier. This will automati-
cally result in the display
Figure 3-3
Rev. 2
System Operation
of the departure runway

threshold in the waypoint DATABASE WPT 4/8
field, the departure air-
WAYPOINT RW19R
port identifier will replace KSNA
the ARP field, and POS POS N 33 40.89
coordinates will reflect W117 51.90
selected runway thresh- <
OM19R RW19R
>
old. (Figure 3-4) RW01L
<
RW01R
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. RW19L
5. POS Coordinates - VER-

Figure 3-4
IFY coordinates high-
lighted by the cursor on
the Initialization Page. INITIALIZATION
(Figure 3-5)
DATE 01 JUL 00>
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. GMT 21:19
If AFIS is not installed, the >
IDENT RW19R
display will automatically POS N 33 40.89
advance to the FLIGHT W117 51.90
PLAN LIST Page. The cur- >
sor will be positioned over 14141-0624 SM06
the first Flight Plan Number
that originates with the same Figure 3-5
airport or runway identifier as
entered on the INITIALIZA-
TION Page (Figure 3-6). FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1
Stored Flight Plans are refer- KABQ KMSY 1
enced according to >
KDAL KHPN 6
Departure and Destination KDAL KSFO 8 >
pairs and are automatically KHPN KORD 2
sequenced in alphabetical KHPN KORD 9
>
order on the FLIGHT PLAN KLAX KSTL 4
KPRC KSNA 3
LIST Page. The cursor may
KSNA KHPN 7
be placed over the desired
FPL number. To review the
FPL press ENTER. Figure 3-6
If AFIS/ACARS is installed, the display will advance to the AFIS FPL

Page or the ACARS Initialization Page after the system is initialized.
Rev. 2
System Operation
Option 2: Using the POS field

For IRS equipped systems, the ramp or alignment LAT/LONG posi-
tion should be inserted as the Initialization Position using POS
Coordinates.
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS (cursor over POS field).
2. POS Coordinates - VERIFY. Coordinates displayed are the
computed position when the system was shutdown. If correct,
these coordinates may be used as the Departure Position.
If Incorrect:
a. Latitude - INSERT N or S first, then 6 numbers (degrees,
minutes, and hundredths).
b. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. (See Note)
c. Longitude - INSERT E or W first, then 7 numbers (degrees,
minutes, and hundredths).
NOTE: If coordinate field flashes after entry, verify coordinates and
depress ENTER again. Coordinate field will flash if the entered value
varies more than 10 arc minutes from the displayed value.
If only one coordinate is in error, it may be updated individually by
depressing N, S, E, or W Key to access the desired field.
If AFIS/ACARS is not installed in the system, The FLIGHT PLAN
LIST Page will now be displayed. A Flight Plan may be selected by
bringing the cursor on to the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page over the
desired flight plan number and pressing ENTER.
NOTE: If necessary, use the PRV or NXT Key to cycle through all
available FLIGHT PLAN LIST Pages.
If the desired flight plan does not appear, a new flight plan may be
created. (See Building Flight Plans)
If AFIS/ACARS is installed, the display will advance to the AFIS FPL
Page or the ACARS Initialization Page after the system is initialized.
Rev. 0
System Operation
BUILDING FLIGHT PLANS (FPL)
CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to display (Stored) FLIGHT PLAN LIST
Page (if required).
2. Line Select Key - FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1
DEPRESS to position
KABQ KMSY 1
cursor on blank line and >
KDAL KHPN 3
display the NEXT FPL KDAL KSFO 2 >
number. (Figure 3-7) KHPN KORD 4
NEXT FPL 5
If several Flight Plans
are displayed, position
cursor anywhere on the
page then depress the
BACK Key to show Figure 3-7
NEXT FPL number
available.
FLIGHT PLAN
<
5 1/1
NOTE: If all 56 Flight Plans ******
are used, NO FPL AVAIL
<
will appear in the field. Any
of the stored flight plans may <
be erased to allow additional
entries. The procedure is < >
DEPART XFILL
described under Modifying A ARRIVE SELECT >
<
Flight Plan. APPROACH ERASE
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS
to display FLIGHT Figure 3-8
PLAN Page. (Figure 3-8)
NOTE: The XFILL prompt will only be displayed if the airplane is
configured for dual systems.
4. Type the appropriate departure airport or waypoint identifier in
the cursor field.
NOTE: Identifier may contain from 1 to 6 characters in any combina-
tion of letters and numbers. If an entry error is made, press the
BACK Key to erase a character, then enter the correction.
6. Waypoint Coordinates and Data - VERIFY. If a specific runway
is desired, depress the appropriate Line Select Key to place the
cursor over the desired runway.
Rev. 0
System Operation
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to add waypoint to the FPL.

8. Repeat Steps 4 through 7 for the remaining waypoints. The des-
tination airport identifier should be the last waypoint on the flight
plan.
NOTE: Waypoints are generally obtained from the Navigation Data
Base (NDB). Pilot entered offsets and waypoints may also be
entered. See CREATING/CHANGING PILOT ENTERED WAY-
POINTS for a more in depth discussion.
NOTE: SID’s, STARS, Enroute Airways, and non-precision
approach procedures may also be entered on either the stored or
active flight plan. See SIDs, STARs, APPROACHES AND
ENROUTE AIRWAYS for more details.
A maximum of 50 waypoint identifiers can be entered on Stored
Flight Plans and 100 on the Active Flight Plan.
Attempting to enter more than the maximum allowed will cause FPL
FULL to be displayed with the identifier flashing in the cursor.
If adding a SID, STAR or Approach to a Flight Plan will exceed the
Flight Plan capacity. A NO ROOM ON FPL message will appear on
the procedure page being displayed.
Attempting to enter more than 999 pilot entered waypoints in memo-
ry causes MEM FULL to be displayed on the FLIGHT PLAN Page.
The MSG light will flash and WPT MEM FULL will be displayed on
SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
To Delete a Waypoint
9. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the way-
point to be deleted.
10. BACK Key - DEPRESS. A DELETE? prompt will appear adja-
cent to the waypoint to be deleted.
11. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The waypoint will be deleted.
Rev. 0
System Operation
MODIFYING A FLIGHT PLAN
To Access The Desired Flight Plan:

This procedure may be used to modify the Active Flight Plan or any
Stored Flight Plan. Access the Active Plan or Stored Flight Plan by
depressing the FPL Key. Access a Stored Flight Plan from the
alphabetized FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page. Use the PRV or NXT Keys
to cycle through the available pages.
NOTE: A change made to
the Active Flight Plan does <
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
not affect the Stored Flight KDAL - KHPN
Plan. Any change made to a <
LIT
BWG DELETE?
Stored Flight Plan remains in HNN
<
memory. JST
<
MXE
>
Deleting A Waypoint: DEPART
<
ARRIVE SELECT >
1. Line Select Key - APPROACH ERASE
DEPRESS to position the
cursor over the waypoint Figure 3-9
identifier.
2. BACK Key - DEPRESS. FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
<
DELETE? appears in the KDAL - KHPN
waypoint field to inform < LIT
the pilot of the pending HNN
change. (Figure 3-9) <
JST
MXE
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. <
KHPN
>
The waypoint is deleted DEPART
and the cursor is dis- <
ARRIVE SELECT >
APPROACH ERASE
played over the next way-
point. (Figure 3-10)
Figure 3-10
NOTE: Deleting a waypoint
from either a SID, STAR, or Approach Procedure will invalidate that
procedure as indicated by the waypoints of the procedure no longer
being indented.
To remove a waypoint from non-volatile memory it must be deleted
from all Stored Flight Plans. This does not include database way-
points.
Rev. 0
System Operation
ADDING A WAYPOINT
A waypoint may be added anywhere in a Flight Plan sequence,
except prior to the current TO waypoint if the ACTIVE FPL Page is
displayed.
<
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
1. Line Select Key - DE- KDAL - KHPN
PRESS to position the cur- <
LIT
sor over the waypoint iden- HNN
tifier that will follow the new <
JST
entry. (Figure 3-11) MXE
<
KHPN
>
2. Type Waypoint Identifier - DEPART
ARRIVE SELECT>
INSERT. (Figure 3-12) <
APPROACH ERASE
Figure 3-11
4. Waypoint Coordinates -
VERIFY or INSERT. <
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
KDAL - KHPN
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. LIT
<
The new waypoint is BWG
added to the Flight Plan <
JST
sequence and the cursor MXE
is over the waypoint fol- <
KHPN
>
DEPART
lowing the new entry.
<
ARRIVE SELECT>
(Figure 3-13) APPROACH ERASE
NOTE: Adding a waypoint to
a SID, STAR, or Approach Figure 3-12
Procedure will invalidate that
procedure as indicated by the FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
<
waypoints no longer being KDAL - KHPN
LIT
indented. <
BWG
<
HNN
Adding Oceanic JST
Waypoints MXE
< >
DEPART
Oceanic waypoints are <
ARRIVE SELECT >
entered in the same manner APPROACH ERASE
as other waypoints with one
exception. Instead of enter- Figure 3-13
ing a waypoint identifier, a five-character coordinate identifier, such
as 3050N, is entered. The following rules are to be applied:
1. Positions in the Northern Hemisphere use letters “N” and “E”.
Positions in the Southern Hemisphere use the letters “S” and
Rev. 3
Oct/02 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-9
System Operation
“W”. Both will use numerics for latitude and longitude values as
follows:
a. Latitude - Latitude will always precede longitude.
b. Longitude - Use only the last two digits of the first, three-digit
longitude value.
c. Letter Placement - The letter designator will be the last
character in the five-character string if the longitude is less
than 100 degrees and will be the third character in the five-
character string if the longitude is 100 degrees or greater.
d. The letter “N” is used for north latitude and west longitude.
The letter “E” is used for north latitude and east longitude.
The letter ”S” is used for south latitude and east longitude.
The letter “W” is used for south latitude and west longitude.
2. Examples:
North latitude/West longitude North latitude/East longitude
N50 00/W040 00 = 5040N N50 00/E040 00 = 5040E
N07 00/W008 00 = 0708N N07 00/E008 00 = 0708E
N75 00/W170 00 = 75N70 N75 00/E170 00 = 75E70
N07 00/W120 00 = 07N20 N07 00/E120 00 = 07E20
South latitude/East longitude South latitude/West longitude
S50 00/E040 00 = 5040S S50 00/W040 00 = 5040W
S07 00/E008 00 = 0708S S07 00/W008 00 = 0708W
S75 00/E170 00 = 75S70 S75 00/W170 00 = 75W70
S07 00/E110 00 = 07S10 S07 00/W120 00 = 07W20.
ERASING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to display desired FLIGHT PLAN LIST
Page.
2. Line Select Key- DEPRESS to position the cursor over the num-
ber of the FPL to be erased.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over ERASE?
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. All waypoints of the stored FPL will be
erased.
Rev. 3
3-10 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Oct/02
System Operation
NOTE: If the Active Flight Plan is erased, all waypoints except the
FR and TO are deleted. A fence (- - - - - -) is displayed indicating no
auto leg change beyond the TO waypoint.
USING DUPLICATE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS

1. Duplicate Waypoint
Identifiers: There are DATABASE WPT 2/4
several waypoints WAYPOINT TRM
around the world with the USA
same identifier. If the POS N 33 37.70
identifier selected has W116 09.60
more than one waypoint FREQ 116.20
associated with it, addi- VAR E 13
ELEV -110
tional pages will be indi-
NDB-ENTER
cated on line 1. i.e.1/2,
1/4, etc. The waypoint
nearest the aircraft posi- Figure 3-14
tion will be displayed
first. (Figure 3-14)
DATABASE WPT 3/4
To select an alternate way-
point location: WAYPOINT TRM
PORTU
2. PRV or NXT Key - POS N 38 45.60
DEPRESS until desired W027 05.60
country name is dis- FREQ 116.20
played on line 4. (Figure VAR W 14
3-15) ELEV 172
NDB-ENTER
3. ENTER Key- DEPRESS
to add the waypoint to
Figure 3-15
the flight plan.
Rev. 3
System Operation
REVIEWING WAYPOINT DATA/COORDINATES (FLIGHT PLAN

PAGES ONLY)
If the stored flight plan is currently displayed, proceed to Step 4.
To access the desired flight plan:

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to locate the desired Flight Plan on the
FLIGHT PLAN LIST Pages.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired
Flight Plan Number.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over identifier to
be reviewed.
6. Waypoint Coordinates or data- VERIFY.
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The Flight Plan is displayed with the
cursor over the next waypoint.
8. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for remaining waypoints.
NOTE: This procedure may also be used for reviewing waypoint
information on the Active Flight Plan Page.
Rev. 0
System Operation
FLIGHT PLAN (FPL) SELECTION

This procedure is used to transfer a stored FPL to active FPL status.
See AFIS/ACARS section for selecting FPLs to the active status.
It is recommended that the initialization position and the first waypoint
of the Active Flight Plan are the same so that the TO/FROM Leg
Distance displays the correct information. The DIRECT TO function to
the first waypoint on the flight plan may also be used to insure dis-
tance accuracy.
If a stored flight plan is currently displayed, proceed to Step 5.
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS (if required) until the desired FLIGHT
PLAN LIST Page appears.
NOTE: If the desired Flight Plan is not listed refer to the procedure for
Creating a Flight Plan (Page 3-6).
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
desired Flight Plan Number.
NOTE: If desired Flight Plan number is known, position the cursor on
the page, enter the number and depress ENTER Key. The desired
Flight Plan will be displayed.
4. FLIGHT PLAN Page - VERIFY Flight Plan. Review routing by
depressing PRV or NXT Key to page through multiple Flight Plan
pages.
NOTE: DEPRESS FPL or NXT Key to sequence to an alternate Flight
Plan with the same departure destination pair and higher Flight Plan
number.
DEPRESS PRV or BACK Key to sequence to a lower Flight Plan num-
ber with the same departure-destination pair.
5. Line Select Key- DE- FLIGHT PLAN 5 3/3
<
PRESS to position cursor
over SELECT? (Figure 3- <
BDF
16): GSH
<
KDTW
a. to transfer the Stored ******
Flight Plan to Active < >
Flight Plan status con- DEPART
tinue with Step 6. <
ARRIVE SELECT?>
APPROACH ERASE
b. to INVERT and transfer
the Stored Flight Plan Figure 3-16
with waypoint sequence
Rev. 3
System Operation
reversed to Active Flight

Plan status, press the <
FLIGHT PLAN 5 3/3
BACK Key to display
<
BDF
INVERT?. (Figure 3-17) GSH
KDTW
******
7. ACTIVE FPL - CON- < >
DEPART
FIRM. Observe that the
<
ARRIVE INVERT?>
Stored Flight Plan trans- APPROACH ERASE
ferred to the ACTIVE FPL
Page as SELECTED or Figure 3-17
INVERTED. (Figure 3-18)
ACTIVE FPL 1/3
INITIAL LEG SELECTION <
KSNA - KDTW
An initial From/To Leg or < MUSEL
Direct To Leg must be estab- HEMET
TRM
lished in order for the system <
EED*
to provide guidance along TBC
< >
the Flight Plan. From the DEPART
ACTIVE FPL Page , the fol- <
ARRIVE ETE>
lowing procedure is used. APPROACH ERASE
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS. Figure 3-18

2. FR Waypoint - VERIFY. The first waypoint on the Active Flight
Plan will appear in the FR field. To change the FR waypoint,
insert the desired identifier.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The next waypoint in the Active Flight
Plan sequence will appear in the TO field.
4. TO Waypoint - VERIFY. NAVIGATION 1/4
< >
To change the TO way- FR KSNA -----
point, insert the desired <
TO MUSEL -----
identifier.
DIS 13.1
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. ETE ------
DTK 186
>
6. DIS, DTK - CHECK for GS -----
reasonableness. (Figure WIND ---/--- >
3-19) -AUTO-
Figure 3-19
BEFORE TAXI (IRS
EQUIPPED)
The Inertial Reference System (IRS) should be aligned and placed in
Rev. 3
System Operation
the Navigation Mode using the IRS manufacturer’s operating instruc-

tions.
1. MSG Key - DEPRESS for IRS Sensor Messages.
SENSOR MESSAGES Page will show IRS-ALIGN during align-
ment sequence. When the IRS is in normal Navigation Mode no
IRS messages will be displayed.
2. IRS Status - VERIFY NAV. Observe that no IRS messages
appear on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page.
RUNWAY LINE-UP (IRS EQUIPPED)

Provided an accurate alignment position was entered and the IRS was
placed in the Navigation Mode prior to taxi, no further action is required.
IRS, VLF (RPU), Loran-C, GPS AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED

On the ground the system will navigate deriving composite position
and groundspeed from the GPS or IRS, provided the IRS was
aligned and placed into the Navigation Mode prior to taxi. All other
sensors (VLF, VPU, and LCS) will enter the Primary Navigation Mode
automatically at 50 kts (IRS) groundspeed or weight-off-wheels, pro-
vided they have sufficient stations to begin navigation. Momentarily
depressing HOLD Key, then ENTER, and ENTER again will also put
the sensors in the primary NAV mode if sufficient stations are avail-
able.
VLF (RPU), Loran-C AND/OR VPU EQUIPPED ONLY

This procedure is used to manually place the system into the Primary
Navigation Mode at the designated departure position i.e. the end of
the departure runway. The VLF is a position keeping sensor that can
navigate with as few as two suitable stations. The VPU is a position
finding sensor that can navigate once airborne or within line of sight
of suitable navaids. The Loran-C is a position finding sensor that can
navigate when it is within range and acquires an adequate number of
stations.
1. MSG Key - DEPRESS.
2. NAV RDY - HOLD/ENTER Message - VERIFY. This message
indicates that the system is ready to enter the Primary Navigation
Mode.
3. MSG Key - DEPRESS to verify status of all sensors. Observe
NAV RDY/NO NAV messages for appropriate sensor and refer
to the Flight Manual Supplement for limitations.
Rev. 3
System Operation
4. HOLD Key - DEPRESS to verify departure coordinates.

5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS twice to enter Primary Navigation
Mode.
NOTE: If the [HOLD/ENTER/ENTER] procedure had not been initi-
ated prior to takeoff, the system and the various sensors will enter
the Primary Navigation Mode automatically at weight-off-wheels, or
at a true airspeed of between 50 and 150knots, depending on config-
uration.
SIDs, STARs, APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS

The GNS-X C129 SID (Standard Instrument Departure), STAR
(Standard Terminal Arrival), Approach and Airway retrieval feature is
designed to relieve flight crew workload. SIDs and STARs require
such procedures as flying headings and altitudes, as well as inter-
cepting VOR radials and DME arcs, etc. Approaches can be flown
autopilot/fight director coupled until the Missed Approach Point.
Missed Approach Procedures must then be flown manually. The
GNS-X C129 is ONLY designed to provide meaningful input to the
HSI when on a track between two waypoints or when Pseudo Vortac
(selected course) procedures are used. THE SYSTEM IS NOT
DESIGNED TO FLY FULL SID, STAR OR MISSED APPROACH
PROCEDURES.
NOTE: The flight crew must review the published procedure and
compare it to the procedure contained in the database. The pub-
lished charts are the governing authority and the chart procedures
must be followed. Any differences between the chart and the data-
base must be resolved by the flight crew prior to commencing the
procedure.
When flying those portions of a SID or STAR that are not tracks
between fixes, the aircraft should be flown manually or in HEADING
mode. In some cases, Pseudo Vortac procedures can be used to
establish an intercept to a published track. When using the Pseudo
Vortac mode, or upon intercepting a published track between two
waypoints (fixes), the aircraft may be flown in reference to the cross
track deviation provided by the GNS-XLS or by coupling the GNS-XLS
roll command to the auto pilot.
The first leg of the SID that the FMS can fly is not the first leg of the
procedure. To properly fly SIDs, the flight crew must manually fly the
procedure to a point where the FMS can fly the procedure properly.
The first leg of the SID that the FMS can fly is usually the first way-
point after the airport identifier or departure runway. After loading the
SID on to the Active FPL, access NAV Pg 1. Enter the first waypoint
Rev. 3
System Operation
ELMAA 5 DEPARTURE
D
SEATTLE
This SID requires a mnimum climb gradiant of: (H) 116.8 SEA
Rwys 16 L/R: 550' per nm to 3000'.
NAA7 26.1 W122 18.5
TAKE OFF
Rwys 16L/R: intercept and proceed via Seattle
R-158, cross Seattle 5 DME fix at or above 3000'
then turn RIGHT to 250 heading to intercept SEATTLE-TACOMA
and proceed via Seattle R-277 to Elmaa Int, INTL 429
then via (transition) or (assigned route).
TRANSITION
D5 158°
Hoquiam (ELMAA5.HQM): From Elmaa Int to 227°
Hoquiam VORTAC(33nm): Via Hoquiam R-046.
250° hdg
226°
At or above
HOQUIAM
(ELMAA5.HQM)
3000'
RD46° D
18000 ELMAA
33 N47 08.9 W123 24.5
THIS CHART: FOR ILLUSTRATION PUPOSES ONLY
D
HOQUIAM Heading mode or Manual required
(H) 117.7 HQM
N46 56.8 W124 08.9 Figure 3-20
after the runway or airport identifier in the FR field. Press ENTER.
The TO field will display the next waypoint in sequence fro the FPL.
Press ENTER again to complete the initialization of the first leg of the
flight plan. The flight crew must manually fly the airplane until reach-
ing the first leg of the SID that can be flown by the FMS.
The SID chart, Figure 3-20, is
an example of the portion of DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 >
the procedure that must be RUNWAY RW16L
flown manually or in the SID ELMAA5 >
TRANSITION HQM
heading mode. No reference WAYPOINTS OF SID:
to the GNS-X C129 should ELMAA
be made at this time. The HQM
CDU display, Figure 3-21,
shows the waypoints that < >
would be added to the flight SELECT? ERASE
plan through reference to the
ELMAA5 SID, HQM transi- Figure 3-21
tion from RW16L.
The following procedures allow the pilot to automatically add way-
points stored in the database, as part of a SID, STAR, APPROACH,
or Enroute Airway, to either a Stored or Active Flight Plan. These
procedures provide an abbreviated method of waypoint entry, elimi-
Rev. 3
System Operation
nating the need to enter individual waypoint identifiers for SIDs,

STARs, APPROACHes and Airways.
NOTE: When a SID, STAR, APPROACH or Enroute Airway is
added to an existing flight plan, duplicate waypoints may occur. To
avoid an inconsistent flight plan and resulting map display, it may be
necessary to delete any duplicate waypoints. Depress the d Key to
review the flight plan. Note any inconsistency then depreww the FPL
Key to access the active FPL page where any modifications can be
performed. Also, the routings and coordinates must be verified by
the operator. These procedures must not be used in lieu of charts.
Due to the way the GNS-X C129 database is structured, waypoints
must have unique identifiers. However, some duplicate identifiers
exist for more than one waypoint location. These waypoints are pri-
marily located on APPROACHES, SIDS and STARS. In these cases
the waypoint identifiers are renamed in the database as a 6 character
identifier. Two naming conventions are used, one for four character
identifiers and one for five character identifiers.
Four character waypoints have the first four characters but add the
last two characters of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the fol-
lowing example:
MA11 at KPRC becomes MA11RC in the database.
Five character waypoints have the first five characters but add the
last character of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following
example:
MA27L at KOAK becomes MA27LK in the database.
ENTERING A SID ON THE ACTIVE FPL

NOTE: These procedures may also be used with a stored flight plan.
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to ACTIVE FPL 1/1
<
display Active FPL Page. FR KSEA - KLAX
<
TO KLAX
2. Line Select Key - DE- *****
PRESS to position cur-
sor over the DEPART?
field (Figure 3-22). <
DEPART ?
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS <
ARRIVE ETE >
to display DEPARTURE APPROACH ERASE
Page.
Figure 3-22
4. DEPARTURE Airport
Identifier - VERIFY or INSERT valid ident.
Rev. 3
System Operation
NOTE: If the first waypoint on the Flight Plan is an airport, the

Departure ident prefills and the cursor is positioned over the first SID
identifier on the list.
If the first waypoint on the Flight Plan is a runway, the RUNWAY field
also prefills and the cursor is over the first SID identifier on the list.
If there are no SIDs associated with the Departure Airport, the mes-
sage “NO SIDS AVAILABLE” appears and the ident field flashes.
Depress the FPL Key to
return to the Active Flight DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 >
Plan. RUNWAY ------
SID ------ >
5. Line Select Key - DE- TRANSITION ------
PRESS to position the < BANGR1
cursor over the desired BLUTI1
SID, if required. (Figure ELMAA5?
3-23) SUMMA5

to select SID.
Figure 3-23
NOTE: Cursor moves to the
first TRANSITION identifier
DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1
on the list. The TRANSI- RUNWAY ------
>
TION field is highlighted in SID ELMAA5 >

yellow. TRANSITION ------
CVO
<
7. Line Select Key - HQM ?
DEPRESS to position <
UBG
cursor over the desired
TRANSITION, if required.
(Figure 3-24)
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS Figure 3-24
to select TRANSITION.
DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 >
NOTE: If the SID and
RUNWAY -----
TRANSITION are runway SID ELMAA3 >
dependent, and a runway TRANSITION HQM
has not prefilled, the cursor
moves to the first runway on
the RUNWAY identifier list
and RUNWAY field is high-
lighted in yellow. See Figure
3-25. If runway is not
required, proceed to Step 11. Figure 3-25
Rev. 3
System Operation
9. Line Select Key -

DEPRESS to position DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 >
cursor over the desired RUNWAY RW16L
SID ELMAA3 >
runway. TRANSITION HQM
WAYPOINTS OF SID:
10. ENTER Key - DEPRESS ELMAA
to select RUNWAY. HQM
11. Departure SID Waypoints
>
- REVIEW (Figure 3-26), SELECT? ERASE
then DEPRESS the
ENTER Key to select the
SID and insert it into Figure 3-26
Active Flight Plan. The
display will automatically return to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Page.
NOTE: If SID is added to a stored flight plan this display will return to
the stored flight plan page after SID is selected.
NOTE: SID waypoints appear indented from other waypoints in a
Flight Plan that are not part of a procedure. ( SID, STAR,
APPROACH)
REVIEWING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE

FPL PAGE
DEPRESS to position DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 >
cursor over the DEPART RUNWAY RW16L
SID ELMAA5 >
field on the FLIGHT TRANSITION HQM
PLAN Page. WAYPOINTS OF SID:
ELMAA
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS HQM
to review SID (Figure 3-
27). >
ERASE
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS
to return to Flight Plan
Page. Figure 3-27
NOTE: SELECT will not appear as an option since a SID already

exists in the Flight Plan.
Rev. 0
System Operation
EDITING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL

PAGE
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the DEPART
field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page.
Line Select Key 1 Right RUNWAY RW16L
- Depress once. SID ------ >
TRANSITION HQM
Line Select Key 2 Right ELMAA5?
- Depress twice.
NOTE: Once either a SID,
Runway or Transition is
selected from the list, subse-
quent lists will be narrowed
down to display only those Figure 3-28
items that are compatible
with what has been has
selected. DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 >
RUNWAY RW16L
3. Line Select Key adjacent SID ------ >
to SID field - DEPRESS TRANSITION ------
to position cursor over TOU
the first SID identifier on BLUIT
the list. CVO
HQM ?
4. Line Select Key adjacent UBG
BKE
to the TRANSITION field
- DEPRESS to position
cursor over the current Figure 3-29
TRANSITION waypoint
on the list. (Figure 3-29)
RUNWAY RW16L
DEPRESS to position the SID ------ >
cursor over the desired TRANSITION ------
TRANSITION. (Figure 3- TOU LKV ?
30) BLUIT
CVO
HQM
UBG
BKE
Figure 3-30
Rev. 0
System Operation

to select desired TRAN- DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 >
SITION. The system will RUNWAY RW16L
SID SUMMA5 >
automatically load the TRANSITION LKV
compatible SID associat- WAYPOINTS OF SID:
ed with the selected SUMMA
TRANSITION. (Figure 3- LKV
31)
>
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS SELECT? ERASE
to select a new SID and
insert the new SID into Figure 3-31
the flight plan.
NOTE: The RUNWAY can also be edited without changing the origi-
nal SID if the SID/TRANSITION are compatible. This is done by
pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field. Press
the Line Select Key to position the cursor over the desired RUNWAY.
Press ENTER to load the desired RUNWAY on the SID.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select the edited SID as displayed
and insert it into the flight plan.
NOTE: Depress the d Key to review the waypoints that have been
added. Look carefully at the flight plan to see if any waypoints are out
of sequence. Go to the Active FPL Page by pressing the FPL Key
and delete waypoints as necessary.
ERASING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL

PAGE
1. Line Select Key - DEPARTURE KSEA 1/1 >
DEPRESS to position RUNWAY RW16L
cursor over DEPART SID ELMAA3 >
field on the Flight Plan TRANSITION HQM
Page. WAYPOINTS OF SID:
ELMAA
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. HQM
<
3. Line Select Key - < >

DEPRESS to position ERASE?
cursor over ERASE?
(Figure 3-32). Figure 3-32
to erase SID and return to Flight Plan page.
Rev. 0
System Operation
ADDING OR DELETING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A SID

NOTE: When a SID is modified by adding or deleting waypoints, the
sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a database SID.
To Add a Waypoint
1. Line Select Key - ACTIVE FPL 1/1
<
DEPRESS to position RW16L
cursor over the SID way- <
ELMAA
point identifier that will LKV
follow the new entry on <
KLAX
the Flight Plan page.
See Figure 3-33. <
DEPART
ARRIVE ETE >
2. Waypoint Ident - INSERT. <
APPROACH ERASE
twice. Figure 3-33
NOTE: The previously in-
dented SID waypoints move
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
over one space to the left on <
RW16L - KLAX
the screen and are treated as ELMAA
<
normal waypoints in the HQM
Flight Plan. (Figure 3-34) <
LKV
KLAX
To Delete a Waypoint <
DEPART
4. Line Select Key - <
ARRIVE ETE >
APPROACH ERASE
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the way-
point to be deleted on Figure 3-34
the Flight Plan page.
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The waypoint will be deleted and the
waypoints of the SID will be treated as non-procedure waypoints
in the flight plan.
Rev. 0
System Operation
ENTERING AN AIRWAY FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE

ACTIVE FPL PAGE
Enroute Airways include high altitude and low altitude airways (i.e.
J501, V64, RED7, etc).
<
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
1. Line Select Key - DE- KSEA - KLAX
PRESS to position cursor <
ELMAA
directly over or below the HQM
starting waypoint of the <
KLAX
desired airway on the ******
Flight Plan page. (Figure <
DEPART
3-35) ARRIVE ETA >
<
APPROACH ERASE
2. Airway ident - INSERT.
Use:
Figure 3-35
Option 1 if the destination
waypoint is unknown.
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
<
Option 2 to enter the KSEA - KLAX
known destination way- <
ELMAA
point. HQM
<
#J501
******
Option 1
<
DEPART
a. # Key - DEPRESS, then ARRIVE ETA>
<
enter the airway identifi- APPROACH ERASE
er. (Figure 3-36)
b. ENTER Key - DE-PRESS. Figure 3-36
(Figure 3-37)
NOTE: If the waypoint above AIRWAY J501 1/2 >
<
the cursor is not a waypoint on RZS TO HQM ?
ZONAL HQM31
the selected airway, the air- <
BSR TOU
>
way identifier will blink. The PESCA FINGS

< >
appropriate airway or waypoint PYE ZESNB
identifier must be entered. NIECE CAFTA >
<
COPPO YZP
The Flight Plan should always <
OED MOCA1 >
be checked for duplicate way- SELECT ENDING WPT
points and the appropriate
waypoints deleted. Figure 3-37
c. Line Select Key -
DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired destination way-
point. (Figure 3-38). If applicable, use PRV and NXT Keys to
Rev. 0
System Operation
access all airway way-

AIRWAY J501 1/2
points pages. < >
TO RZS ? FR HQM
NOTE: As the cursor is <
ZONAL HQM31 >
moved up or down, “TO” will BSR TOU
PESCA FINGS
appear next to the cursor <
PYE ZESNB
>
and a question mark will fol- NIECE CAFTA

< >
low the ident. The waypoints COPPO YZP
between the TO/FROM way- <
OED MOCA1 >
points will be displayed in SELECT ENDING WPT
yellow.
d. After selecting the end- Figure 3-38
ing waypoint (TO) on
the Airway, depress the ENTER Key to merge the Airway way-
points into the flight plan and return to the FPL Page.
NOTE: If inserting the airway segment into the Flight Plan results in
more than 50 waypoints in the stored Flight Plan or 100 waypoints on
the Active Flight Plan, the message “FPL FULL” will appear.
NOTE: Depress the d Key
to review the waypoints that ACTIVE FPL 1/1
<
have been added. Look care- KSEA - KLAX
fully at the flight plan to see if <
ELMAA
any waypoints are out of HQM
#J501+RZS
sequence. Go to the Active <
******
FPL Page by pressing the
<
FPL Key and delete way- DEPART
points as necessary. <
ARRIVE ETA >
APPROACH ERASE
Option 2
Figure 3-39
a. # Key - DEPRESS
then enter the airway
identifier. <
AIRWAY J501 3/3 >
FR HQM TO RZS ?
b. ± Key - DEPRESS <
OED
and type destination COPPO
waypoint. (Figure 3- <
NIECE
PYE
39)
<
PESCA
c. ENTER Key - DE- BSR
ZONAL
PRESS. (Figure 3-40) SELECT ENDING WPT
Figure 3-40
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: If the waypoint above or in the cursor is not a waypoint on

the selected airway, the airway identifier will blink and the appropriate
airway or waypoint identifier must be entered. If the destination way-
point is not on the airway, the system reverts to Option 1.
d. To change ending waypoint, use the Line Select Key to posi-
tion cursor over a different destination waypoint. If applica-
ble, use PRV and NXT Keys to access all airway waypoint
pages.
NOTE: As the cursor is moved up or down, “TO” will appear next to
the cursor and a question mark will follow the ident. Waypoints
between the TO/FR waypoints will be displayed in yellow.
to merge the airway <
ACTIVE FPL 2/3
waypoints into the Flight RYE
<
PESCA
Plan and return to the BSR
Flight Plan Page. ZONAL
<
(Figure 3-41) RZS
<
KLAX
NOTE: If inserting the air- DEPART
way segment into the Flight <
ARRIVE ETA >
Plan results in more than 50 APPROACH ERASE
waypoints in the stored
Flight Plan or 100 waypoints Figure 3-41
on the Active Flight Plan, the
message “FPL FULL” will appear.
4. If applicable, enter additional airway identifiers to chain several
airways together.
EDITING AN AIRWAY
Once an airway is merged into the flight plan, waypoints can be
added to or deleted from the flight plan on the Flight Plan Page using
normal edit procedures.
To add or delete waypoints from a selected segment of the airway,
perform the following:
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over an airway
waypoint on the Flight Plan page.
2. # Key - DEPRESS then enter the appropriate airway identifier.
Rev. 0
System Operation

(Figure 3-42) <
AIRWAY J501 3/3 >
FR HQM
OED
DEPRESS to move the NIECE
PYE
cursor to shorten or <
BSR
lengthen the previously ZONAL
<
selected segment of the TO RZS ?
airway. If applicable,
use PRV and NXT Keys
to access all airway way-
point pages. Figure 3-42
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to merge the edited airway segment
into the Flight Plan and return to the Flight Plan Page.
ENTERING A STAR OR PROFILE DESCENT ON ANY STORED

FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
cursor over ARRIVE? KSEA - KLAX
KLAX
field on the Flight Plan <
******
page (Figure 3-43).
<
to display ARRIVAL DEPART
Page (Figure 3-44). <
ARRIVE? ETA >
APPROACH ERASE
3. ARRIVAL Airport
Identifier - VERIFY or Figure 3-43
INSERT valid identifier.
If unsure of the transi-
tion, use Line Select Key <
ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 >
1 Right or2 Right to RUNWAY -----
select the runway or <
TRANSITION ----- >
STAR -----
STAR list. CIVET? EHF >
<
HEL LHS
NOTE: If the last waypoint PGS PMD >
on the Flight Plan is an air- <
TNP PTV
port and an Approach is pro- <
FIM FICKY >
grammed, the ARRIVAL air- JLI GOATZ
port identifier prefills and the
cursor is over the first Figure 3-44
TRANSITION waypoint on
the list.
Rev. 0
System Operation
If the last waypoint on the Flight Plan is a runway, the RUNWAY field
also prefills and the cursor is over the first TRANSITION waypoint on
the list.
If there are no STARs associated with the Arrival Airport, the mes-
sage “NO STARS AVAILABLE” appears and the arrival airport ident
field flashes. Depress FPL Key to return to ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN.
4. NXT Key - DEPRESS to
view waypoints on sub- ARRIVAL KLAX 2/2 >
sequent pages if desired. RUNWAY -----
TRANSITION ----- >
5. Line Select Key - STAR -----
MALIT ELKEY>
ROSIN RZS
AVE ? VTU >
TRANSITION waypoint. <
DERBB
(Figure 3-45) DINTY
< >
MUDDE
to select TRANSITION.
Figure 3-45
NOTE: The STAR field
turns yellow and the cursor is over the first identifier on the STAR list.
ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1
DEPRESS to position RUNWAY -----
>
cursor over the desired TRANSITION AVE >

STAR. See Figure 3-46. STAR -----
MOOR3 ?
8. ENTER Key - DE- SADDE4
PRESS to select STAR.
NOTE: If the STAR and
TRANSITION are runway
dependent, and a runway
has not prefilled, the cursor Figure 3-46
moves to the first RUNWAY
identifier on the runway list and the runway field is displayed in yel-
low. If a runway is not required, proceed to Step 11.
9. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired
RUNWAY on the runway list.
10. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select RUNWAY.
Rev. 0
System Operation
11. Arrival STAR Waypoints

- REVIEW (Figure 3-47), ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 >
then DEPRESS ENTER RUNWAY -----
Key to insert STAR into TRANSITION AVE >
STAR MOOR3
Active Flight Plan and WAYPOINTS OF STAR:
return to the ACTIVE AVE FIM
FLIGHT PLAN Page. DERBB PAULA
REYES ILEAN
NOTE: Look carefully at the PIRUE WAKER >
flight plan to see if any way- SELECT? ERASE
points are out of sequence.
Delete waypoints as neces- Figure 3-47
sary.
STAR waypoints appear indented from the other waypoints on a
Flight Plan that are not part of a procedure. (SID, STAR, or
APPROACH)
REVIEWING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE

FPL PAGE
DEPRESS to position ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 >
cursor over the ARRIVE RUNWAY -----
TRANSITION AVE >
field on the FLIGHT
STAR MOOR3
PLAN Page. WAYPOINTS OF STAR:
AVE FIM
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS DERBB PAULA
to review STAR. (Figure REYES ILEAN
3-48) PIRUE WAKER >
ERASE
to return to FLIGHT
PLAN Page. Figure 3-48
NOTE: SELECT will not appear as an option since a STAR already

exists in the Flight Plan.
EDITING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE

1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the ARRIVE
3. Line Select Key 2R - DEPRESS twice to position the cursor over
the STAR field. This will erase the current TRANSITION.
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: A list will appear with other available STARs.

4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired
STAR.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select desired STAR.
NOTE: Cursor moves to the first waypoint of the TRANSITION list
and the TRANSITION field is displayed in yellow.
desired transition waypoint.
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select the TRANSITION. If the
STAR is not runway dependent proceed to Step 10.
desired runway on the RUNWAY list.
NOTE: The RUNWAY can also be edited without changing the origi-
nal SID if the SID/TRANSITION are compatible. This is done by
pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field. Position
the cursor over the desired RUNWAY. Press ENTER to load the
desired RUNWAY on the SID.
9. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select the RUNWAY.
10. Arrival STAR Waypoints - REVIEW, then DEPRESS ENTER Key
to insert STAR into Active Flight Plan and return to the ACTIVE
FLIGHT PLAN Page.
ERASING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE

DEPRESS to position ARRIVAL KLAX 1/1 >
cursor over ARRIVE field RUNWAY -----
on the FLIGHT PLAN TRANSITION AVE >
Page. STAR MOOR3
WAYPOINTS OF STAR:
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. AVE FIM
DERBB PAULA
3. Line Select Key - REYES ILEAN
DEPRESS to position PIRUE WAKER >
cursor over ERASE? ERASE?
(Figure 3-49)
to erase STAR and
return to FLIGHT PLAN Page.
Rev. 0
System Operation
ADDING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A STAR

NOTE: When a STAR is modified by adding or deleting waypoints, the
sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a database STAR.
The following may be accomplished from any stored flight plan or the
ACTIVE FPL Page.
ACTIVE FPL 2/3
DEPRESS to position REYES
cursor over the STAR <
PIRUE
waypoint identifier that FIM
PAULA
will follow the new entry <
ILEAN
on the Flight Plan page. WAKER
<
(Figure 3-50) DEPART
<
ARRIVE ETA >
2. Waypoint Ident - INSERT. APPROACH ERASE
twice. Figure 3-50
NOTE: The previously
indented STAR waypoints <
ACTIVE FPL 2/3
move over one space to the REYES
left on the screen and are <
PIRUE
FIM
treated as normal waypoints
<
EHF
in the Flight Plan. (Figure 3- PAULA
51) ILEAN
<
DEPART
ARRIVE ETA >
DELETING WAYPOINTS <
APPROACH ERASE
OF A STAR
1. Line Select Key - Figure 3-51
DEPRESS to position
cursor over the STAR waypoint identifier to be deleted on the
Flight Plan page.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The waypoint will be erased and the
waypoints of the STAR will move left one space. These way-
points will be treated as non-procedure waypoints in the flight
plan.
Rev. 0
System Operation
ENTERING AN APPROACH ON A STORED FPL OR THE

ACTIVE FPL PAGE
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
KORD - KEWK
DEPRESS to position cur- PNT
<
sor over APPROACH? CAP
field on the ACTIVE FPL <
KEWK
page. (Figure 3-52)
<
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS DEPART
to display APPROACH <
ARRIVE ETA >
Page. (Figure 3-53) APPROACH? ERASE
3. APPROACH Airport
Figure 3-52
identifier - VERIFY or
INSERT valid ident. If
APCH KEWK 1/1
the airport identifier was >
RUNWAY ------
entered on the FPL TYPE ------ >
page, the system will TRANSITION ------
default to the runway list RW17 ?
with the cursor over the RW35
first runway in the list. RW06
RW24
NOTE: If there are no
APPROACHes associated
with the Approach Airport,
the message “NO Figure 3-53
APPROACH AVAIL”
appears and the airport ident APCH KEWK 1/1
field flashes. Depress FPL RUNWAY ------
>
Key to return to Active Flight TYPE ------ >

Plan. TRANSITION ------
<
RW17
4. Line Select Key - RW35 ?
DEPRESS to position RW06
cursor over the desired RW24
RUNWAY on the run-
way list, if required.
(Figure 3-54)
Figure 3-54
NOTE: If a CIRCLING Type
Approach is desired, go to step 6.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select RUNWAY. If a valid runway
has been selected, the cursor moves to the first approach TYPE.
6. Line Select Key- DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired
Approach TYPE if required. To access a CIRCLING type
Rev. 0
System Operation
approach the runway field must be dashes ----. Use Line Select
1 Right to change the runway field to dashes if required. Press
Line Select 2 right to view the type list.
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select Approach TYPE. (Figure 3-55)
NOTE: If there is only one APPROACH KEWK 1/1 >
type of approach available RUNWAY RW35
the system automatically TYPE ------ >
loads the approach TYPE TRANSITION ------
and the cursor moves over NDB ?
<
RNAV
the WPT in the transition list.
Go to Step 8.
NOTE: If the runway select-
ed on the Approach Page
differs from the runway dic-
tated by the STAR, “SEL Figure 3-55
RWY FROM STAR PG” is
displayed at the bottom of APPROACH KEWK 1/1 >
the screen. RUNWAY RW35
TYPE NDB >
8. Line Select Key - TRANSITION ------
DEPRESS to position COBUS ?
<
cursor over the desired PNE
TRANSITION if required.
(Figure 3-56) If there is
only one transition for
the desired approach the
system automatically
loads the transition and Figure 3-56
the WPTs of the
approach are displayed. Go to step 10.
9. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select TRANSITION.
The system will identify the following waypoints of an approach:
IAF - Indicates the initial approach fix.
ARC - DME Arc end point.
PT - A Procedure Turn will commence at that waypoint.
HP - A Holding Pattern is programmed at that waypoint.
FCF - Final Approach Course Alignment Fix
FAF - The Final Approach Fix.
MAP - The Missed Approach Point.
Rev. 0
System Operation
10. Approach Waypoints -

APCH KEWK 1/1
REVIEW (Figure 3-57), >
RUNWAY RW35
then DEPRESS ENTER
TYPE NDB >
Key to select the TRANSITION WAIVE
Approach and insert WPTS OF APPROACH:
<
APPROACH into Active IAF WAIVE MAP RW17
Flight Plan. The display CANB ++++++
will return to the ACTIVE PT CANB HP CANB
CANB
FLIGHT PLAN Page.
SELECT? ERASE
REVIEWING AN
APPROACH FROM A Figure 3-57
STORED FPL OR THE
ACTIVE FPL PAGE
1. Line Select Key - APCH KEWK 1/1 >
DEPRESS to position cur- RUNWAY RW35
sor over the APPROACH TYPE NDB >
TRANSITION COBUS
field on the FLIGHT PLAN WPTS OF APPROACH:
<
Page. IAF WAIVE MAP RW17
CANB ++++++
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS PT CANB HP CANB
to review APPROACH CANB
(Figure 3-58) SELECT? ERASE
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS to

return to FLIGHT PLAN Figure 3-58
Page.
NOTE: SELECT will not appear as an option since an APPROACH
already exists in the Flight Plan.
EDITING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE

FPL PAGE
1. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the APPROACH
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to display APPROACH Page.
The RUNWAY, TYPE, or TRANSITION may be edited by pressing the
Line Select Key next to the field to be edited. That field will turn from
green to yellow and the previous information will turn to dashes. Alternate
options may be available depending on the information in the remaining
two fields.
The most efficient way to edit an approach procedure is to change the
RUNWAY, TYPE, and TRANSITION fields to dashes (------).
Rev. 0
System Operation
1. Line Select Key (1R)(adjacent to RUNWAY field) - DEPRESS to

change the field to dashes.
2. Line Select Key (2R)(adjacent to TYPE and TRANSITION fields)
- DEPRESS to change the field to dashes.
Using the same Line Select Keys, obtain a complete list of RUN-
WAYS, TYPES, and TRANSITIONS. Use the appropriate Line
Select Keys to select the desired data from each list.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to enter the selected data from each list.
When all the fields have been filled.
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select the new approach data, insert
it into the flight plan, and return to the Flight Plan Page.
NOTE: Depress the d Key to review the waypoints. Look carefully
at the flight plan to see if any waypoints are out of sequence. Go to
the Active FPL Page by pressing the FPL Key and delete waypoints
as necessary.
When an APPROACH is modified by adding or deleting waypoints
the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a database
APPROACH and the system will not enter the Approach Mode. An
APPROACH CANCELED message will be displayed anytime a way-
point is deleted, added to an approach procedure on the Active Flight
Plan, or when a Direct To the MAP is initiated..
ERASING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE

ACTIVE FPL
NOTE: Erasing an Approach also erases the current destination air-
port identifier. This procedure should be used when an approach at
a different airport is desired.
1. Line Select Key - DE- APCH KEWK 1/1
PRESS to position cur- >
RUNWAY RW35
sor over APPROACH TYPE NDB >
field on the FLIGHT TRANSITION COBUS
PLAN Page. <
WPTS OF APPROACH:
IAF WAIVE MAP RW17
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS CANB ++++++
to display APPROACH PT CANB HP CANB
Page. CANB
SELECT? ERASE
3. Line Select Key - DE-
PRESS to position cursor Figure 3-59
over ERASE? (Figure 3-59)
Rev. 0
System Operation
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to erase APPROACH and return to the

FLIGHT PLAN Page.
DELETING AN APPROACH WAYPOINT

1. Display the appropriate FPL Page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the
APPROACH waypoint identifier to be deleted.
cent to the waypoint.
NOTE: When an APPROACH is modified by adding or deleting way-
points (including waypoints between the “fence” and the Missed
Approach Procedure waypoint), the sequence of waypoints is no
longer identified as a database APPROACH and the system will not
enter the Approach Mode. An (APPROACH CANCELED) message
will be displayed anytime a waypoint is deleted or added to an
APPROACH procedure on the Active Flight Plan.
NOTE: Anytime a Direct To the MAP is performed and an approach
is either armed or active, an APPROACH CANCELED message will
appear. The approach functions will be disabled and the CDI scaling
will return to the TERMINAL sensitivity of 1NM full scale deflection.
USING A STAR AND AN APPROACH IN THE SAME FLIGHT PLAN

Since both the Arrival (STAR) and Approach procedures allow for
entry of AIRPORT and RUNWAY, the following rules apply.
• Changing the AIRPORT on the ARRIVAL Page, and selecting an
associated STAR, automatically erases the APPROACH procedure.
• Changing the AIRPORT on the APPROACH Page, and selecting an
associated Approach, automatically erases the STAR procedure.
• Changing the RUNWAY on the ARRIVAL Page, and selecting it,
automatically erases the APPROACH procedure.
• Changing the RUNWAY on the APPROACH Page, and selecting it,
has no effect on the STAR procedure unless the STAR is runway
dependent.
If the STAR is runway dependent, the message “SEL RWY FROM
STAR PG” (Select RUNWAY from STAR Page) appears on the
APPROACH Page. The pilot must return to the ARRIVAL Page to
Rev. 0
System Operation
change the RUNWAY for the STAR, before changing the RUNWAY
on the APPROACH Page.
SELECTING A COMPANY ROUTE AND ADDING IT TO THE

ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
1. Display the COMPANY ROUTES Page (automatically after ini-
tialization, or by paging the FPL pages).
NOTE: If the data base contains company routes, the first page dis-
played after system initializa-
tion will be the COMPANY COMPANY ROUTES 1/1
ROUTES page in lieu of the
ORIGIN KCOF >
FLIGHT PLAN LIST page. If DESTINATION ------
both AFIS and Company VIA ------ >
Routes are present, the
COMPANY ROUTES page <
R#---
is displayed first.
NOTE: Typically, the COM-
PANY ROUTES page will
display the location entered Figure 3-59a
on the initialization page (if
available) in the Origin field, COMPANY ROUTES 1/1
with the cursor over both the
Origin and Destination field, ORIGIN KCOF >
ready for entry of the DESTINATION ------
VIA ------
Destination. >
R#---
2. Line Select Key LSR2 - If <
you desire to change the

Origin entry, DEPRESS to
position cursor over only
ORIGIN field on the COM- Figure 3-59b
PANY ROUTES page,
and type in desired identi- COMPANY ROUTES 1/1
fier. (Figure 3-59a) If the
cursor is over both fields, ORIGIN KCOF >
and the Origin is correct, DESTINATION KEFD
proceed to the next step. VIA ------ >
(Figure 3-59b)
<
R#---
3. DESTINATION identifier
- VERIFY or INSERT
valid ident. (Figure 3-
59b) Figure 3-59c
Rev. 2
Aug/00 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-36.1
System Operation

COMPANY ROUTES 1/1
(Figure 3-59c) If the pair is
valid and has only one
ORIGIN KCOF >
VIA, the ACTIVE FLIGHT DESTINATION KSMX
PLAN page is now dis- VIA ------ >
played with the waypoints
of the pair added. <
R#---
NOTE: If the pair is not

valid, the COMPANY ROUTE NOT FOUND
ROUTES page will remain,
and a ROUTE NOT FOUND Figure 3-59d
message will be displayed. COMPANY ROUTES 1/1
(Figure 3-59d) If the route is
valid, but the Active FPL is ORIGIN KCOF >
full, an ACTIVE FPL FULL DESTINATION KEFD
message is displayed. VIA LAL >
(Figure 3-59e) A WPT MEM
R#017
FULL MESSAGE will be dis- <
played if the waypoint mem-

ory is full. ACTIVE FPL FULL
NOTE: The Company Figure 3-59e
Route can be selected either
by the preceding method COMPANY ROUTES 1/1
using an Origin/Destination
city pair, or by selecting LSK ORIGIN KCOF >
L4 and entering the route DESTINATION KSMY
number. VIA COVIA? >
5. If the selected city pair <

R#018
has more than one VIA,
the first one will be dis-
played. (Figure 3-59f)
Figure 3-59f
6. Use the PREV, NEXT, or
BACK keys to scroll COMPANY ROUTES 1/1
through the list of VIAs
(Figure 3-59g) ORIGIN KCOF >
DESTINATION KSMY
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. VIA TLH? >
The ACTIVE FLIGHT
PLAN page is now dis- <
R#019
played with the waypoints
of the pair added.
Figure 3-59g
Rev. 2
3-36.2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Aug/00
System Operation
Note: In order to execute approaches with a specific aircraft installa-

tion, the installation must meet the standards set forth by the govern-
ing certification agency. Consult the Aircraft Flight Manual
Supplement for specific limitations.
Rev. 1
Aug/97 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System 3-36.3
System Operation
EXECUTING APPROACHES
WARNING: When entering PTs or HP airspace at high speed the
FMS may not constrain the airplane from violating maneuvering
airspace. Pilots are responsible for procedural compliance.
When the aircraft is within 30NM of the airport, the system will go into
the Approach Armed mode. The CDI sensitivity will change from
5.0NM full scale deflection to 1.0NM full scale deflection. At this point
the aircraft may bank slightly due to increased roll steering gains.
Anytime the TO waypoint is part of an Approach Procedure, the SXTK
field is disabled so that no parallel course can be entered.
The system is capable of executing GPS, GPS Overlay NDB, RNAV,
CIRCLING, and VOR approaches only. No LOC, ILS or MLS capabili-
ty is available.
If RAIM is not available at 2NM from the FAF, an APPROACH WARN
message will appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. Also, the
HSI flag will be set invalid. At this point the appropriate missed
approach procedures should be executed. The system will remain in
the Approach Mode and the discrete APPROACH annunciator will
remain illuminated until the HSI is set valid. To set the HSI valid, can-
cel the Approach on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page by pressing the
ENTER Key.
The system will not display any interim waypoints between the FAF
and the MAP, even though a waypoint may be shown on the approach
plate. The system may not give vertical guidance to the interim
waypoint. Pilots are responsible for procedural compliance.
NOTE: If the MAP is abeam or beyond the threshold, or the approach
is a circling approach, no altitude constraints will be displayed at the
MAP from the database. Constraints may be entered manually.
When the Approach is flown, the system will provide guidance along
the final approach course to the Missed Approach Point.
When initially executing a missed approach procedure, use the
FMS Heading Mode or manually fly the procedure to ensure prop-
er track and turn direction.
NOTE: A “fence” (++++++) separates the Missed Approach
Procedure waypoint from the MAP, the last waypoint of the Approach.
No Auto Leg change (waypoint sequencing) will occur to waypoints
beyond the “fence” (++++++) once the airplane passes the MAP.
Rev. 1
System Operation
At the MAP the pilot must manually or via the HDG Mode maneuver
the aircraft to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint. If, after the
missed approach, an approach at a different airport is desired, erase
the current approach procedure before selecting a procedure at the
new airport. This will insure proper waypoint sequencing on the
Active Flight Plan.
LOADING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS until
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
the ACTIVE FPL Page <
KEED - KPRC
appears. (Figure 3-60) EED
<
DRK
2. Line Select Key - KPRC
<
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over APP-
<
ROACH? DEPART
<
ARRIVE ETA >
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. APPROACH? ERASE
APPROACH page is now
displayed. (Figure 3-61) Figure 3-60
4. Airport Identifier -
INSERT or VERIFY. APCH KPRC 1/1 >
RUNWAY ------
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS TYPE ------ >
twice, if required, to dis- TRANSITION ------
play runway list if not RW21L?
already displayed. RW11
If a circling type approach is

desired:
Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position cursor over TYPE. Figure 3-61
ENTER Key - DEPRESS to display the TYPE list. Proceed to Step 10.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired runway.
8. TYPE - SELECT if required.
10. TRANSITION - SELECT if required.
Rev. 0
System Operation
12. Approach Waypoints - REVIEW.

13. ENTER Key - DEPRESS ACTIVE FPL Page is displayed. VER-
IFY the approach appears as selected.
14. Waypoint Sequencing - Edit, if required, based on assigned route.
EXECUTING A GPS/GPS OVERLAY APPROACH

NOTE: To fly a full procedure DME ARC or Procedure Turn, either
coupled or using own navigation, follow the FMS and
EFIS/Instrument displays.
USING RADAR VECTORS TO FINAL APPROACH COURSE

1. FPL key - DEPRESS to
display the ACTIVE FPL <
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
Page. (Figure 3-62) KEED - KPRC
<
EED
2. Approach and Waypoint DRK
Sequencing - VERIFY <
KPRC
they appear as selected.
<
3. MSG Key - VERIFY DEPART
approach is armed within <
ARRIVE ETA >
APPROACH? ERASE
30NM of the airport and
the HSI scaling output
has changed to TRMNL Figure 3-62
on NAVIGATION Page 2.
4. FMS Mode - SELECT or HEADING VECTOR 1/1
VERIFY the appropriate
mode for guidance if <
HDG 155
required.
CANCEL
5. Flight Director or
Autopilot - ENGAGE the TO DRK DTK 197
appropriate mode if
required. ENTER HDG
6. HDG Key - DEPRESS to
display the HEADING Figure 3-63
VECTOR Page. (Figure
3-63)
7. Heading - INSERT as assigned by ATC.
Rev. 0
System Operation

HEADING VECTOR 1/1
twice to engage Heading
Select mode. (Figure 3- HDG 155
<
64)
<
HDG SELECT ?
After receiving the final
TO DRK DTK 197
intercept vector from < >
ATC:
OK? ENTER
display the HEADING
Figure 3-64
3-65)
10. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. HEADING VECTOR 1/1
11. BACK Key - DEPRESS <

HDG 155
to display INTERCEPT? INTERCEPT ?
<
12. ENTER Key - DEPRESS FAF
TO DRK DTK 125
cursor moves to the TO < >
field.
OK? ENTER
13. BACK Key - If Required,
DEPRESS until the FAF
Figure 3-65
waypoint is displayed.
NOTE: There may be more than one waypoint on the FPL with the
same identifier as the FAF. After completing step 16, insure that the
FAF waypoint has been selected with the BACK Key by going to the
d Page and noting that the cursor is over the FAF waypoint.
14. ENTER Key - DEPRESS cursor moves to the DTK field.
15. Final Approach Course - INSERT if a Procedure Turn type
approach or VERIFY if any other type approach.
16. ENTER Key - DEPRESS twice.
17. CDI Display - VERIFY the HSI course needle slews to the final
approach course or manually select the course.
18. Approach Annunciator - When over the FAF, VERIFY annuncia-
tion and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVI-
GATION Page 2.
Rev. 2
System Operation
USING OWN NAVIGATION - NO DME ARC

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
<
EED
KPRC
<
3. MSG Key - VERIFY DEPART
ARRIVE ETA >
APPROACH? ERASE
the HSI scaling output
has changed to TRMNL Figure 3-66
on NAVIGATION Page 2.
4. FMS Mode - SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guid-
ance.
5. Flight Director or Autopilot - ENGAGE the appropriate mode.
6. Waypoints and HSI Course - VERIFY proper sequencing during
the approach.
GATION Page 2.
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
PROCEDURE TURN DIRECT 13:48
<
PT DRK ALT ?
>
The following is a brief NX PT OVERFLY TO 305
description of the screen dis- DIS 0.2
plays typically seen while ETE 00:00.0
executing a Procedure Turn. DTK 301
>
GS 150
As the aircraft approaches WIND ---/--- >
the PT waypoint, a message -AUTO-
is displayed on the fourth line
of the CDU indicating the Figure 3-67
next action the aircraft will
take. This message is displayed 30 seconds prior to the event and
disappears when the action is initiated. Figure 3-67 indicates the air-
craft is flying DIRECT to DRK where a Procedure Turn (PT) will take
place. Line four indicates the aircraft will turn to a heading of 305°
upon reaching DRK. While flying the Procedure Turn, the TO DRK
will change to TO INTCPT. When the Procedure Turn is completed,
and the aircraft is inbound, the TO INTCPT field changes to TO (the
FAF).
Rev. 2
System Operation
NOTE: When flying the approach on a transition that specifies NoPT

and a “PT” waypoint is depicted on the flight plan, once established
on the inbound course it will be necessary to do a DIRECT TO the
FAF waypoint to avoid flying the Procedure Turn.
NOTE: When a Procedure NAVIGATION 1/4
Turn is initiated, the out- PROCEDURE TURN
bound course is displayed <
TO INTCPT ----- >
on the NAVIGATION 1 NX RIGHT TO 350
Page. If the course arrow DIS (1.3) 14.7
does not automatically slew ETE 00:05.9
INBOUND CRS 125
to the outbound course, it >
GS 150
must be manually set to the WIND ---/--- >
outbound course so that the -AUTO-
CDI sensing is correct.
Figure 3-68 indicates a right Figure 3-68
turn to 350° is upcoming.
See the following diagram and Figures 3-70 through 3-73 as the air-
craft sequences through the turn.
Arc (IAF)
DME PT
10 No
00
90
DILLY
349°
5757'
10
170°
65
.0
3-71
00
3-70
350°
No rc
PT
9000 ME A
6310'
12
3-68
5°
10 D
(IAF)
3-72
30
D
5°
114.1 DRK
(IAF) 259°
3-73
12
3-67
5°
7640' D3.9
6220 '
Rev. 2
System Operation
NAVIGATION 1/4
PROCEDURE TURN
<
TO INTCPT ----- >
NX LEFT INTCPT 170
DIS (2.5) 12.9
ETE 00:04.8
DTK 350
>
GS 150
WIND ---/--- >
Figure 3-70
NAVIGATION 1/4
PROCEDURE TURN
<
TO INTCPT ----- >
NX LEFT INTRCPT 125
DIS (5.2) 6.3
ETE 00:02.5
INBOUND CRS 125 >
GS 150
WIND ---/--- >
Figure 3-71
NAVIGATION 1/4
PROCEDURE TURN
TO DRK -----
< >
NX MA11RC
DIS (4) 7.8
ETE 00:03.1
DTK (125) 125
>
GS 150
WIND ---/--- >
Figure 3-72
NAVIGATION 1/4
FR DRK 11:45
<
TO MA11RC 5083G >
DIS 2.5
ETE 00:00.7
DTK 125
>
GS 199
WIND ---/--- >
Figure 3-73
Rev. 2
System Operation
NOTE: If aircraft is configured for dual systems no XFILL? prompt

will be displayed during a PT even if dissimilar data exists in each
system.
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE) that is displayed after crossing the
IAF on the procedure turn is the time from the aircraft’s present posi-
tion to where the airplane intercepts the final approach course
inbound (INTCPT). After crossing this intercept point, the ETE shown
will be from the airplane’s present position to the FAF.
DIS that is displayed after crossing the IAF on the procedure turn is
the distance from the aircraft’s present position to where the airplane
intercepts the final approach course inbound (INTCPT). The DIS
shown in parentheses is the straight-line distance from the aircraft’s
present position to the procedure turn fix.
NOTE: The bearing and distance are with respect to the procedure
turn fix.
After crossing this intercept point the DIS shown will be from the air-
plane’s present position to the FAF and the DIS in parentheses will
be removed. TO the FAF will be displayed at this time having
changed from TO INTCPT on NAV Page1.
USING RADAR VECTORS TO INTERCEPT A DME ARC

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
<
EED
KPRC

<
DEPART
3. MSG Key - VERIFY ARRIVE ETA >
<
approach is armed within APPROACH? ERASE
the HSI scaling output Figure 3-74
has changed to TRMNL
on NAVIGATION Page
2.
ance.
Rev. 2
System Operation

display the HEADING HEADING VECTOR 1/1
<
HDG 080
3-75)
CANCEL
7. Heading - INSERT as
assigned by ATC. TO DRK DTK 080
twice to engage HDG ENTER HDG
SELECT mode.
Figure 3-75
After receiving ARC intercept vector from ATC:

9. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display the HEADING VECTOR Page.
10. Heading - INSERT. HEADING VECTOR 1/1
<
HDG 205
INTERCEPT ?
to display INTERCEPT? <
ARC
(Figure 3-76) TO DILLY DTK 011
< >
cursor moves to the TO
field.
14. BACK Key - DEPRESS Figure 3-76
until the ARC End/Final
Approach Course Way-point is displayed.
NOTE: If an intermediate waypoint exists on the ARC between the
ARC beginning point and the ARC end point, the ARC intercept point
should be approximated so it can be determined whether the ARC end
or intermediate waypoint should be used as the TO waypoint. NO
ARC INTERCEPT may be displayed if the wrong waypoint is selected.
15. ENTER Key - DEPRESS twice (accepts the default DTK).
16. CDI Display - VERIFY course needle is set to the DTK shown on
the HEADING VECTOR Page.
the approach.
GATION Page 2.
Rev. 2
System Operation
USING OWN NAVIGATION TO FLY DME ARC

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL Page. (Figure
3-77)
<
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
2. Approach and Waypoint KEED - KPRC
EED
they appear as selected. DRK
<
KPRC
3. MSG Key - VERIFY
DEPART
30NM of the airport and ARRIVE ETA >
<
the HSI scaling output APPROACH? ERASE
has changed to TRMNL
on NAVIGATION Page 2. Figure 3-77
ance.
the approach.
GATION Page 2.
The following is a brief description of the screen displays typically
seen flying a DME Arc.
NOTE: Certain EFIS map displays do not support curved lines to
draw DME Arcs. In this case the map will only display waypoints up
to and including the IAF waypoint at the beginning of the arc. No
waypoints will be displayed while on the arc. Once the aircraft has
passed the arc end waypoint, the map will display the remaining
waypoints of the active flight plan. Although no waypoints will be dis-
played during the DME Arc
Procedure, the FMS page <
NAVIGATION 1/4
displays will be as depicted DIRECT 11:47
AR D259J 11:53 >
in Figures 3-78 through 3-82. <
NOTE: If aircraft is config- DIS 16.6

ETE 00:005.4
ured for dual systems no DTK 265
XFILL? prompt will be dis- >
GS 201
played during a DME ARC WIND ---/--- >
procedure even if dissimilar -AUTO-
data exists in each system.
Figure 3-78
Rev. 2
System Operation
As the aircraft approaches

the AR waypoint, a message <
NAVIGATION 1/4
DIRECT 11:47
is displayed on the fourth line AR D259J 11:53
< >
of the CDU indicating the NX DMEARC 355
next action the aircraft will DIS 2.7
take (NX DME ARC). This ETE 00:001.0
DTK 239
message is displayed thirty >
GS 150
seconds prior to the event WIND ---/--- >
and disappears when the -AUTO-
action is initiated. Figure 3-
78 indicates the aircraft is fly- Figure 3-79
NAVIGATION 1/4 ing DIRECT to D259J where

DMEARC the aircraft will begin flying a
<
TO DILLY 9000A DME Arc (AR).
>
DIS (ARC 10.0) 7.0 Figure 3-79 shows the air-

ETE 00:03.0
DTK 355 craft is within thirty seconds
GS 150 of intercepting the DME Arc
WIND ---/--- at D259J.
>
Figure 3-80
NAVIGATION 1/4
NOTE: The naming conven- DMEARC
tion for ARC waypoints is as <
TO DILLY 9000A >
follows: D indicates DME. NX DRK 12:02
259 indicates the radial from DIS (10) 2.0
ETE 00:00.7
the ARC center NAVAID. J DTK (125) 029
indicates the ARC distance GS 150
(i.e. A=1nm J=10nm). WIND ---/--- >
-AUTO-
Figure 3-80 shows the air-
craft is flying the DME Arc to Figure 3-81
DILLY. (ARC 10.0) in the
DIS field indicates the arc center is 10.0 NM from the aircraft’s pre-
sent position.
NAVIGATION 1/4
FR DILLY 11:59 See Figures 3-78 through 3-
<
TO DRK 6500G >
82 as the aircraft sequences
through the procedure.
DIS 9.5
ETE 00:03.8 NOTE: Distance (DIS) dis-
DTK 125 played is the distance from
GS 149 the present aircraft position
WIND ---/--- > to the TO waypoint.
Figure 3-82
Rev. 2
System Operation
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE) is the time around the arc path to the
TO waypoint.
Use one of the following options to sequence to the missed approach
waypoint.
OPTION 1, Direct To the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint
1. d Key - DEPRESS. The DIRECT Page will be displayed.
Missed Approach Procedure waypoint, if required.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to sequence to the Missed Approach
Procedure waypoint.
NOTE: If the direction the airplane will turn is in question and the turn
direction may not be in accordance with the missed approach proce-
dure, manually turn the airplane toward the missed approach fix then
perform the d to procedure.
OPTION 2, Heading to intercept a course to the Missed
Approach Procedure waypoint
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS. HEADING VECTOR 1/1
The HEADING VECTOR
Page appears with the <
HDG L270
cursor over the HEAD-
ING field. Type in the CANCEL
<
MAP
appropriate heading TO MA11RC DTK 125
using a preceding R or L < >
to establish the turn

direction (i.e. L150).
(Figure 3-83)
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Figure 3-83
The cursor moves to the
Heading Mode field and HEADING VECTOR 1/1
HDG SELECT? is in the
cursor. (Figure 3-84) <
HDG L270
NOTE: Prior to step 3 the <

HDG SELECT?
enter key may be pressed MAP
with the cursor over HDG <
TO MA11RC DTK 125
>
select field so that the air-
plane can begin the intercept
process. Repeat the proce-
dure from step1 to complete
the HDG intercept procedure. Figure 3-84
Rev. 2
System Operation

HEADING VECTOR 1/1
until INTERCEPT? is dis-
played.
<HDG L270
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. INTERCEPT
<
The cursor moves to the MAP
TO field. (Figure 3-85) <
TO MA12RC DTK 197 >

until the Missed Approach
Procedure waypoint is dis-
played. Figure 3-85
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. HEADING VECTOR 1/1
The cursor moves to the
DTK field. Type in the <
HDG L270
desired track to be inter-
cepted to the Missed <
CANCEL
MAP
Approach Procedure way-
TO MA12RC DTK 260
point. (Figure 3-86) < >

TWICE. The NAVIGA-
TION Page will be dis-
played with the HDG and Figure 3-86
DTK displayed in yellow. The autopilot may now be re-engaged if
required to fly to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint.
It is recommended that the ETA field on NAVIGATION Page 1 be
changed to ALT during approach procedures for a display of the altitude
constraints at the current TO waypoint. To change the field from ETA to
ALT, perform the following:
NAVIGATION 1/4
<
1. Line Select Key - DIRECT 13:48
DEPRESS to position the <
PT DRK ALT ?
>
cursor over the ETA field. NX PT OVERFLY TO 305
DIS 0.2
2. BACK Key - DEPRESS. ETE 00:00.0
ALT? will be displayed in DTK 301
>
GS 150
the cursor. (Figure 3-87) WIND ---/--- >
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS -AUTO-
to change the field to alti-
tude. Figure 3-87
NOTE: If no altitude constraint is programmed at the current TO
waypoint, the ALT field will display dashes.
Rev. 2
System Operation
Rev. 0
System Operation
ENROUTE
DIRECT TO - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT

d function enables the pilot to fly direct to any lateral waypoint on
the Active Flight Plan without reinserting the waypoint identifier.
NOTE: If a Direct To the MAP on the active flight plan is initiated, the
selected Approach Procedure will be canceled as indicated by the
waypoints of the approach no longer being indented and a MSG.
1. d Key - DEPRESS. A DIRECT TO Page will appear with the
cursor over the current TO waypoint. (Figure 3-88)
DIRECT 1/2 >
the cursor over the KSNA PWE
TO MUSEL LMN
desired identifier. <
HEMET BURKK
>
TRM BDF
NOTE: Active Flight Plans <
EED* GSH
>
exceeding 18 waypoints will TBC KDTW
< >
be continued on subsequent FMN *****
pages. Press d , NXT or <
PUB
PRV Key to access remain- HLC
ing waypoints.
Display automatically
advances to NAVIGATION Page 1.
NOTE: The system must compute a turn from a wings level position.
If the aircraft is in a turn when the d Key pressed, the aircraft will
roll to wings level position momentarily. The aircraft will then contin-
ue the turn toward the Direct To waypoint.
If an offset waypoint was selected, an OFFSET WPT Page is dis-
played. Verify data and DEPRESS ENTER. The DIRECT Page is
displayed with cursor over the Offset Waypoint. Press ENTER again
to proceed direct to the WPT. Display automatically advances to
NAVIGATION Page 1 when the DIRECT TO function is complete.
4. DIS, DTK - CHECK.
Rev. 0
System Operation
DIRECT TO - HP WAYPOINT
1. d Key - DEPRESS. A DIRECT TO Page appears with the
cursor over the current TO waypoint.
desired HP identifier. (Figure 3-89)
NOTE: Active Flight Plans
exceeding 18 waypoints will <
DIRECT 1/2 >
KSNA PWE
be continued on subsequent MUSEL LMN
pages. Press d , NXT or <
HEMET BURKK
>
PRV Key to access remain- TRM HP BDF

>
<
ing waypoints. EED* GSH
TBC KDTW
< >
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS FMN *****
to display the HOLDING <
PUB
PATTERN Page with HLC
both the OK? ENTER
and CANCEL option. Figure 3-89
(Figure 3-90)
NOTE: The holding pattern
HOLDING PATTERN 1/1
may be edited if required , at >
AT BDF
this time. See Page 3-66 for
DIRECT ENTRY >
details. INBOUND CRS 070
MAX HOLDING TAS 261 >
To Select and Go Direct TURN DIR RIGHT
LEG TIME 1.5
To HP Waypoint: LEG DIS (0.0)
>
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. EXIT MODE MANUAL >
Display automatically OK? ENTER CANCEL

advances to NAVIGA-
TION Page 1. Figure 3-90
To Cancel Holding Pattern:(from the Holding Pattern page)

1. Line Select - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired HP way-
point.
2. Hold Key - DEPRESS
3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over CANCEL?.
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Display automatically advances to
NAVIGATION Page 1 and aircraft proceeds Direct To the way-
point with the Holding Pattern canceled.
Rev. 0
System Operation
DIRECT TO - RANDOM WAYPOINT

This procedure enables the pilot to add a random waypoint to the
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN in the desired sequence and proceed direct
to it.
1. d Key - DEPRESS. The cursor will automatically appear over
the current TO waypoint on the DIRECT TO Page.
DIRECT 1/2 >
KSNA PWE
the cursor over the iden- MUSEL LMN
tifier that will follow the < >
HEMET BURKK
new entry. (Figure 3-91) TRM HP BDF
< >
EED* GSH
3. Type in the waypoint TBC KDTW
< >
identifier. FMN *****
<
TO PUB
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. HLC
5. Waypoint Page
Coordinates - VERIFY or Figure 3-91
INSERT. To insert
Waypoint Coordinates (cursor over POS field):
a. Latitude - INSERT (N or S first, then degrees, minutes and
hundredths (6 characters)).
b. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
c. Longitude - INSERT (E or W first, then degrees, minutes and
hundredths (7 characters)).
7. Waypoint Sequence - < DIRECT 1/2 >
VERIFY that the way- KSNA HLC
point is in the proper <
MUSEL PWE >
HEMET LMN
location. (Figure 3-92) TRM BURKK
< >
EED* BDF
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. TBC TO ALS
Display automatically < >
FMN KDTW
advances to NAVIGA- PUB *****
< >
TION Page 1.
NOTE: If Direct To a pilot
entered waypoint is desired, Figure 3-92
a latitude and longitude entry
may be required.
Rev. 0
System Operation
A. Latitude - Insert N or S first, then degrees, minutes, and hun-

dredths (6 characters)
B. Longitude - Insert E or W first, then degrees, minutes, and
hundredths (7 characters)
If Direct To an offset waypoint is desired, the radial and distance
entry from the parent waypoint may be required.
NOTE: If ENTER Key is not depressed prior to leaving DIRECT
Page, the waypoint identifier will not appear on the Active Flight Plan,
the aircraft will not proceed DIRECT TO this waypoint and will need
to be re-entered. The DIRECT TO function has been completed
when NAV Page 1 is displayed after the last ENTER Key press.
NOTE: A Direct To function may also be accomplished from NAVI-
GATION Page 1, 2, or 3 by placing the cursor over the TO waypoint
and typing in the desired waypoint if required. Depress the ENTER
Key and the system will proceed Direct To the selected waypoint.
If the selected waypoint was not on the active FPL a fence will be
added to the FPL and no AUTO LEG CHG will occur beyond this
waypoint.
Anytime the Direct To function is used to go Direct To the MAP the
Approach Procedure will be canceled. The SYSTEM MESSAGE
page will display APPROACH CANCELED and the CDI sensitivity
will return to Terminal scale of 1NM full scale deflection.
DIRECT TO - CLOSEST AIRPORT

This procedure allows the pilot to select a desired airport and pro-
ceed DIRECT TO it.
DIR CLOSET ARP 2/2
1. d Key- DEPRESS until <
TO KSNA 034/ 13
DIR CLOSEST ARP Page <
KNZJ 057/ 17
appears. (Figure 3-93) KSLI 360/ 20
<
KLGB 349/ 23
When initially accessed KNFG 123/ 32
the cursor will be over <
KCNO 041/ 34
KLAX 335/ 36
the airport closest to the KRAL 055/ 39
<
aircraft’s present posi- KONT 040/ 39
tion at that time.
Figure 3-93
DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired airport identifi-
Rev. 0
System Operation
er and press ENTER. NAVIGATION Page 1 will be displayed

and the airplane will proceed d to the selected airport.
NOTE: The bearing and distance values to the closest airports are
based on the aircraft’s present position at the time this page is
accessed. The values are not updated while the page is being dis-
played. To obtain updated information, it is necessary to exit the
page then return.
PSEUDO-VORTAC (SELECTED COURSE)

1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1.
NOTE: The system must be proceeding Direct To a waypoint or
DTK will not be an enterable field. If system is proceeding Direct To
the desired waypoint, proceed to Step 5. If system is not currently
proceeding direct to a waypoint, continue with Step 2.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TO field.
3. TO Waypoint Identifier - INSERT (if necessary).
If Waypoint Page Appears:
<
NAVIGATION 1/4
DIRECT 22:36
a. Waypoint Page Co- PT LNK 22:42
<
ordinates - VERIFY
or INSERT. DIS 17.9
ETE 00:04.3
b. ENTER Key - DE- DTK 070
>
PRESS. GS 256
WIND 104/ 14 >
-AUTO-
5. Desired Track (DTK) -
INSERT. (Figure 3-94)
Figure 3-94
If the DTK entry posi-
NAVIGATION 1/4
tions the aircraft on the <
PSEUDO VORTAC
FROM, or far, side of the TO LNK 22:42
<
TO waypoint, the Leg
Change Mode switches DIS 14.1
ETE 00:03.3
to -MAN-, otherwise it DTK 070
>
remains in -AUTO-. GS 256
(Figure 3-95) The pilot WIND 104/ 14 >
must determine if -MAN- -MAN-
or -AUTO- is appropri-
ate. To reselect AUTO, Figure 3-95
Rev. 0
System Operation
press the BACK Key then ENTER when the cursor is over the
LEG CHANGE field.
NOTE: The system will turn the aircraft to intercept the DTK at up to
a 45° angle if coupled to the aircraft.
NOTE: The d function may also be used to initiate a Pseudo-
VORTAC. Following the Direct To entry using the d Key the dis-
play automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1. Manually
position the cursor over DTK field and continue as described above
in Steps 5 and 6. To exit Pseudo-VORTAC Mode make any leg
change (e.g. d Key press and enter current TO waypoint). When
exiting Pseudo-VORTAC the system may return to the -AUTO- Leg
Change Mode unless the system was in -MAN- prior to initiating
Pseudo-VORTAC.
A manual leg change means the system will not automatically
sequence to the next waypoint on the active flight plan. To sequence
to the next waypoint in the flight plan, use the Direct To function or
place the cursor over -MAN-. Press the BACK Key and AUTO? will
be displayed. Press the ENTER Key and the system will return to
the automatic leg change mode.
Rev. 0
System Operation
USING HEADING VECTOR

This procedure enables the pilot to program and fly a specific head-
ing vector as well as program an automatic intercept to a specified
leg while remaining in FMS (LNAV) mode.
PROGRAMMING A HEAD- HEADING VECTOR 1/1

ING VECTOR
HDG 205
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to <
display HEADING VEC- CANCEL

TOR Page with cursor
over the HDG field. TO LFK DTK 197
2. Heading - INSERT
desired Heading in whole ENTER HDG
degrees, preceded by R
or L, if applicable, to indi- Figure 3-96
cate a turn direction.
(Figure 3-96)
NOTE: R or L should be HEADING VECTOR 1/1
used for a heading change
<
HDG 205
greater than 180° from the
present heading. A T in the HDG SELECT ?
<
HDG and DTK fields indi-
cates the system is operating <
TO LFK DTK 197
>
in the true heading mode.
3. ENTER Key -
DEPRESS. The cursor
advances to Heading Figure 3-97
Mode field. (Figure 3-97)
to select Heading Select <
NAVIGATION 1/4
FR PAXTO 19:07
Mode and return to NAV- TO LFK 19:21
<
IGATION Page 1. HDG SELECT 205
DIS 21.9
NOTE: HDG SELECT and ETE 00:05.3
the programmed heading are DTK 197 >
displayed on NAVIGATION GS 216
Page 1 indicating the aircraft WIND 158/ 10 >
is in Heading Select Mode. -AUTO-
(Figure 3-98)
Figure 3-98
Rev. 2
System Operation
CHANGING HEADING VECTOR WHILE IN HEADING SELECT

MODE
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page with
cursor over the HDG field.
2. Heading - INSERT desired Heading.
NOTE: Cursor moves to the Heading Mode field, but it is not neces-
sary to depress ENTER Key because the system is already in head-
ing select mode..
4. NAV or ENTER Key - DEPRESS to check heading and return to
NAVIGATION Page 1.
CHANGING TO WAYPOINT WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE

NOTE: This procedure establishes a leg between the new TO
Waypoint and the waypoint preceding it on the Active Flight Plan or a
Pseudo-VORTAC. If crosstrack distance exceeds 125nm, the
HEADING Mode will be canceled and the STRG INVALID message
will be displayed.
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page.
2. Line Select Key - HEADING VECTOR 1/1
DEPRESS to position the
cursor over TO Waypoint. <
HDG 205
(Figure 3-99)
<
HDG SELECT
to cycle through way- <
TO LFK DTK 197 >
points on the Active
Flight Plan or INSERT
alternate waypoint.
a. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY or INSERT.
b. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to DTK field.
5. Desired Track (DTK) - VERIFY or INSERT.
Rev. 2
System Operation

HEADING VECTOR 1/1
OK? ENTER message
appears. (Figure 3-100)
<HDG 205
<
HDG SELECT
to select TO Waypoint
and return to NAVIGA- TO IAH DTK 193
< >
TION Page 1. The cur-
sor may be positioned
over the Leg Change OK? ENTER
Mode field.
Figure 3-100
NOTE: If the Desired Track
is changed, a Pseudo-VORTAC is programmed. If the DTK entry
positions the aircraft on the FROM, or far-side of the TO waypoint,
the Leg Change Mode displayed on NAVIGATION Page 1 switches
to -MAN-, otherwise it remains in -AUTO-. The pilot must determine
if -MAN- or -AUTO- is appropriate.
CANCELING HEADING SELECT MODE

Initiate a DIRECT TO procedure, using the d and ENTER Keys,
which immediately cancels the commanded heading or perform the
following:
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over HDG
SELECT.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS until CANCEL? is displayed.
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to cancel Heading Vector and return to
NAVIGATION Page 1.
NOTE: The system may turn the aircraft to intercept the current
TO/FROM leg at up to a 45° angle.
PROGRAMMING AN INTERCEPT
1. HDG Key - DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page with
cursor over the HDG field.
2. Heading - INSERT desired Heading in whole degrees, preceded
by R or L, if applicable, to indicate a turn direction.
NOTE: R or L should be used for a heading change greater than
180° from the present heading. A T indicates the system is operating
in the true heading mode.
Rev. 2
System Operation

The cursor advances to HEADING VECTOR 1/1
Heading Mode field. HDG 205
<
INTERCEPT ?
to select INTERCEPT? <
(Figure 3-101) TO LFK DTK 197

< >

Cursor moves to the TO
Waypoint field.
6. BACK Key - DEPRESS, Figure 3-101
if required, to cycle
through waypoints on
the Active Flight Plan or HEADING VECTOR 1/1
INSERT an alternate
waypoint. (Figure 3- < HDG 205
102) HDG SELECT
<
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. TO IAH DTK 193

< >
a. Waypoint Page
Coordinates - VERI-
FY or INSERT. Figure 3-102
b. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to DTK field.
8. Desired Track (DTK) - VERIFY or INSERT.
NOTE: If the Desired Track is changed, a Pseudo-VORTAC is pro-
grammed. If the DTK entry positions the aircraft on the FROM, or far,
side of the TO waypoint, the Leg Change Mode on NAV page 1
switches to -MAN-, otherwise it remains in -AUTO-. The pilot must
determine if -MAN- or -AUTO- is appropriate.
NOTE: If a DME Arc endpoint is selected as the TO waypoint, a
default DTK will be displayed based on the point at which the ARC
will be intercepted and DTK is not selectable.
Rev. 2
System Operation

An Intercept Message may HEADING VECTOR 1/1
appear (NO COURSE
INTERCEPT, NO ARC < HDG 205
INTERCEPT, or INTER- INTERCEPT\

<
CEPT BEYOND FIX
(Figure 3-103). If no mes- <
TO IAH DTK 193 >
sage appears the intercept INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX
will occur on the TO side of
OK? ENTER
the selected TO waypoint.
The intercept messages are Figure 3-103
based on the current aircraft
heading and track. Once the selected heading has been established,
the HEADING VECTOR Page may be viewed to determine the inter-
cept status. If NO COURSE INTERCEPT or NO ARC INTERCEPT
occurs, the message light will illuminate and these messages will be
displayed on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page. In order to view one of
these messages on the HDG Page after the initial entries have been
made, use the Line Select Key to remove the cursor from the page.
NOTE: BUSY - STANDBY may be displayed in yellow momentarily
while the intercept is calculated.
10. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to accept data and return to NAV page
1. The cursor is positioned over the Leg Change Mode if the
DTK has been entered manually on the Heading Page.
PROGRAMMING A HEADING INTERCEPT TO THE FINAL

APPROACH COURSE
This procedure non-precision approach may be accomplished using the
following steps:
1. HDG - DEPRESS to dis- HEADING VECTOR 1/1
play the HEADING VEC-
TOR Page. < HDG 205
2. Type in the assigned <\

heading. (Figure 3-104)
< TO DRK DTK 125 >
The cursor moves to the OK? ENTER
heading mode field.
Figure 3-104
Rev. 2
System Operation
4. BACK Key - DEPRESS to

display the INTERCEPT? HEADING VECTOR 1/1
prompt. (Figure 3-105)
< HDG 205
INTERCEPT ?
The cursor moves to the <
FAF
TO field. TO DRK DTK 125
< >

until the FAF waypoint is OK? ENTER
displayed.
Figure 3-105
NOTE: If more than one identifier exists on the FPL that is the same
identifier as the FAF, go to the DIRECT TO Page after completing the
entries and the cursor will be over the FAF waypoint if the correct identi-
fier has been selected.
8. Enter the inbound final approach course in the DTK field if required.
9. ENTER Key - DEPRESS Twice to return to Navigation Page 1.
NAVIGATION Page 1 will be displayed with the TO waypoint, the
FAF, and waypoint previous to the FAF in the FR field if no manual
DTK was entered. The system will now intercept the Final
Approach course and sequence to the MAP.
NOTE: If an intercept is programmed to a FAF that is part of a
Procedure Turn the DTK must be manually entered. This will cause
PSEUDO VORTAC to be displayed on NAV Page 1.
Rev. 2
System Operation
PROGRAMMING A HOLDING PATTERN

WARNING: When entering PTs or HP airspace at high speeds
the FMS may not constrain the airplane from violating maneu-
vering airspace. Pilots are responsible for procedural compli-
ance.
This procedure enables the pilot to program a Holding Pattern (HP) at
a specific waypoint.
An HP is automatically programmed from the database when it is part
of an Arrival or Approach procedure.
NOTE: No HP can be programmed at an ARC end point on the final
Approach course manually.
1. NAV, FPL, or d Key - DEPRESS to display applicable page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired
waypoint.
NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages, only the TO Waypoint can be
selected, and on the Active Flight Plan Page, a Holding Pattern
cannot be programmed at the FR or TO Waypoint.
NOTE: If WPT is a duplicate WPT the country code will be displayed
in this field in parenthesis (in green) (Figure 3-106)
3. HOLD Key - DEPRESS
HOLDING PATTERN 1/1
to display HOLDING AT CAP (USA)
PATTERN Page with cur-
>
sor over the INBOUND INBOUND CRS 013
CRS field. (Figure 3-106) MAX HOLDING TAS 259 >
TURN DIR RIGHT
4. INBOUND CRS - VERI- LEG TIME 1.0 >
FY or INSERT. LEG DIS (3.2)
EXIT MODE MANUAL >
NOTE: A verified Inbound
Course programs a DIRECT
ENTRY procedure. The sys- Figure 3-106
tem Defaults to the inbound
course between the previous WPT on the FPL and the waypoint at
which the hold is desired. If a Direct TO Leg is displayed on the NAV
pages the inbound course defaults to the leg between the aircraft’s
present position and the current TO waypoint. When an inserted
Inbound Course value is beyond the DIRECT ENTRY parameters,
then a TEARDROP or PARALLEL pattern is programmed.
Rev. 0
System Operation
When a Holding Procedure is initiated, the inbound course is dis-

played on NAVIGATION Page 1. If the CDI needle does not auto-
matically slew to the inbound course, manually set the CDI needle to
the inbound course so that the course needle sensing is correct.
A T adjacent to the value displayed in the INBOUND CRS field indi-
cates the course is referenced to true north.
The type of entry is dis- HOLDING PATTERN 1/1
AT TRM (USA)
played. Cursor moves to DIRECT ENTRY >
the LEG TIME field. INBOUND CRS 013
(Figure 3-107) MAX HOLDING TAS 259 >
TURN DIR RIGHT
6. LEG TIME - VERIFY or LEG TIME 1.0
>
INSERT (valid range 1.0 LEG DIS (3.2)
to 9.9 min). EXIT MODE MANUAL >
7. If Holding Pattern is
complete proceed to
Step 11. If Optional Figure 3-107
Entries are required,
continue with Steps 8, 9, or 10.
Optional Entry: Turn Direction
8. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over TURN DIR.
a. BACK Key - DEPRESS to change direction.
Optional Entry: Leg Distance
9. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over LEG DIST.
a. Leg Distance -
INSERT or VERIFY HOLDING PATTERN 1/1
(valid range 1.0nm AT TRM (USA)
to 50nm). DIRECT ENTRY >
INBOUND CRS 013
b. ENTER Key - DE- MAX HOLDING TAS 259 >
PRESS. TURN DIR RIGHT
LEG TIME (1.0) >
NOTE: When the leg dis- LEG DIS 3.2
tance is entered, the leg time EXIT MODE AUTO >
will be computed as indicated

by parentheses and vice- Figure 3-108
versa. (Figure 3-108)
Rev. 0
System Operation
Selecting Exit Mode:

10. Line Select Key - DE-
PRESS to position the HOLDING PATTERN 1/1
cursor over MANUAL or AT TRM (USA)
AUTO. Press the BACK DIRECT ENTRY >
key to change exit mode INBOUND CRS 013
option. Selecting MANU- MAX HOLDING TAS 259 >
AL will initiate a continu- TURN DIR RIGHT
LEG TIME 1.0 >
ous hold. Selecting LEG DIS (3.2)
AUTO will exit the hold EXIT MODE MANUAL >
the next time the HP fix is OK? ENTER
crossed or after the entry
procedure is completed.
Figure 3-109
(Figure 3-109)
NOTE: Once in the Holding Pattern, the exit mode is displayed on NAV
Page 1. It can be changed on NAV Page 1 as well as on the Holding
Page.
11. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. OK? ENTER prompt will appear. Verify
inputs.
12. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to load the Holding Pattern at the selected
waypoint and return to the NAVIGATION, DIRECT TO, or FPL
Page.
NOTE: If a Selected Cross Track (SXTK) has been entered, the system
will not enter the Hold at the waypoint. The aircraft must be proceeding
to the waypoint in order for the system to enter the Hold.
REVIEWING, EDITING, OR CANCELING A HOLDING PATTERN
This procedure enables the pilot to review, edit, or cancel a Holding
Pattern at a specific waypoint.
REVIEWING
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired HP
waypoint.
NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages, only the TO Waypoint can be select-
ed, and on the Active Flight Plan, the TO Waypoint can only be
reviewed.
Rev. 0
System Operation
3. HOLD Key - DEPRESS

to display HOLDING HOLDING PATTERN 1/1
AT TRM (USA)
PATTERN Page. (Figure
DIRECT ENTRY >
3-110) INBOUND CRS 013
MAX HOLDING TAS
4. Holding Pattern - REVIEW. TURN DIR RIGHT
>
LEG TIME 1.0

>
LEG DIS (3.2)
EXIT MODE MANUAL >
OK? ENTER CANCEL
EDITING
Figure 3-110
DEPRESS to position cursor over desired field.
a. INSERT value for INBOUND CRS, LEG TIME, or LEG DIST
or
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS to change TURN DIR or EXIT
MODE.
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The OK? ENTER prompt will appear.
NOTE: A re-entry to the Holding Pattern must be flown if the
Inbound Course or Turn Direction are changed while holding at the
HP Waypoint. No XFILL capability is available to the other system in
a dual system installation from one or both systems when a holding
pattern is in progress.
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to return to the NAVIGATION, DIRECT
TO, or FPL Page.
CANCELING HOLDING PATTERN 1/1

1. Line Select Key - AT CAP (USA)
DIRECT ENTRY >
DEPRESS to position INBOUND CRS 013
the cursor over the MAX HOLDING TAS 259 >
CANCEL? prompt. TURN DIR RIGHT
(Figure 3-111) LEG TIME 1.0 >
LEG DIS (3.2)
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. EXIT MODE MANUAL >
The HP annunciation is CANCEL ?
erased from NAVIGA-
TION, DIRECT TO, and Figure 3-111
FPL Pages.
NOTE: If canceling holding pattern at the current TO Waypoint, HP
or AT is replaced by “TO”.
Rev. 0
System Operation
EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN

This procedure gives the pilot three options to exit a Holding Pattern:
exiting the next time over a holding fix, going Direct To the holding fix,
or performing a Leg Change.
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN NEXT TIME OVER HOLDING FIX

1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to NAVIGATION 1/4
< >
display NAVIGATION HOLD RIGHT MANUAL
Page 1, 2 or 3. <
AT ORD 01:01 >
EXIT HOLD 00:00.4
2. Line Select Key - DIS 1.4
DEPRESS to position ETE 00:00.4
the cursor over MANU- INBOUND CRS 299
AL. (Figure 3-112) GS 119
WIND 327/ 13
to display AUTO?.
The NAVIGATION Page <
NAVIGATION 1/4 >
indicates that the aircraft HOLD RIGHT AUTO?
will EXIT HOLD the next <
AT ORD 01:01 >
time over the holding fix EXIT HOLD 00:00.4
DIS 1.4
(aircraft will complete the ETE 00:00.4
loop around the holding INBOUND CRS 299
pattern). (Figure 3-114) GS 119
WIND 327/ 13
NOTE: The next (NX) way- -AUTO-
point information may also
appear if the exit is made
during Waypoint Alert. Figure 3-113
<
NAVIGATION 1/4 >
HOLD RIGHT AUTO
<
AT ORD 01:01 >
EXIT HOLD 00:00.4
DIS 1.4
ETE 00:00.4
INBOUND CRS 299
GS 119
WIND 327/ 13
Figure 3-114
Rev. 0
System Operation
EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY GOING DIRECT TO HOLDING

FIX
1. d Key - DEPRESS to
<
DIRECT 1/2 >
display Direct To Page KABE ONL
with cursor over current <
PSB CYS >
HP Waypoint. (Figure 3- HP FNT DBL
115) <
HASTE DVC >
PMM PGS
KUBBS HEC >
to display HOLDING OBK KVNY
DBQ *****
PATTERN Page with <
FOD
>
cursor over CANCEL?.

(Figure 3-116)
Figure 3-115
to go Direct To current
TO Waypoint (Holding HOLDING PATTERN 1/1
Fix) and cancel Holding AT FNT
Pattern. EXIT HOLD 00:00.4 >
INBOUND CRS 299
MAX HOLDING TAS 305
EXITING HOLDING PAT- >
TURN DIR RIGHT
TERN BY PERFORMING A LEG TIME 1.0 >
LEG CHANGE LEG DIS (3.5)
EXIT MODE MANUAL >
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to CANCEL ?
display the NAVIGA-
TION Page 1.
Figure 3-116
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over FROM
field (HOLD RIGHT/ <
NAVIGATION 1/4 >
LEFT). (Figure 3-117) FR ------ ------
<
AT FNT 15:22 >
3. FR Waypoint - INSERT EXIT HOLD 00:02
DIS 7.3
desired waypoint.
ETE 00:02.4
INBOUND CRS 299
GS 175
WIND 375/ 13
Figure 3-117
Rev. 0
System Operation

NAVIGATION 1/4
The next waypoint in the < >
FR HASTE ------
Active Flight Plan TO PMM 15:22
< >
sequence will appear in EXIT HOLD 00:02
the TO field. (Figure 3- DIS 7.3
118) ETE 00:02.4
INBOUND CRS 299
5. TO Waypoint - VERIFY. GS 175
To change the TO WIND 375/ 13
Waypoint, insert the
desired identifier.
to activate the new leg
and cancel the Holding Pattern.
Rev. 0
System Operation
Rev. 0
System Operation
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) OPERATION - PRE-

DEPARTURE
SETTING CRUISE ALTITUDE, TRANSITION LEVEL, AND

DEFAULT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE
This procedure allows the pilot to define a Cruise Altitude and change
the default values for Transition Level and Flight Path Angle.
After Initial Leg Selection:
1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS to display VNAV Page 1.
DEPRESS to position VNAV 1/4
cursor over DATA?. DESCENT 875
TO KSFO 11
(Figure 3-119) EST CROSSING 875
>
3. ENTER Key - DE- >

REQUIRED FPM ----
PRESS to display VNAV ACTUAL FPM 0 >
DATA Page with cursor
over the CRUISE ALT
field. DATA?
4. Cruise Altitude - INSERT. Figure 3-119

(Figure 3-120)
Only two or three digits VNAV DATA 1/1
are required to input an
altitude, i.e. enter 80 and CRUISE ALT FL210 >
8000 is displayed, enter TRANS LEVEL FL180
120 and 12000 is dis- DEFAULT FPA 3.0 >
played.
PRESEL ALT FL210 >
Any altitude value RANGE (NM) -----
entered greater than the ETE -----
TRANS LEVEL, altitude
value which normally Figure 3-120
defaults to FL180, is
converted and displayed as flight level (FL). Entering 210 will
display FL210.
An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding
zero, i.e., enter 052 and 52 is displayed.
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: CRUISE ALT may also be inserted on VNAV Page 1, line 3

(adjacent to the TO waypoint field) when #TOC or #TOD are the TO
waypoint. The cruise ALT may automatically be entered by the pres-
elector if the preselector has the capability and the system is config-
ured for digital preselector.
A (at or above) or B (at or below) constraint entries are not applicable
on this page. Setting a cruise altitude will establish a #TOD (Top of
Descent) waypoint or a #TOC (Top of Climb) waypoint if VNAV is
valid. A #TOC will be established only if there are no altitude con-
straints between the aircraft and #TOC and the aircraft is climbing.
VNAV DATA 1/1
6. Transition Level - INSERT CRUISE ALT FL210
or VERIFY. (Figure 3-121) TRANS LEVEL FL180 >
DEFAULT FPA 3.0
NOTE: Field defaults to
>
FL180 if pilot does not enter
a value. Anytime a TRANS PRESEL ALT FL210
>
ALT is entered, the value RANGE (NM) 150.5
will remain in non-volatile ETE 00:15.6
memory even after the sys-
tem is shut down.
Figure 3-121
8. Default Flight Path Angle (DEFAULT FPA) - INSERT or VERIFY
(in degrees and tenths, 0.1 to 6.0 range).
NOTE: Field defaults to 3.0 if pilot does not enter a value. Anytime a
default FPA is entered, the value will remain in non-volatile memory
even after the system is shut down.
If configured, altitude preselector information will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen. If the aircraft is in a climb or descent, distance
and ETA information to the preselected altitude will be displayed.
(Figure 3-119)
9. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to return to VNAV Page 1.
CREATING/CHANGING VNAV WAYPOINTS

Vertical navigation constraints can only be programmed for waypoints
on the Active Flight Plan, and though all Active Flight Plan waypoints
are displayed on VNAV Pages, new waypoints must be added to the
Active Flight Plan before they appear on the VNAV Flight Plan way-
point pages.
Rev. 0
System Operation
After initial leg selection on NAV page 1:

2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired way-
point.
NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages, only the TO Waypoint can be
selected. If the waypoint is selected from either the NAV, or Direct
pages, Direct FPA information pages will be displayed on the last line
of the screen. ( Figure 3-123)
3. VNAV Key - DEPRESS
to display VNAV WAY- VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
POINT Page for selected WAYPOINT MENLO
ALT ----- >
waypoint. (Figure 3-122) EST CROSSING -----
OFFSET ---
4. ALT - INSERT altitude REQ FPM -----
>
constraint followed by A FPA ---

(at or above) or B (at or
below), if applicable. DIRECT FPA -----
Only two or three digits
altitude, i.e. enter 30A Figure 3-122
and 3000A is displayed.
Full digit entry may be used to enter an altitude. Altitudes less
1000 feet enter a preceding zero, i.e. enter 054 and 54 feet is
displayed.
Any altitude entered greater than the transition level is converted
and displayed as flight level (FL).
NOTE: If the waypoint is part of a SID, STAR or Approach proce-
dure, appropriate altitude constraints will prefill from the database.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to OFFSET field.
(Figure 3-123)
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
6. OFFSET - If applicable, WAYPOINT MENLO
INSERT value in nautical ALT 3000A >
miles (-99 to +99 range). EST CROSSING 3000
OFFSET --- >
a. If the offset is prior to REQ FPM -----
the waypoint, enter FPA (DEF) DN ---
>
the range value and
a (-) prefills as a DIRECT FPA UP 0.0
default or
Figure 3-123
Rev. 0
System Operation
b. Enter a (+), then the range value to indicate the offset is

beyond the waypoint.
c. To erase the offset value, INSERT 0 and press ENTER Key.
The field changes to dashes, indicating no offset is pro-
grammed.
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The cursor moves to the FPA field
only if the entered constraint is below the aircraft’s present alti-
tude.
NOTE: A climb FPA cannot be programmed but the direct FPA field
will display the up angle between the aircraft’s present altitude and
the altitude constraint that was entered. If an FPA is programmed to
a direct FPA up waypoint it will be a DN (descent) FPA and an ambi-
guity will be displayed on the VNAV waypoint page.
To program a Path Descent

8. Flight Path Angle (FPA) - VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
INSERT or VERIFY (valid WAYPOINT MENLO
range is 0.1 to 6.0). ALT 3000 >
EST CROSSING 2900
(Figure 3-124)
OFFSET --- >
NOTE: If this waypoint was REQ FPM -----
FPA (DEF) DN 3.0
accessed from the FPL Page >
the FPA value field prefills

with the default (DEF) value DIRECT FPA DN 0.0
that was programmed on the
VNAV DATA Page. If Figure 3-124
accessed from the NAV or
d Page, the FPA field prefills with the (DIR) value. If an FPA is
manually entered, the FPA type field changes to (MAN).
With the cursor over the FPA value, Depressing the BACK Key will
cycle through all or some of the following:
• (DEF)
• (DB)
• (AUTO)
• (DIR)
• (MAN)
To cancel the FPA, INSERT 0 and press ENTER Key. The field
changes to dashes, indicating no FPA is programmed, the vertical
deviation output is invalid and no vertical deviation information will be
displayed on the CDU or the ADI/HSI.
Rev. 0
System Operation
9. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to load or verify the FPA value.

NOTE: When a descent FPA is programmed at a waypoint, a G
appears next to the altitude constraint indicating a Glide Path and ver-
tical deviation guidance and information will be available.
REVIEWING VNAV WAYPOINTS

When SIDs, STARs or Approaches have altitude constraints at way-
points on the procedure, the system automatically loads the altitude
constraints from the database on to the Active Flight Plan. No altitude
will be loaded at the MAP if the approach is a circling approach, or the
MAP is abeam or beyond the runway threshold. The system will not
load any “expect to cross” altitudes from the database on to the SIDS
or STARS, as part of ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN or VNAV Pages. No
altitudes are loaded from the database when an approach procedure
contains a Procedure Turn.
NOTE: The system will not fly a full SID or STAR procedure.
Using Active Flight Plan Page

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Page.
desired waypoint.
3. VNAV Key - DEPRESS. VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
The VNAV WAYPOINT WAYPOINT JOICE
Page appears with the ALT 3000 >
cursor over the ALT field. EST CROSSING 3000
(Figure 3-125) OFFSET --- >
REQ FPM DN 1250
4. ALT - REVIEW. FPA (AUTO) DN 3.0 >
NOTE: If (AUTO) FPA is

displayed, the system has DIRECT FPA DN 1.3
automatically programmed a
waypoint-to-waypoint FPA Figure 3-125
for the procedure.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS until display returns to ACTIVE FLIGHT
PLAN Page or depress the FPL Key.
Rev. 3
System Operation
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to review VNAV waypoint data at

remaining waypoints.
Using VNAV Flight Plan Waypoints Page

1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS to display the VNAV FLIGHT PLAN
WAYPOINTS Pages.
desired waypoint.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The VNAV WAYPOINT Page appears
with the cursor over the ALT field. (Figure 3-126)
4. ALT - REVIEW or INSERT new value.
NOTE: If the FPA was
retrieved from the database, VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
(DB) appears in the FPA WAYPOINT RW30L
type field. (Figure 3-126) ALT 633 >
EST CROSSING 633
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS OFFSET --- >
REQ FPM DN 1450
to return to the VNAV
FPA (DB) DN 3.1
FLIGHT PLAN WAY- >
POINTS Page.
DIRECT FPA DN 0.9
6. Repeat Steps 2 through
5 to review or change
altitude constraints at Figure 3-126
remaining waypoints.
VERTICAL NAVIGATION - ENROUTE
PROGRAMMING VERTICAL PATH DESCENTS

The pilot can use various methods to load a Flight Path Angle (FPA)
and determine the aircraft’s descent path.
NOTE: When the system detects a rapid change of baro altitude set-
ting, non-continuous data from an air data computer, vertical speed
change of more than 40ft/sec, or sequencing to the next waypoint on
the active flight plan, the vertical deviation output is momentarily set
Invalid. When vertical deviation returns to a valid state, the appropri-
ate value of vertical deviation will again be displayed.
Rev. 0
System Operation
Using Database (DB) FPA

The GNS-X C129 database contains Flight Path Angles associated
with waypoints on SIDs, STARs, and Approaches, that prefill when
these procedures are programmed into the Active Flight Plan. The
FPA field on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page displays (DB), which indi-
cates an FPA from the database is loaded and Vertical Deviation is
provided at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the
Vertical TO Waypoint. If the FPA at the (DB) VNAV waypoint is
changed in any way, the (DB) FPA will no longer be available.
Using Default ( DEF) FPA

The default FPA value will automatically be displayed if an altitude is
programmed on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page, except if the FPA
comes from the database or the VNAV WAYPOINT Page was
accessed using a Direct To function.
The pilot can load the Default
FPA (set on the VNAV VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT CIVET
DATA Page) by pressing the
ALT 14000A FL180B >
ENTER Key when the cursor EST CROSSING FL230
is on the FPA field of the OFFSET --- >
VNAV WAYPOINT Page. REQ FPM DN 450
The FPA field displays (DEF) FPA (DEF) DN 3.0
>
and Vertical Deviation is pro-
vided at the programmed
DIRECT FPA DN 1.3
angle when the waypoint
becomes the Vertical TO
Waypoint. (Figure 3-127) Figure 3-127
Using Manual (MAN) FPA

The pilot can type in a desired Flight Path Angle on the VNAV WAY-
POINT Page within the valid range, 0.1 to 6.0 degrees. When the
ENTER Key is depressed the FPA is loaded, the FPA field indicates
(MAN) and Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle
when the waypoint becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint.
Rev. 0
System Operation
Using Automatic (AUTO) FPA

The (AUTO) mode is pro-
WPT1
vided to link together 10000
descent waypoints that
have Cross-At type con- DESCENT PATH
straints and provide a com-
puted Flight Path Angle
WPT2
between them. (Figure 3- 5000
128) (AUTO)
The (AUTO) mode may be AUTOMATIC ANGLE
selected ONLY if the cho-
Figure 3-128
sen waypoint has a Cross-
AT type constraint pro-
grammed. All Cross-AT waypoints that are a part of a STAR or
APPROACH are automatically put into (AUTO) mode when the pro-
cedure is retrieved from the database and loaded onto the Active
Flight Plan.
If the waypoint prior to the selected (AUTO) FPA waypoint has a
Cross-AT-or-ABOVE, Cross-AT-or-BELOW, or Cross-BETWEEN
constraint programmed, an automatic angle is assigned and will be
the same angle as the programmed Default Angle on VNAV DATA
Page. Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle when
the waypoint becomes the Descent Reference Waypoint.
NOTE: If no ALT constraints are programmed before the selected
(AUTO) FPA waypoint, the (AUTO) FPA is the same as the (DEF) FPA.
Unless an FPA is programmed at a waypoint, the system uses the
(DEF) FPA to the first waypoint on the flight plan with an altitude con-
straint to establish a #TOD point. To help establish #TOD, the sys-
tem will automatically load the destination airport elevation on the
flight plan, provided the flight plan was not obtained from AFIS. An
altitude constraint and FPA must be loaded on the VNAV Waypoint
Page using the ENTER Key to establish a Path Descent and activate
Vertical Deviation to any waypoint except a (DB) WPT.
Rev. 0
System Operation
EDITING ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS

The following pages allow the pilot to edit altitude constraints for way-
points on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page, VNAV page, referred to as
VNAV FPL Waypoint Pages. One of the three following options may
be used:
OPTION 1: Using the VNAV Page.
OPTION 2. Using the VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Pages.
OPTION 3: Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page.
Option 1: Using VNAV Page
1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS VNAV 1/2 >
to display VNAV 1/2 CLIMB 5566
Page. The altitude con- TO CIVET FL350 >
straint may be changed RANGE (NM) 300.4
on this page if the cur- ETE 01:13.5
rent TO waypoint has a
ACTUAL FPM UP 400
constraint programmed. >
Type the new altitude in CLIMB GRAD 97 /NM

the altitude field adjacent DATA
to the TO WPT. All
parameters associated
Figure 3-129
with the former con-
straint will remain
unchanged, i.e., FPA, A, B, G, or OFFSET. (Figure 3-129)
Option 2: Using VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Pages

1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS to display the VNAV 2/2 Page (or greater)
to find the appropriate
waypoint. < VNAV 2/2 >
CLIMB 8754
NOTE: More VNAV Pages LAX -10 10000A
< >
will be available if the active KEGGS - 2 13000A
flight plan has several pages <
COOP - 3 15000A >
of waypoints. DAG
<
CLARR ----- >
2. Line Select Key - LAS -----
DEPRESS to position the <
RENTT ----- >
ERASE
waypoint and key in the
desired altitude. (Figure Figure 3-130
3-130)
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: Unless an FPA was previously programmed at an altitude in

this field, entering an altitude in this manner will not provide vertical
deviation or vertical guidance on the HSI.
3. Altitude Constraint - INSERT new altitude constraint followed, if
applicable, by A (at or above) or B (at or below). Any altitude value
entered greater than the Transition Level value on the data page is
converted and displayed as FL (flight level, rounded off to the near-
est hundred feet). An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered
with a preceding zero.
Option 3: Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page

2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired waypoint.
NOTE: On NAVIGATION Pages, only the TO Waypoint can be selected.
3. VNAV Key - DEPRESS
VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
to display VNAV WAY- WAYPOINT CIVET
POINT Page for selected
>
waypoint. (Figure 3-131) ALT 14000A FL180B
EST CROSSING FL2300 >
4. ALT - INSERT new alti- OFFSET ---
tude constraint followed, REQ FPM DN 450
>
if applicable, by A (at or FPA (DEF) DN 3.0
3.0
above) or B (at or below).
DIRECT FPA DN
UP 1.3
1.3
Only two or three digits
altitude, i.e. enter 30A Figure 3-131
and 3000A is displayed.
Any altitude value entered greater than the Transition Level
value on the data page is converted and displayed as flight level
(FL). An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a pre-
ceding zero.
dure, the altitude constraint prefills from database. “Cross-Between
two Altitudes” type constraints, as shown in Figure 3-130, cannot be
programmed manually.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to OFFSET field.
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The cursor moves to the FPA field.
Rev. 0
System Operation
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to return to the page where the VNAV

waypoint was accessed.
DIRECT TO - VNAV WAYPOINT AS LATERAL WAYPOINT

This procedure enables the pilot to proceed Direct To a waypoint,
both vertically and laterally by means of a Vertical Path Descent.
If the current To waypoint is the desired VNAV Direct To waypoint, go to Step 4.
1. Line Select Key (on NAVIGATION Page 1) - DEPRESS to posi-
tion the cursor over the TO waypoint field. Type in the desired
waypoint and press ENTER or,
d Key - DEPRESS. A DIRECT TO Page appears with the
cursor over the current TO waypoint.
NOTE: If the desired waypoint is not on the active FPL a fence
(------) will be inserted after the waypoint that was entered. Review
the FPL by pressing the d key.
2. Line Select Key - DIRECT 1/2
< >
DEPRESS to position KSNA PWE
cursor over desired way- <
MUSEL LMN >
point. (Figure 3-132) HEMET BURKK
<
TRM TO BDF >
NOTE: Active Flight Plans EED* GSH
containing more than 18 <
TBC KDTW
waypoints will display the FMN *****
PUB
remaining waypoints on sub- <
HLC
sequent pages. Press d
key again, or NXT Key, to Figure 3-132
access remaining pages.
A Random Waypoint may also be used. See DIRECT TO -
Random Waypoint.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. CDU screen automatically advances
to NAVIGATION Page 1.
NOTE: If an offset waypoint was selected, the system first displays
the OFFSET WPT Page. Verify data and DEPRESS ENTER. The
DIRECT Page will again be displayed with the cursor over the Offset
Waypoint. Press ENTER. The display automatically advances to
NAVIGATION Page 1.
Rev. 0
System Operation

NAVIGATION 1/4
DIRECT 23:03
cursor over TO Waypoint
TO BDF 05:22
on NAVIGATION Page < >
1. (Figure 3-133) DIS 1328.5

ETE 05:46.3
5. VNAV Key - DEPRESS DTK 049
>
to display the VNAV GS 228
WAYPOINT Page for WIND 230/ 8
>
TO Waypoint. -AUTO-
6. ALT - INSERT or VERI- Figure 3-133

FY. If an altitude con-
straint has already been programmed, the cursor will be dis-
played over the FPA (DIR) field value. You may proceed to Step
10. (Figure 3-135)
dure, the ALT constraint field prefills from the database.
7. ENTER Key -
DEPRESS. Cursor VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
moves to OFFSET field. WAYPOINT BDF
ALT 12000
(Figure 3-134) PLAN CROSSING FL290
>
OFFSET ---
8. OFFSET - If applicable, >
REQ FPM DN 1200
INSERT value in nautical FPA DN ---
>
miles (-99 to +99 range)
a. If the offset is prior DIRECT FPA DN 0.2
to the waypoint,
enter the range
value and a (-) pre- Figure 3-134
fills as a default or
b. enter a (+), then the range value to indicate the offset is
beyond the waypoint.
NOTE: To erase the offset value, INSERT 0 and press ENTER Key.
The field changes to dashes, indicating no offset is programmed.
9. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to the FPA field.
NOTE: Cursor only moves to the FPA field if altitude constraint is
below current baro altitude.
10. Flight Path Angle - VERIFY Direct Flight Path Angle is desirable to fly.
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: Direct Flight Path

Angle prefills if it is within the VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
WAYPOINT BDF
valid range (0.1 to 6.0). ALT 12000
(Figure 3-135) >
PLAN CROSSING FL290
OFFSET ---
11. ENTER Key - DEPRESS REQ FPM DN 1200
>
to accept waypoint FPA (DIR) DN 0.2

>
entries. VNAV Page 1 is
displayed, a Vertical
Path Descent has been DIRECT FPA DN 0.2
established, and Vertical
Deviation information Figure 3-135
and guidance is enabled
if a descent has been programmed.
DIRECT TO - VNAV WAYPOINT

This procedure allows the pilot to program a Direct To on the Vertical
Flight Plan, while still flying the lateral waypoints on the Active Flight
Plan. The VNAV Direct To function automatically deletes any inter-
mediate altitude constraints
and sets up a Path Descent <
DIRECT 1/2 >
to the Vertical TO Waypoint KSNA PWE
MUSEL LMN
using the Direct Flight Path <
HEMET BURKK
>
Angle. TRM TO BDF

< >
EED* GSH
1. d Key - DEPRESS. A TBC KDTW
<
DIRECT TO Page will FMN *****
appear with the cursor <
PUB
over the current TO way- HLC
point.
DEPRESS to position
cursor over desired way- VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
point. (Figure 3-136) WAYPOINT BDF
3. VNAV Key - DEPRESS. ALT -----
>
VNAV WAYPOINT Page PLAN CROSSING 14000 >

appears. If necessary, OFFSET ---
position cursor over ALT REQ FPM DN 1100
>
field (Figure 3-137). If
an altitude constraint has
already been pro- DIRECT FPA -----
grammed, the cursor will
Figure 3-137
Rev. 0
System Operation
appear over the FPA

VNAV WAYPOINT 1/1
value field (Figure 3-
WAYPOINT BDF
138). Go to Step 8. ALT 14000 >
PLAN CROSSING 14000
4. ALT - INSERT or VERIFY. OFFSET --- >
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. REQ FPM DN 1100
FPA (DIR) DN 2.5
Cursor moves to OFF- >
SET field.
DIRECT FPA DN 2.5
6. OFFSET - If applicable,
INSERT value in nautical
miles (-99 to +99 range). Figure 3-138
a. If the offset is prior to the waypoint, enter the range value
and a (-) prefills as a default or
b. enter a (+), then the range value to indicate the offset is
beyond the waypoint
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Cursor moves to FPA field.
8. Flight Path Angle - VERIFY or INSERT (in degrees and tenths,
0.1 to 6.0 range).
NOTE: Direct Flight Path Angle prefills if it is within the valid range
and an ALT is programmed. (Figure 3-138)
9. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to accept waypoint entries and return
to VNAV Page 1.
CREATING VNAV PROFILE WAYPOINTS

VNAV profile waypoints (#TOC, #TOD, and #PRESL) are used to
provide a prediction of the position of the aircraft on the vertical flight
path. These are non-enterable waypoints computed by the system
based on current ground speed and vertical speed.
Top of Climb (#TOC)

Top of Climb Altitude is obtained from either the CRUISE ALT
entered by the pilot on the VNAV DATA Page, or from the Altitude
Preselector setting, if available. When the aircraft arrives at the pre-
selected altitude, the system will automatically set cruise altitude to
the pre-selected altitude which will then provide a #TOD prediction.
If vertical climb constraints are programmed, #TOC will automatically
appear as the Vertical To Waypoint when the aircraft laterally passes
within 1 mile of the last vertical waypoint on the active flight plan that
has a climb constraint. Once the aircraft has crossed the final climb
Rev. 0
System Operation
constraint waypoint, #TOC will then become the Vertical To

Waypoint. If there are no vertical constraints programmed for climb,
#TOC will be displayed as the first vertical waypoint as long as the
aircraft is in a climb.
When the programmed cruise altitude is reached, #TOC is removed
from the VNAV Flight Plan, and #TOD becomes the Vertical To
Waypoint.
When #TOC is the TO Waypoint:
The pilot may obtain range and ETE to any altitude above the aircraft
during a climb.
1. VNAV Key - DEPRESS VNAV 1/3
< >
to display VNAV Page 1. CLIMB 1775
<
TO #TOC 12000 >
2. Line Select Key - RANGE (NM) 80.5
DEPRESS to position ETE 00:19.6
the cursor over the
#TOC altitude field. ACTUAL FPM UP 500
>
(Figure 3-139)
< CLIMB GRAD 118/NM
3. Alternate Altitude - DATA?
INSERT. This value
may be above or below
the altitude pre-select Figure 3-139
value, but must be
above the current baro
altitude. <
VNAV 1/3 >
CLIMB 1775
TO #TOC 12000 >
and observe the change RANGE (NM) 125.5
in RANGE and ETE. ETE 00:19.6
(Figure 3-140)
ACTUAL FPM UP 500
>
5. Repeat steps 2 thru 4 to
return to previous #TOC <
CLIMB GRAD 118/NM
DATA?
altitude setting.
Figure 3-140
Top of Descent (#TOD)

The Top of Descent waypoint is the position where the aircraft inter-
cepts the descent path at the cruise altitude. The system calculates
the #TOD by establishing a valid Descent Reference Waypoint, then
uses either the CRUISE ALT entered by the pilot on the VNAV
DATA Page, or the Altitude Preselector setting, if available. The
default FPA maybe used in this calculation.
Rev. 0
System Operation
If no Descent Reference Waypoint with FPA and crossing altitude is

programmed, the system will use the arrival airport and elevation
(ARP Reference Point, not a runway) and the default FPA to fix Top
of Descent as long as the active flight plan is not an AFIS flight plan.
NOTE: The default FPA may be used to establish #TOD, but no
Vertical Deviation Valid will occur until the FPA is actually loaded
from the VNAV WPT Page.
One minute prior to arriving at #TOD, the system issues the VNAV
WPT ALERT message and the discrete waypoint light will flash for
10 seconds, then go steady.
NOTE: Changing CRUISE ALT on the CDU to a lower altitude
should only be done after the aircraft has departed cruise altitude, or
#TOD at the current cruise altitude will be lost.
Pre-Selected Altitude Intercept Point (#PRESL)

When the system has an input from an Altitude Pre-selector and the
aircraft is flying toward this altitude, a profile waypoint (#PRESL)
appears on the VNAV Page. #PRESL, however, never becomes the
Vertical To Waypoint. When the Pre-selector input is valid, ETE and
RANGE to #PRESL can be found on the VNAV DATA Page.
NOTE: With certain types of Pre-Selectors installed (analog), it may
be necessary to manually enter a CRUISE ALT when the PRESEL
ALT is set higher than the cruise altitude. The system does not read
analog Pre-selector output until the aircraft’s baro is within approxi-
mately 1000ft of the pre-selected value.
Descent Reference Waypoints

Descent Reference Waypoints have a fixed altitude crossing, i.e.
Cross-At type altitude constraint. To create a Descent Reference
Waypoint, the pilot can program a Flight Path Angle or a Cross-At
altitude constraint.
If a programmed FPA violates a prior vertical constraint, the system
reassigns the Descent Reference Waypoint, using the Default FPA
from the VNAV DATA Page, as illustrated in Figure 3-141.
Rev. 0
System Operation
Cruise Altitude FL210 #TOD
Vertical Constraint
FL180B
CIVET 16500 PLAN CROSSING
14000A
Vertical Constraint
Programmed FPA 3.0

8000
FUELR
As shown, FUELR is the Descent Reference Waypoint Descent Reference
that establishes #TOD. Because the programmed Wpt
FPA allows for a vertical descent that meets the
vertical constraints at CIVET, FUELR remains the 126
Descent Reference Waypoint. KLAX
Cruise Altitude FL210 #TOD
FL180B
Default FPA 3.0

14000 PLAN CROSSING
CIVET Descent Reference Wpt
14000A
Programmed FPA 1.0

8000
FUELR
Descent Reference
In this case, since the programmed FPA at FUELR is Wpt
too shallow to meet the vertical constraints at CIVET, 126
the system reassigns CIVET at the Descent Reference KLAX
Waypoint, using the default FPA to compute #TOD.
Top of Descent and Descent Reference Waypoint

Figure 3-141
Rev. 0
System Operation
Rev. 0
System Operation
REMOTE TUNING
TUNING COMMS
This procedure enables the pilot to keyboard tune the aircraft radios
via the CDU. Some control heads may require placement in the
Remote Mode in order to accept tuning data from the CDU keyboard.
NOTE: If system is configured for 3 Comms the tune section will con-
sist of 4 pages.
1. TUNE Key - DEPRESS. TUNE 1/3
The Comm Radio TUNE COMM 1
Page will be displayed. ACTIVE (MAN) ------
PRESET 132.55
2. Line Select Key - >
DEPRESS (if neces-
COMM 2
sary) to position cursor ACTIVE ------
over appropriate PRE- PRESET 118.80 >
SET field.
3. Frequency - INSERT.
NOTE: Trailing zeroes are not required.

TRANSFER? will auto- TUNE 1/3
COMM 1
matically appear. (Figure
ACTIVE (MAN) ------
3-143) PRESET 132.55
TRANSFER? >
The entered PRESET fre- COMM 2
quency transfers to ACTIVE ------
ACTIVE. The new fre- PRESET 118.80 >
quency also displays as
the ACTIVE frequency on
the appropriate Comm Figure 3-143
control head.
NOTE: Keyboard tuned frequencies may display for a few seconds
then go to dashes if the frequency read back from the radio or the
control head is not available.
NOTE: (MAN) adjacent to Active Comm frequency indicates that the
frequency has been entered using the COMM control head. No
prompts are displayed when Active Comm frequency has been key-
board entered.
Rev. 0
System Operation
The PRESET frequency displayed on the control head is not neces-

sarily the PRESET frequency displayed on the CDU. Each may be
entered independently.
Depending on the system configuration the cursor can appear over
the PRESET field for either COMM 1 or COMM 2.
TUNING NAVs TUNE 2/3
NAV 1 PSP >

Keyboard Method FREQ (MAN) 115.50
RANGE 10.0
If Station Identifier Is Used: BRG 302
NAV 2 TNP >
1. TUNE Key -DEPRESS FREQ (MAN) 114.20
until NAV TUNE Page is PRESET 35.0
displayed. (Figure 3- BRG 035
144)
DEPRESS to position
cursor opposite the
TUNE 2/3
desired radio: NAV 1 or
NAV 2. NAV 1 BLH >
FREQ (MAN) 115.50
3. Station Identifier - INSERT RANGE 10.0
or VERIFY entry. (Figure BRG 302
3-145) NAV 2 TNP
>
FREQ (MAN) 114.20
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. PRESET 35.0
The new frequency is dis- BRG 035
played immediately and is
annunciated with (KEY)
Figure 3-145
adjacent to the frequency
field. If the identifier is not
found immediately, the
IDENT field will go to TUNE 2/3
dashes until the station is
NAV 1 (KEY) BLH
located in the database. >
FREQ 117.40
Once located, the identifi- RANGE 61.7
er will be displayed and BRG 141
the (KEY) annunciation NAV 2 TNP
>
will shift to the identifier FREQ (MAN) 114.20
line. (Figure 3-146) PRESET 35.0
BRG 035
Figure 3-146
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: NAV tuning is designed to enhance the VPU (VORTAC

Position Unit). The VPU will only use VOR/DME or DME only
navaids (includes TACAN and ILS) therefore, only VOR/DME or
DME only navaids will be displayed. In areas where a VOR only and
a DME only are on the same frequency and within line of sight of the
aircraft, entering the VOR identifier will result in the database replac-
ing the VOR identifier with the “usable” DME identifier. When this
occurs, the RANGE and BRG displays remain associated with the
VOR even though it is no longer displayed. This ambiguity will occur
when the frequency rather than the identifier is entered.
When the CDU keyboard is used to tune a navaid, the local VPU
database is searched for the tuned frequency. If found it is paired
with the nearest usable Navaid identifier associated with that fre-
quency. If the station identifier tuning method is used to tune the
radio. the identifier ultimately paired with the tuned frequency may
differ from the identifier originally entered. If the navaid is unusable,
that is, out of range, or a frequency conflict exists, dashes will be dis-
played in the IDENT field and the new frequency will be displayed.
5. Frequency - VERIFY that the ACTIVE frequency on the control
head and CDU displays agree.
If Station Frequency is Used:
1. TUNE Key -DEPRESS until NAV TUNE Page is displayed.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired
FREQ field.
3. Frequency - INSERT or
VERIFY. (Figure 3-147) TUNE 2/3
NOTE: Trailing zeroes are NAV 1 BLH >

not required. FREQ (MAN) 115.50
RANGE 10.0
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. BRG 302
NAV 2 TNP >
5. Frequency - VERIFY that FREQ (MAN) 114.20
control head display is PRESET 35.0
BRG 035
tuned to the desired fre-
quency.
Figure 3-147
Rev. 0
System Operation
When the station is locat-

TUNE 2/3
ed in the VPU database
the identifier will be dis- NAV 1 (KEY) PSP >
played and the (KEY) FREQ 115.50
annunciation will shift to RANGE 10.0
the identifier line. (Figure BRG 302
3-148) NAV 2 TNP >
FREQ (MAN) 114.20
6. RANGE and BRG - PRESET 35.0
CHECK. BRG 035
Figure 3-148
NOTE: (MAN) adjacent to the FREQ field indicates that the frequen-
cy has been entered manually from the NAV control head.
Auto Tune Method
Certain control heads will require placement in the Remote Mode at
the control head in order to recognize the tuning data from the GNS-
X C129. Only NAV/DME radios may be placed in the AUTO TUNE
mode.
TUNE 2/3
DME HOLD, Manual Control
Head Tuning, Keyboard NAV 1 (KEY) PSP >
Tuning or use of the FREQ 115.50
AUTO/MAN Switch will take RANGE 10.0
the GNS-X C129 out of the BRG 302
Auto/Tune Mode. NAV 2 TNP >
FREQ (MAN) 114.20
1. TUNE Key - DEPRESS PRESET 35.0
BRG 035
to display the NAV
TUNE Page.
Figure 3-149
DEPRESS to place cur-
sor over IDENT or TUNE 2/3
FREQ field of NAV 1 or
2. (Figure 3-149) NAV 1 AUTO? PSP >
FREQ 115.50
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS, RANGE 10.0
BRG 302
AUTO? is displayed in
NAV 2 TNP
place of (KEY) or FREQ (MAN) 114.20
>
(MAN). (Figure 3-150) PRESET 35.0

BRG 035
Figure 3-150
Rev. 0
System Operation
4. ENTER Key -
TUNE 2/3
DEPRESS to place sys-
tem in AUTO TUNE NAV 1 MZB >
Mode. After a brief FREQ 117.80
pause the CDU and con- RANGE 74.9
trol head information will BRG 204
change to reflect the NAV 2 TNP >
Identifier chosen by the FREQ (MAN) 114.20
PRESET 35.0
system. (Figure 3-151) BRG 035
NOTE: No prompt is dis-
played adjacent to the Figure 3-151
IDENT field when system is
in AUTO TUNE mode.
5. FREQ, RANGE and BRG - CHECK that the FREQ of the control
head and CDU display agree and that range and bearing are
reasonable.
TRANSPONDER AND ADF KEYBOARD TUNE

1. TUNE Key - DEPRESS
TUNE 3/3
to display the page with
XPDR and ADF. XPDR (MAN) ----- >

>
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the ADF (MAN) -----
>
desired code or frequen-
cy field. (Figure 3-152)
3. Code or Frequency -
INSERT and verify new Figure 3-152
value.(Figure 3-153)
TUNE 3/3
XPDR (MAN) ----- >
>
ADF (MAN) 300.0 >
Figure 3-153
Rev. 0
System Operation
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) field disappears indicating

radios have been keyboard tuned. Verify the code or frequency
changes on CDU and control head displays.
NOTE: (MAN) adjacent to ADF or XPDR indicates that the frequen-
cy or code has been entered manually from the control head.
Rev. 0
System Operation
PLANNING PROCEDURES
NOTE: The number of PLAN pages (which can vary from 6 to 8) is
dynamically allocated deprending on system configuration and whether
FDE has been calculated. These examples show the maximum num-
ber of pages available.
FUEL PLANNING
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS to display FUEL STATUS Page.
NOTE: REMAINING and RESERVE quantities are stored in non-
volatile memory after system shutdown. Upon system turn-on, VERIFY
INPUTS is displayed and REMAINING, RESERVE, and FLOW values
will flash.
2. Line Select Key - PLAN 1/8 >
FUEL STATUS LB
DEPRESS to position
REMAINING 5000 >
cursor over REMAINING RESERVE 1000
field. (Figure 3-154) FLOW 0
>
3. Fuel Quantity Remaining

- VERIFY or INSERT. HOURS -----
RANGE -----
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. NM/LB -----
5. Fuel Reserve - VERIFY
or INSERT. Figure 3-154
7. Fuel Flow - INSERT or VERIFY.
NOTE: No fuel flow entry is required in the Automatic Fuel Flow mode.
All flashing fields must be verified or values inserted using the ENTER
Key, in order for HOURS field to display information. RANGE and NM/LB
fields will display information when a valid ground speed is recognized.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. If a manual fuel flow is entered the VERI-
FY INPUTS message changes to LAST INPUT: and sets the time
at :00 minutes. (MAN) will be displayed adjacent to the FLOW field.
When the LAST INPUT field exceeds 15 minutes, the REMAINING,
RESERVE, and FLOW fields blink indicating verification or update
is required. REMAINING, RESERVE and FLOW must be manually
verified.
NOTE: Auto fuel flow can be reselected by positioning the cursor over
the manual fuel flow and depressing the BACK Key. AUTO? is dis-
played. The current auto fuel flow is displayed in the cursor.
Rev. 0
System Operation
Depressing ENTER Key will select the auto fuel flow. When going
from Manual to Automatic Fuel Flow Mode the REMAINING,
RESERVE and FLOW fields will blink. Verifying inputs is required,
Repeat Steps 2 through 7.
NOTE: HOURS of fuel and RANGE are calculated to the RESERVE
fuel, not “0” fuel, unless the RESERVE fuel is “0”.
To change the unit of measurement (LB or KG):
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the
REMAINING field. DEPRESS the Line Select Key above to
position the cursor over the unit field (LB or KG).
b. BACK Key -
DEPRESS. The PLAN 1/8 >
field will display LB? FUEL STATUS LB?
or KG? to notify the REMAINING 5000 >
pilot of the pending RESERVE 1000
FLOW 1200
change. (Figure 3- LAST INPUT: 00:05
>
155)
HOURS 03+19
c. ENTER Key - RANGE 1341
DEPRESS. The units NM/LB 0.335
field on the title line
and specific range line Figure 3-155
will change. All fuel
figures are recalculated to reflect the new units of measurement.
TRIP PLANNING
The TRIP PLAN Page provides the capability to calculate information
for Active or Stored Flight Plans, DIRECT TO legs, or Random legs
without affecting any of the system’s navigation functions. When the
TRIP PLAN Page displayed during a leg change on the active FPL,
the new TO waypoint will not be displayed here unless you exit then
return to this page. (The TO field on the TRIP PLAN Page is not
dynamic.)
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS to display TRIP PLAN Page.
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: Initially the TRIP

PLAN Page will display the PLAN 2/8
Active Flight Plan (if pre- TRIP PLAN A
<
DIRECT KDAL
sent). The initial leg dis- TO LIT KHPN
played will be DIRECT TO GS 407 <
the current TO waypoint on DIS/DTK 258.1/060
the active flight plan or the ETE 00:38.2
first TO waypoint on the FPL 1242/03+03
flight plan selected. (Figure ETA @KHPN 04:00
RAIM @KHPN AVAIL
3-156)
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the TRIP
PLAN 2/8
PLAN field. >
TRIP PLAN 6
3. Desired Flight Plan - <
DIRECT KDAL
INSERT Flight Plan TO LIT KHPN
GS 407
Number (Figure 3-157) DIS/DTK -----/---
>
or “A” for Active Flight ETE ------

Plan. (Figure 3-158). FPL -----/-----

NOTE: If a Flight Plan num-
ber is left in the TRIP PLAN Figure 3-157
field and not returned to “A”,
no updated Active Flight PLAN 2/8 >
Plan information will be dis- TRIP PLAN A
played. Figures 3-156 and 3- <
DIRECT KDAL
157 show how the screen TO LIT KHPN
appears when an Active FPL GS 407 >
has been selected and the DIS/DTK -----/---
ETE ------
airplane is airborne. FPL -----/-----
Figure 3-158
Rev. 0
System Operation
5. FR Waypoint - VERIFY
or INSERT as required. PLAN 2/8 >
TRIP PLAN 6
(Figure 3-159) FR KDAL KDAL
<
TO ---- KHPN
GS 407 >
7. TO Waypoint - VERIFY DIS/DTK -----/---
ETE ------
or INSERT as required. FPL ------/------
NOTE: With TRIP PLAN A
selected, the TRIP PLAN leg
will automatically advance to
display DIRECT TO the cur- Figure 3-159
rent NAVIGATION Page TO
Waypoint each time the PLAN 2/8
TRIP PLAN Page is TRIP PLAN A >
accessed. (Figure 3-160) DIRECT KDAL

<
TO LIT KHPN
8. ENTER Key - DE- GS 407
PRESS (Figure 3-161). DIS/DTK -----/--- >
Selected leg information ETE ------

and time distance for the FPL ------/------
remainder of the Flight
Plan are displayed.
Information between the
remaining legs of the Figure 3-160
Flight Plan can be
reviewed by pressing
PLAN 2/8 >
the ENTER Key for each TRIP PLAN 6
subsequent leg. FR KDAL KDAL
<
TO LIT KHPN
9. Groundspeed - VERIFY. GS 407
>
Current aircraft ground- DIS/DTK 258.1/060
speed is displayed ETE 00:38.2
unless a manual entry is FPL 1242/03+03
made.
Figure 3-161
To Enter Manual Groundspeed:

a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over GS
value field.
b. Groundspeed - INSERT.
Rev. 0
System Operation
c. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) will appear adjacent to the

GS field.
To Return to Automatic Groundspeed:

value field.
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? appears in the GS field to
inform pilot of the pending change and current GS is dis-
played in the cursor.
c. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
10. Data - CHECK. When DIRECT is displayed all data except DTK
is updated continuously.
When leg change information or other data is not continuously updat-
ed, it will be recalculated each time:
a. The TRIP PLAN Page is selected.
b. A TRIP PLAN is entered.
c. A leg change is made on the TRIP PLAN Page. ETE and
FPL time are recalculated whenever the groundspeed
changes.
d. Leg or GS change is made on FUEL PLAN Page.
NOTE: ETA @ the destination and RAIM @ the destination are dis-
played only when DIRECT legs are being viewed. (Figure 3-163)
If the TRIP PLAN Page is being displayed during a leg change on
the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN the new TO Waypoint is not displayed.
Exit and return to the TRIP PLAN Page to view the updated TO
Waypoint.
PLAN 2/8
>
11. To review the remainder TRIP PLAN --
of the Flight Plan: FR KLAX ----
<
Position cursor over TO TO KPIA ----
field, DEPRESS ENTER GS 406 >
Key TWICE to call up DIS/DTK 1425.3/051
ETE 03:30.3
next leg. DEPRESS
FPL 1425/03+03
ENTER Key ONCE for
each subsequent leg.
(Ground-speed should
be updated if neces-
sary.) Figure 3-162
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: Information between

any desired waypoints can PLAN 2/8 >
TRIP PLAN --
be reviewed by selecting the DIRECT ----
<
TRIP PLAN Page and enter- TO COS ----
ing a FROM and TO way- GS 404
>
point (Figure 3-162) or per- DIS/DTK 441.5/075
forming the present position ETE 001:5.6
direct procedures (Figure 3- FPL 4410/01+05
ETA @KLIT 01:00
163). If the TO waypoint is RAIM @KLIT AVAIL
not on the selected Flight
Plan, the Flight Plan number
and origin/destination fields Figure 3-163
will display dashes.
To update the TRIP PLAN leg to the current TO waypoint with

an Active Flight Plan selected:
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TRIP
PLAN field.
b. ENTER the letter [A] in the cursor.
c. ENTER Key - DEPRESS twice to display information in the
data fields.
NOTE: If an offset waypoint is in the TO field the OFFSET WPT
Page will appear. The ENTER Key must be depressed again.
The TRIP PLAN leg will display DIRECT TO the current NAVIGA-
TION Page TO waypoint.
Selecting another display page (other than MSG and FUEL PLAN)
and returning to the TRIP PLAN Page will also update the leg with
DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint.
FLIGHT PLAN FUEL PLANNING

The FUEL PLAN Page provides the capability to calculate fuel con-
sumption information for Active or Stored Flight Plans, DIRECT TO
Legs or Random Legs without affecting any of the system’s naviga-
tion functions.
The Fuel Plan Number and Origin and Destination identifiers,
TO/FROM leg and groundspeed value on this page will be identical
to the TRIP PLAN Page. Changing GS or the current leg on the
FUEL PLAN Page also affects the TRIP PLAN Page. Pilot initiated
changes made to the FLOW field on the FUEL STATUS Page are
reflected on the FUEL PLAN Page.
Rev. 0
System Operation
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS

to display FUEL PLAN PLAN 3/8 >
Page. FUEL PLAN A
<
DIRECT KDAL
NOTE: Initially the FUEL TO LIT KHPN
GS 434
PLAN will display the Active >
FLOW 1200
Flight Plan (if selected). The LEG FUEL 271
initial leg displayed will be FPL FUEL 2938
DIRECT TO the current TO
waypoint from NAV page 1. REM @ KHPN 1264
(Figure 3-164)
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over the
FUEL PLAN field. PLAN 3/8 >
FUEL PLAN 3
3. Desired Flight Plan - <
DIRECT KDAL
INSERT Flight Plan TO LIT KHPN
Number (Figure 3-165) GS 450 >
FLOW 1200
or “A” for Active Flight
LEG FUEL ------
Plan. FPL FUEL ------
NOTE: If a flight plan num-
ber is left in the Fuel Plan Figure 3-165
field and not returned to “A”,
no updated Active Flight
Plan information will appear. PLAN 3/8 >
FUEL PLAN 3
5. FR Waypoint - VERIFY
< FR KLAX KLAX
(Figure 3-166) or TO ----- KMDW
INSERT as required. GS 434 >
FLOW (MAN) 1200
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. LEG FUEL ------
FPL FUEL ------
7. TO Waypoint - VERIFY
or INSERT as required.
NOTE: With FUEL PLAN A
selected the FUEL PLAN Figure 3-166
leg automatically advances
to display DIRECT TO the NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint each
time the FUEL PLAN or TRIP PLAN Page is accessed.
Rev. 0
System Operation

PLAN 3/8
twice to display LEG and >
FUEL PLAN 3
FPL FUEL information. FR KLAX KLAX
<
(Figure 3-167). TO DAG KMDW
GS 425 >
9. Groundspeed - VERIFY. FLOW (MAN) 1200
The current aircraft GS is LEG FUEL 324
displayed unless a man- FPL FUEL 4504
ual entry is made.
To Enter Manual
Figure 3-167
Groundspeed:
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value
field.
b. Groundspeed - INSERT.
c. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) appears adjacent to GS
field.
To Return To Automatic Groundspeed:

value field.
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? appears in the GS field to
inform pilot of the pending change and current GS is dis-
played under the cursor.
10. Fuel Flow - VERIFY. Current aircraft total fuel flow is displayed
unless a manual entry is made.
To Enter A Manual Fuel Flow:

a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over FLOW
value field.
b. Fuel Flow - INSERT.
c. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) will appear adjacent to the
FLOW field.
To Return to Automatic Fuel Flow:

a. Line Select Key -DEPRESS to position cursor over FLOW
field.
Rev. 0
System Operation
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? appears adjacent to the

FLOW field to inform pilot of the pending change and current
flow is displayed under cursor.
c. ENTER Key- DEPRESS.
11. Data - CHECK. When DIRECT is displayed all data is continu-
ously updated. If data is not continuously updated, it will be recal-
culated each time:
a. The TRIP PLAN Page has changes in FR/TO leg or GS.
b. The FUEL PLAN Page is selected.
c. Leg or GS change is made on the FUEL PLAN Page. LEG
FUEL and FPL FUEL are recalculated whenever the FLOW
changes.
d. FUEL FLOW is changed on FUEL STATUS Page.
NOTE: The REM @ field only appears when a DIRECT TO leg is
displayed. (Figure 3-169) The REM @ Field will be displayed in yel-
low anytime the REM @ value falls below the reserve fuel pro-
grammed on Plan Page 1.
PLAN 3/8 >
12. To review the remainder FUEL PLAN
of the Flight Plan: posi- FR KLAX KLAX
<
tion cursor over TO field, TO DAG KMDW
DEPRESS ENTER Key GS 425 >
TWICE to call up next FLOW (MAN) 1200
leg. (Groundspeed LEG FUEL 324
and/or Fuel Flow should FPL FUEL 324
be updated if necessary).
NOTE: Information between
any desired waypoints can Figure 3-168
be reviewed by selecting the
FUEL PLAN Page and
entering a FROM - TO leg PLAN 3/8 >
from the Flight Plan. (Figure FUEL PLAN --
3-168) or by executing the <
DIRECT ----
TO COS ----
present position direct proce- GS 457
dures (Figure 3-169). If the FLOW 1300
>
TO waypoint is not on the LEG FUEL 1679

selected Flight Plan, the FPL FUEL 1679
Flight Plan number and ori-
gin/destination fields will dis- REM @ COS 5761
play dashes.
Figure 3-169
Rev. 0
System Operation
To update the Fuel Plan leg to the current TO leg of the Active Flight
Plan:
a. Line Select Key -DEPRESS to position cursor over FUEL
PLAN field.
b. ENTER the letter [A] in the cursor.
c. ENTER Key - DEPRESS TWICE to display information in
data fields.
The FUEL PLAN leg displays DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION
Page TO waypoint.
Selecting another display page (other than MSG and TRIP PLAN)
and returning to FUEL PLAN Page also updates the leg with
DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint.
VERIFYING OR CHANGING DATE AND TIME

DEPRESS the Plan Key until the DATE/GMT Page appears
DATE:
VERIFY or INSERT
Position cursor with Line Select Key and follow procedure in INITIAL-
IZATION PAGE section.
GMT:
VERIFY or INSERT
Position cursor with Line Select Key and follow procedure in INITIAL-
IZATION PAGE section.
PLAN 5/8
NOTE: If GPS time is avail-
able, GMT is automatically DATE 18 FEB 95 >
updated to GPS time. GMT 14:13
(Figure 3-170)
TAKEOFF 20:43
TAKEOFF: LAND 22:45
The GMT at weight-off- FLIGHT TIME 02+02
wheels plus 10 seconds.
(Figure 3-170)
LAND: Figure 3-170
The GMT at weight-on-wheels. This field is not displayed until 10
seconds after weight-on-wheels occurs. (Figure 3-170)
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: TAKEOFF and LAND data may be based on groundspeed

and/or TAS valids depending upon system configuration.
FLIGHT TIME:
The elapsed flight time is displayed in hours and minutes. (Figure 3-170)
NOTE: TAKEOFF and Flight times will be altered if the GMT is
changed during flight.
VERIFYING OR CHANGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT PARAMETERS

This procedure allows the pilot to confirm or adjust basic operating
weight, payload, or fuel to current on board data.
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS to display AIRCRAFT WEIGHT Page
NOTE: BASIC OP WT, PAYLOAD, and FUEL ON BOARD fields will
be blinking if update has not been entered after system power up.
FUEL USED will remain dashes until auto fuel flow is detected.
2. Line Select Key - PLAN 6/8
DEPRESS to place the
cursor over flashing weight AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
field. (Figure 3-171)
BASIC OP WT 7400 >
3. BASIC OP WT - VERI- PAYLOAD 400
FY or INSERT. FUEL ON BOARD 1600 >
VERIFY INPUTS
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. FUEL USED ------- >
GROSS WT ----
5. PAYLOAD - VERIFY or
INSERT.
Figure 3-171
7. FUEL ON BOARD -
PLAN 6/8
VERIFY or INSERT.
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
NOTE: VERIFY INPUTS BASIC OP WT 7400 >
PAYLOAD 400
field disappears and a FUEL ON BOARD 1600 >
GROSS WT value replaces
dashes, and weight fields no FUEL USED ------- >
longer blink. (Figure 3-172) GROSS WT 9400
Figure 3-172
Rev. 2
System Operation
VERIFY FUEL message replaces VERIFY INPUTS message when

MAN fuel flow is being used and FUEL ON BOARD has not been
verified or updated on PLAN Page 1 or 6.
All blinking weight fields must be verified or values inserted using the
ENTER Key, for GROSS WT field to display information.
RESETTING FUEL USED

1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS to display aircraft weight page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to place cursor over FUEL USED.
The field will display ZERO?. (Figure 3-172a)
NOTE: To leave the FUEL USED field without changing the value,
depress the line select key when the field displays ZERO?. The cur-
sor will be removed from the page.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to reset fuel used to zero.
PLAN 6/8
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT
BASIC OP WT 7400 >

PAYLOAD 400
FUEL ON BOARD 1600 >
FUEL USED ZERO? >

GROSS WT 9400
Figure 3-172a
Rev. 2
System Operation
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
The following are various procedures that can be performed during
navigation, when applicable.
PILOT ENTERED LEG CHANGE

1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to select NAVIGATION Page 1. A pilot
entered leg change may be accomplished on any NAVIGATION
Page with a FR/TO field. However, NAVIGATION Page 1 is rec-
ommended to simplify a reasonability check of DIS and DTK.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the FR field.
3. FR Waypoint Identifier - INSERT or VERIFY.
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. If inserting a Waypoint Identifier not
found in the Active Flight Plan, or an offset waypoint, a Waypoint
Page appears. The following procedure should be performed:
a. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY Database Waypoint
or INSERT Waypoint Data.
To Insert Waypoint Coordinates (cursor over POS Field):
(1) Latitude - INSERT (N or S first, then degrees, minutes,
and hundredths).
(2) ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
(3) Longitude - INSERT (E or W first, then degrees, min-
utes, and hundredths).
5. If VERIFYING current FR <
NAVIGATION 1/4
Waypoint - DEPRESS FR HEMET 00:43
ENTER and cursor box <
TO CORLA 01:01
expands to enclose both
DIS 120.4
FR and TO Waypoint ETE 00:17.4
Identifiers, which activates DTK 069
the TO field. GS 119
WIND 327/ 13 >
6. TO Waypoint Identifier - -AUTO-
INSERT or VERIFY.
Rev. 0
System Operation

a. Waypoint Page Co-
ordinates - VERIFY DATABASE WPT 1/1
Database Waypoint
or INSERT Waypoint WAYPOINT CORLA
Data. (Figure 3-174)
POS N 33 38.30
To Insert Waypoint W116 16.70
Coordinates (cursor over
POS Field):
(1) Latitude - IN- NDB-ENTER
SERT (N or S
first, then de- Figure 3-174
grees, minutes,
and hundredths).
(2) ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
(3) Longitude - INSERT (E or W first, then de-grees, min-
utes, tenths and hundredths).
NOTE: The Pilot Entered ACTIVE FPL 1/2
Leg Change procedure FR HEMET 7
inserts a “fence” indicated by <
TO CORLA 00:20 8
(----) on the DIRECT TO ------
and ACTIVE FPL pages pre- <
KSNA -KDTW
venting Auto Leg Change MUSEL
HEMET
beyond the TO waypoint, if <
DEPART
>
the TO waypoint was not on ARRIVE ETA >

<
the original Active Flight Plan APPROACH ERASE
(Figure 3-175) The MSG
light illuminates and the Figure 3-175
SYSTEM MESSAGE Page
displays NO AUTO LEG CHG, however the AUTO field on NAVIGA-
TION Page 1 continues to display AUTO.
To jump the fence and continue with the flight plan use the d Key
then the Line Select Keys to position the cursor over a way point
beyond the fence then press ENTER Key
Rev. 0
System Operation
PREVENTING AUTOMATIC LEG CHANGES

The Auto Leg change function allows the system to automatically
sequence from waypoint to waypoint on the Active Flight Plan. When
the system is initialized it is in the Automatic Leg Change Mode
unless changed by the pilot. The following procedure inhibits auto-
matic leg changes.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over -AUTO-.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS.
<
NAVIGATION 1/4
Cursor field displays FR HEMET 00:43
MAN? to inform the pilot TO CORLA 01:01
<
of the pending change.
(Figure 3-176) DIS 120.4
ETE 00:17.4
4. ENTER Key - DTK 069
DEPRESS. The cursor GS 119
disappears and -MAN- WIND >
327/ 13
MAN?
remains in the field con-
firming that leg changes
must be made manually. Figure 3-176
NO AUTO LEG CHG
message appears on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page, however
the MSG light does not illuminate.
Returning to Automatic Leg Change Mode
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over -MAN-.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS. Cursor field displays AUTO? to inform
the pilot of the pending change.
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The cursor disappears and -AUTO-
remains in the field confirming return to the Automatic Leg
Change Mode. NO AUTO LEG CHG message on the SYSTEM
MESSAGES Page disappears unless the current TO waypoint is
the last waypoint on the Active Flight Plan.
NOTE: Certain HDG Intercept and Pseudo VORTAC Procedures
automatically put the leg change mode into -MAN-. The pilot must
determine if -MAN- or -AUTO- is appropriate then select the desired
leg change mode.
Rev. 0
System Operation
DEAD RECKONING (DR) TO PRIMARY NAVIGATION MODE -

VLF (RPU) ONLY EQUIPPED
NOTE: System automatically reverts to the Primary Navigation
Mode 30 seconds after the NAV RDY-VERIFY POSITION message
appears. VERIFY POSITION message and the MSG light remains
on. To verify position use Position Check and Update Procedure.
NAV RDY - VERIFY POSITION message only appears on the SYS-
TEM MESSAGES Page following a system DR.
POSITION CHECK AND UPDATE PROCEDURES

Using a Sensor
A position update may also be performed using any one of the navi-
gating interfaced position sensors as a reference. The following pro-
cedure describes this action:
1. HOLD Key -DEPRESS. POSITION FIX
2. Line Select Key - POS N 40 59.80

DEPRESS ONCE to W096 17.00
place the cursor over the >
IDENT ----
FIX field. The field will dis-
<
FIX ? N 40 59.80 >
play FIX? (Figure 3-177) W096 17.00
DIF S 0.00
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS E 0.00
until the desired sensor
(preferably the GPS sen- Figure 3-177
sor) to be used as the
update reference appears
in the cursor. The position POSITION FIX
of each sensor will appear
sequentially along with the POS N 40 59.80
DIF to the composite posi- W096 17.00
tion. (Figure 3-178) >
IDENT ----
GPS ? N 40 59.70 >
The cursor will advance to W096 17.20
DIF N 0.10
the DIF field displaying the E 0.20
direction and distance in
degrees, minutes, and
hundredths of minutes Figure 3-178
from the sensor position
to the composite position.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to update composite position to the select-
ed sensor. NAV Page 1 will be displayed.
Rev. 2
System Operation
Over Known Point

This procedure is used to cross check or update the system by over-
flying a known reference point such as a radio navaid or visual check
point.
1. HOLD Key - DEPRESS over known point.
2. Known Point - ENTER using either:
Option 1: IDENT
or
Option 2: Coordinates for check points not in memory.
Option 1: IDENT
a. IDENT - INSERT.
c. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY.
d. ENTER Key - POSITION FIX
DEPRESS. The DIF
display shows the POS N 40 55.30
direction and dis- W096 47.30
tance in degrees, >
IDENT LNK
minutes and hun- FIX N 40 55.40
dredths of minutes < >
W096 44.50
from the FIX position DIF S 0.10
to the composite W 2.80
position. (Figure 3-
179)
Figure 3-179
e. ENTER Key -
DEPRESS if position
POSITION FIX
update is desired.
NAVIGATION Page POS N 40 55.30
1 is displayed. W096 47.30
>
Option 2: Coordinates IDENT ----
<
FIX N 40 55.40 >
a. Line Select Key W096 44.50
(cursor over FIX DIF ---- -----
coordinates). ---- -----
(Figure 3-180)
Figure 3-180
Rev. 0
System Operation
b. Latitude - INSERT (N or S first, then degrees, minutes, and

hundredths).
d. Longitude - INSERT (E or W first, then degrees, minutes,
and hundredths).
e. ENTER Key - DEPRESS.
The DIF display shows the direction and distance in degrees,
minutes and hundredths of minutes from the FIX position to
the composite position.
f. ENTER Key - DEPRESS if position update is desired. NAVI-
GATION Page 1 is displayed
NOTE: If coordinate field flashes after entry, verify coordinates and
depress ENTER again.
If System Updated:
The VLF (RPU) sensor, LCS, and the VPU interfaced to the updated
CDU are updated as well as the composite position, GPS, and IRS
sensors are not updated. Only IRS velocities are required to con-
tribute to the composite position.
If Update Not Desired:
3. NAV, PLAN, FPL, TUNE, VNAV, HDG, or d Key - DEPRESS
to cancel the position fix.
Using An Offset
This procedure is used to cross-check or update the system using an
offset from a known point such as VORTAC Radial and Distance.
Record Radial and Distance at the same time as performing Step 1.
NOTE: Overflying a predetermined radial and distance is not neces-
sary.
1. HOLD Key - DEPRESS.
2. Offset Waypoint IDENT - INSERT.
NOTE: If necessary, refer to the procedure for Creating An Offset
Waypoint.
Rev. 0
System Operation

4. Recorded Radial - INSERT.
6. Recorded Distance - INSERT (NM and tenths).
OFFSET WPT 1/1
VERIFY for reasonabili- WAYPOINT LNK*
ty. (Figure 3-181)
RAD 230.0 >
9. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. DIS 15.0
POS N 40 47.30
The DIF display shows W097 01.20
the direction and dis-
<
tance in degrees, min- OK? ENTER
utes, and hundredths of
minutes from the FIX
position to the composite Figure 3-181
position. (Figure 3-182)
10. ENTER Key - POSITION FIX
DEPRESS, if position
POS N 40 49.30
update desired. W097 03.20
If System Updated : IDENT LNK*
>
The VLF (RPU) sensor, LCS, <

FIX N 40 47.70 >
W097 01.50
and the VPU interfaced to DIF N 1.60
the updated CDU are updat- W 1.70
ed as well as the composite
position. GPS, and IRS sen-
sors are not updated. Only Figure 3-182
IRS velocities are required to
contribute to the composite position.
to cancel the position fix.
Rev. 0
System Operation
PARALLEL COURSE
This procedure is used to establish an offset course (steering refer-
ence) parallel to the current leg. This field is inactive when in
APPROACH ARMED mode (within 30 nm of the destination airport).
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION 2/4 Page with
SXTK.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over SXTK field.
3. L or R Key - DEPRESS.
4. Offset Distance - INSERT (NM and tenths). The maximum value
that can be entered is 99.9 NM.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. XTK deviation remains referenced to
the original track. However the HSI will display a centered nee-
dle when the SXTK has been captured. BRG, DIS, ETE remain
referenced to the current TO waypoint.
NOTE: If the system is coupled to the autopilot, the roll command
will turn the aircraft to intercept the parallel course at the selected
SXTK distance.
If XTK is greater than 12.5NM, VNAV will become INVALID and no
vertical deviation information will be displayed.
Canceling Parallel Course
<
display page with SXTK. FR TBC 15:41
<
TO FMN 16:00
DEPRESS to position WIND % 11 8 &
cursor over SXTK field . ETE - KDTW 18:59
FUEL - KDTW 1377
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS. TKE R 008
The cursor field will dis- XTK ENRTE L 5.00 >
play CANCEL? to SXTK CANCEL?
inform the pilot of the
pending change. Figure 3-183
(Figure 3-183).
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The steering reference will be to the
original desired track.
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: Any Leg Change (manual or automatic) including DIRECT

TO will also cancel selected crosstrack (SXTK) and provide “on
course” guidance to the TO waypoint. If a holding pattern is pro-
grammed at the TO waypoint during parallel course guidance, the TO
waypoint will be bypassed and no hold will occur unless the SXTK is
cancelled prior to reaching the TO waypoint.
MANUAL MAGNETIC VARIATION ENTRY

A manual magnetic variation entry is required north of 70° N latitude
and south of 60°S latitude.
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION 3/4 Page with VAR.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over VAR field.
3. Local Variation - INSERT (E or W first).
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) will be annunciated adjacent to
the VAR field.
RETURNING TO AUTOMATIC VARIATION

This checklist must be accomplished to return to Automatic Variation
following a Manual Variation entry.
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display page with VAR.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over VAR field.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? will appear in the VAR field to
inform the pilot of pending change. The automatic variation
value will appear in the cursor.
SELECTING ETE, ETA, DIS, OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION (Active

Flight Plan Page)
The pilot can view the estimated time enroute, the estimated time of
arrival, the distance, or altitude constraints of waypoints on the Active
Flight Plan.
1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to display ACTIVE FPL Page.
Rev. 0
System Operation

DEPRESS to position ACTIVE FPL 1/1
FR RW19R 1
cursor over ETE, ETA,
<
TO ORD ----- 2
DIS, or ALT field. AZO ----- 3
(Figure 3-184) KDTW ----- 4
<
######
< >
to display desired option. DEPART
<
ARRIVE ETE? >
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS APPROACH ERASE
to select option. (Figure
3-185)
Figure 3-184
NOTE: To display waypoint
numbers (1,2,3,4,etc.) when ACTIVE FPL 1/1
the DIS option is selected, a FR RW19R 1
Flight Plan must be selected <
TO ORD 00:42 2
and a leg defined. To dis- AZO 00:16 3
play waypoint numbers <
KDTW 01:11 4
######
when the ETE or ETA option
is selected, a valid ground <
DEPART
>
speed is required. Altitude ARRIVE ETE

< >
constraints and waypoint off- APPROACH ERASE
sets are only displayed if
programmed.
Figure 3-185
SELECTING NAV PAGE ETA OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION (NAV
Page 1, 2, or 3)
The pilot can view the estimated time of arrival or altitude constraint
of TO waypoint on the NAV Pages.
Selecting ALT Display:
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to <
NAVIGATION 1/4
DIRECT 23:03
display the NAVIGA- TO BDF 05:22
TION Page. < >
DIS 1328.5
2. Line Select Key - ETE 18:59
DEPRESS to position DTK 049
>
the cursor over the ETA GS 228
field. (Figure 3-186) WIND 230/ 8
>
-AUTO-
ALT? appears in cursor.
Figure 3-186
Rev. 0
System Operation

NAVIGATION 1/4
to display Altitude <
DIRECT 23:03
Constraint. (Figure 3- TO BDF 12000G
< >
187)
DIS 1328.5
NOTE: Altitude constraint ETE 05:46.3
and waypoint offset are only DTK 049 >
displayed if a VNAV GS 228
Waypoint is programmed at WIND 230/ 8 >
the TO Waypoint and VNAV -AUTO-
is valid. The altitude cannot
be changed on these pages. Figure 3-187
The ALT display should
always be selected during SID, STAR, or Approach procedures.
To Return to ETA:
5. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the alti-
tude constraint field.
6. BACK Key - DEPRESS. ETA? appears in cursor.
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to display ETA.
INITIALIZATION ENROUTE VLF (RPU) ONLY

This procedure allows the pilot to initialize the system in flight when
only VLF is available. If the aircraft has lost power for more than 7
seconds refer to Special Procedure, Loss of Power In-Flight, for ini-
tialization procedure.
POWER ON: (Five minutes minimum prior to reaching known point.)
1. ON Key - DEPRESS.
2. BRT Key - ADJUST as required.
3. DATE and GMT - VERIFY. If DATE or GMT is incorrect it may
be updated as described in the INITIALIZATION Page proce-
dures.
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to place the cursor over POS field.
5. POS Coordinates - VERIFY displayed.
NOTE: POS coordinate accuracy is not critical on this step as an
update will follow.
Rev. 0
System Operation
7. Manual TAS - INSERT (if required). If necessary refer to the pro-

cedure for Manual TAS Entry under Special Procedures.
Enter Primary Navigation Mode: (Prior to reaching known point)
NOTE: This step is automatic with weight-off-wheels or at 150 knots
Auto-TAS.
8. NAV RDY MSG - VERIFY. If the system enters the Primary
Navigation Mode automatically, VERIFY POSITION is displayed
on the SYSTEM MESSAGE Page, and Step 9 and 10 are not
required.
10. ENTER Key - DEPRESS TWICE
Position Update:
A position update must be performed to give the system an accurate
starting position. An update may be accomplished over a known
point or by using an offset. If necessary, refer to the procedure for
Position Check and Update.
11. HOLD Key - DEPRESS over known point.
12. IDENT or Known Point Coordinates - ENTER.
If Waypoint Page appears:
a. Waypoint Page Coordinates - VERIFY or INSERT.
b. ENTER Key- DEPRESS.
13. DIF - CHECK. Since the system was initialized in-flight using an
approximate position, the DIF check is not used to determine the
suitability of an update, but is used to check for reasonability or
manual entry errors.
Enter the following information as required:
• Active Flight Plan
• Initial Leg
• Manual Magnetic Variation (only for latitudes north of 70N and
south of 60S)
Rev. 0
System Operation
MANUAL TAS ENTRY

only VLF is available
NOTE: Manual TAS cannot be entered if a valid TAS is present from
the Airdata Computer.
If the system is using an unaided VLF/OMEGA sensor (no heading,
TAS or IRS velocities available) manual TAS entry is required when
fewer than three stations are received. MAN TAS REQD message
appears on the SYSTEM MESSAGE Page.
TAS must be manually entered if the aircraft does not have an auto-
TAS system or the auto-TAS input has failed. If TAS is entered man-
ually, no wind will be displayed. If the auto-TAS input returns, it will
override the manual entry.
To Enter Manual TAS:
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to
display page with TAS. NAVIGATION 3/4
<
FR ABQ 01:09
2. Line Select Key - TO PGS 01:57
<
DEPRESS to place the
cursor over TAS field. DRIFT R 002 >
VAR E 12
3. TAS - INSERT in knots. TAS (MAN) 420 >
HDG 269
4. ENTER Key - BRG 219
DEPRESS. (MAN) will TK 267
appear adjacent to the
TAS field. (Figure 3-
Figure 3-188
188)
NOTE: Maximum manual TAS value that can be entered is 850
knots.
MANUAL HEADING ENTRY

only if IRS or VLF is available
A manual heading entry will be possible only if the system is using a
VLF/OMEGA sensor with H-field antenna and the automatic heading
input has failed. If the automatic heading input returns it will override
the manual entry without operator action.
If the manual heading is required a “MAN HDG REQD” message will
appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
Rev. 0
System Operation
To Enter A Manual Heading:

<
display page with HDG. FR ABQ 01:09
<
TO PGS 01:57
DEPRESS to place the DRIFT R 002 >
cursor over HDG field. VAR E 12
TAS 420 >
3. HDG - INSERT. HDG (MAN) 269
BRG 219
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. TK 267
(MAN) will appear adja-
cent to the HDG field. Figure 3-189
(Figure 3-189)
NOTE: SYSTEM MESSAGES Page will display USING MAN HDG
message.
VLF/OMEGA STATION DESELECTION

The following procedure allows a VLF Communication or Omega sta-
tion to be removed from an RPU’s navigation solution.
NOTE: Stations may not be NAVIGATION 4/4
automatically deselected by
the computer if unsuitable for IDENT ------ >
navigation.
POS
N 33 43.33 >
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to W116 54.37
display NAVIGATION VLF ? 0.1 VPU 0.0 >
<
Page 4. LCS 0.1 >
IRS 0.2 GPS 0.1
DEPRESS to position
the cursor over VLF sen- Figure 3-190
sor field. (Figure 3-190)
VLF SUBSECTION 3/4
<
WSH 99 +
4. NAV or NXT Key - AUS -- TOO FAR
DEPRESS to sequence <
ANT -- -
through VLF SUBSEC- MNE 99 +
TION. Select either VLF HAW 73 UNSTABLE
<
JPN 76 SPARE
Comm or Omega Station
PTR‘ 35 +
List Page. (Figure 3-191) <
ANN 99 +
Figure 3-191
Rev. 0
System Operation

DEPRESS to position VLF SUBSECTION 3/4
cursor over station iden- WSH 99 +
<
tifier to be deselected. AUS -- TOO FAR
(Figure 3-191) ANT -- -
<
MNE 99 +
6. BACK Key - DEPRESS. HAW 73 DESELECT?
<
(Figure 3-192) DESE- JPN 76 SPARE
LECT? will appear to <
PTR‘ 35 +
inform the pilot of the ANN 99 +
pending change.
to DESELECT station.
To restore a deselected station:
a. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the sta-
tion identifier to be restored.
b. BACK Key - DEPRESS. RESTORE? will appear to inform the
pilot of the pending change.
c. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to restore the station.
LORAN-C MANUAL OPERATIONS

At “Power On” the Loran-C sensor is in the automatic (AUTO) track-
ing mode. The following procedure places the Loran-C in the Manual
Enroute Mode to allow specific Loran-C chain to be selected.
This procedure may be used to evaluate station reliability by observ-
ing Signal to Noise Ratios (SNR) and Envelope Cycle Discrepancies
(ECD). Use caution when using this procedure enroute. When navi-
gating on dual chains, manual selection may cause sensor to DR.
Entering MANUAL NAVIGATION 4/4

Enroute Mode
1. NAV or NXT Key - IDENT ------ >
DEPRESS to display NAVI- POS N 33 43.33 >

GATION Page 4. W116 54.37
VLF 0.1 VPU1 0.0 >
DEPRESS to position cursor LCS1? 0.1

< >
over Loran-C sensor. (Figure IRS 0.2 GPS 0.1
3-193)
Figure 3-193
Rev. 0
System Operation

LCS1 SUBSECTION 3/3
to access Loran-C Sensor
Status Pages. AUTO
<
9960 MXYZ NE USA
4. NAV or NXT Key - 8970 MWX GT LKE
DEPRESS twice to display
Loran-C Sensor Status Page
3. (Figure 3-194)

DEPRESS to position cursor Figure 3-194
over GRI. (Figure 3-195)
LCS1 SUBSECTION 3/3
6. BACK Key - DEPRESS <

AUTO
to display usable GRIs. 9960 MXYZ NE USA
8970 MWX GT LKE
NOTE: A GRI number can

also be entered directly.

to select desired GRI and to
enter MANUAL Enroute LCS1 SUBSECTION 3/3
Mode. (Figure 3-196)
<
MANUAL >
9960 NE USA
<
M 85 4.5 TRACK
<
W 30 5.1 TRACK
X 70 6.0 SPARE
<
Y -- --- TOO FAR
Z 45 4.0 TRACK
Figure 3-196
Loran-C Station Deselection

NOTE: This procedure should be used with caution since stations are
automatically deselected by the computer if unsuitable for navigation.
Rev. 0
System Operation

LCS1 SUBSECTION 3/3
DEPRESS to position cursor
over station identifier to be MANUAL
< >
deselected. (Figure 3-197) 9960 NE USA
<
M 85 4.5 TRACK
(Figure 3-198). DESELECT? W 30 5.1 TRACK
<
will appear to inform the pilot X 70 6.0 SPARE
of the impending change. <
Y -- --- TOO FAR
Z 45 4.0 TRACK
10. ENTER Key -
DEPRESS to DESELECT
station. Figure 3-197
LCS1 SUBSECTION 3/3

To restore a deselected
station: MANUAL
< >
a.Line Select Key - 9960 NE USA
M 85 4.5 TRACK
the cursor over W 30 5.1 DESELECT?

<
the station identifier to X 70 6.0 SPARE
be restored. <
Y -- --- TOO FAR
Z 45 4.0 TRACK
b. BACK Key -
DEPRESS. RESTORE?
will appear to inform t h e Figure 3-198
pilot of the pending
change.
c. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to restore the station.
Returning to AUTO Enroute Mode

1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to
display NAVIGATION Page NAVIGATION 4/4
4.
IDENT ------ >
DEPRESS to position cursor POS N 33 43.33 >
W116 54.37
over Loran-C sensor. (Figure VLF 0.1 VPU1 0.0
3-199) < >
LCS1? 0.1
IRS 0.2 GPS 0.1
>
to access Loran-C
Subsection Pages.
Figure 3-199
Rev. 0
System Operation
4. NAV or NXT Key -

LCS1 SUBSECTION 3/3
DEPRESS twice to display
Loran-C Sensor Status Page MANUAL
< >
3. (Figure 3-200) 9960 NE USA
<
M 85 4.5 TRACK
W 30 5.1 TRACK
X 70 6.0 SPARE
DEPRESS to position cursor Y -- --- TOO FAR
<
over MANUAL. (Figure 3- Z 45 4.0 TRACK
200)
Figure 3-200
MANUAL field will change to LCS1 SUBSECTION 3/3
display [AUTO?] prompt.
(Figure 3-201) <
AUTO? >
9960 NE USA
<
M 85 4.5 TRACK
7. ENTER Key - DEPRESS W 30 5.1 TRACK

<
to enter AUTO Enroute X 70 6.0 SPARE
Mode. <
Y -- --- TOO FAR
Z 45 4.0 TRACK
Figure 3-201
SENSOR DESELECTION
When a sensor is contributing to the composite position (as indicated
by the radial error value displayed in green), the deselection of a posi-
tion sensor on NAVIGATION Page 4 completely eliminates the sen-
sor’s contribution to the composite (blended) position. This is only rec-
ommended if the pilot can determine which position keeping sensor is
inaccurate or by flying over a known location and then comparing the
sensor position against the known position.
NOTE: The Loran-C sensor (LCS) will be deselected automatically
when the aircraft is flown or powered up outside the continental USA.
See Section 4 for the Loran-C Automatic Deselection Boundary Map.
The Loran-C sensor will be restored automatically when the aircraft
re-enters the bounded area. The sensor can be manually reselected
outside the boundary by using the restore procedure below.
Rev. 0
System Operation
To Deselect a Sensor:
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS
until NAVIGATION NAVIGATION 4/4
Page 4 is displayed. IDENT ------ >
POS
N 33 43.33
DEPRESS to position W116 54.37
>
the cursor over sensor to VLF ? OUT? VPU 0.0

< >
be deselected.
LCS 0.1 >
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS. IRS 0.2 GPS 0.1
OUT? will appear to
inform the pilot of the
pending change. (Figure Figure 3-202
3-202)
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. “OUT” will remain in the sensor field
and “DESELECTED” appears beside the corresponding sensor
on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page.
To Restore a Sensor:
a. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 4.
b. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over sensor to
be restored.
c. BACK Key - DEPRESS. IN? appears to inform the pilot of
the pending change.
d. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to restore the sensor.
NOTE: If GPS is deselected, the remaining sensor radial error fields
will turn from yellow to green, indicating that those sensors are now
contributing to the composite position. Under normal circumstances,
the GPS is the sole contributor to the composite position. The IRS
contributes to GPS accuracy by providing GPS with velocity aiding. It
will always be displayed in green.
Rev. 0
System Operation
EXTERNAL WAYPOINT ACCEPTANCE

Up to 99 external waypoints may be accepted from an interfaced
radar or EFIS system.
When a waypoint is generat- <
NAVIGATION 1/4
ed from this equipment, a DIRECT 22:36
DIRECT TO leg change is <
TO EX#03 22:42
made to that waypoint. DIS 17.9
ETE 00:04.3
The generated waypoint will
DTK 070
be designated EX#01 to GS ---
>
EX#99. (Figure 3-203) WIND ---/--- >

-AUTO-
As the External Waypoint
(EX#) is off the Flight Plan it
will be separated from the Figure 3-203
Active Flight Plan waypoint
sequence by a fence - - - - -.
“NO AUTO LEG CHG” mes- <
DIRECT 1/2 >
sage will appear on the SYS- TO EX#03 PUB
TEM MESSAGES Page. <
----- HLC >
KSNA PWE
The following procedure may MUSEL LMN
< >
be used to link the EX# way- HEMET BURKK
point into the Flight Plan TRM BDF
<
sequence. EED* GSH
<
TBC KDTW
1. d Key - DEPRESS. FMN *****
The display will show
Direct To the EX# way-
point with the waypoints Figure 3-204
of the Active Flight Plan
listed below. (Figure 3-
204). <
DIRECT 1/2 >
EX#03 PUB
----- HLC >
DEPRESS to position KSNA PWE
MUSEL TO LMN
the cursor over the way- <
HEMET BURKK
>
point to follow the EX# TRM BDF

<
waypoint. (Figure 3-205) EED* GSH
<
TBC KDTW
3. EX# Waypoint Identifier - FMN *****
INSERT.
NOTE: The EX# waypoint identifier will flash if an unassigned num-
ber is entered. EX# waypoint coordinates can ONLY be assigned by
an external source (radar or EFIS).
Rev. 0
System Operation
5. Waypoint Page
Coordinates - VERIFY. DIRECT 1/2
< >
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. EX#03 PUB
<
----- HLC >
7. Waypoint Sequence - KSNA PWE
VERIFY. (Figure 3-206) <
MUSEL TO EX#03 >
HEMET BURKK
TRM BDF
EED* GSH
CDU display will automat- TBC KDTW
<
ically advance to NAVI- FMN *****
GATION Page 1. “NO
AUTO LEG CHG” mes-
sage will be removed Figure 3-206
from the SYSTEM MES-
SAGES Page.
PRESENT POSITION AS A WAYPOINT

A special waypoint location is reserved for storing present position
coordinates as a waypoint. The identifier for this waypoint is inserted
as “#1.” As well, the identifier may be used as a parent identifier for
an offset waypoint by adding an asterisk (“*”).
Waypoint #1 is redefined each time the HOLD Key is depressed. An
example of the application of waypoint #1 is to store the coordinates of
a point overflown to which you may wish to return. This is accom-
plished by depressing the HOLD Key directly over that desired point.
In this case these coordinates would be stored under identifier “#1”
until either the HOLD Key is depressed again, updating #1, or the
system is shut down.
NOTE: Since waypoint #1 is frequently redefined, it is not retained in
non-volatile memory and the identifier #1 cannot be entered on a
stored flight plan. However, the coordinates of WPT #1 can be
stored on a Flight Plan by making them part of a pilot entered way-
point. See page 3-131 for creating pilot entered waypoints. It does,
however, use up one of the 999 available waypoints, as do #OFF, #0
and EX (external) Waypoints.
Rev. 0
System Operation
NAVIGATION AT EXTREME LATITUDES (North of 70° N or

South of 60° S)
CAUTION: THE PROCEDURES LISTED IN THIS SECTION CON-
TAIN INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION OF THE GNS-X C129 AT
SPECIFIED LATITUDES BEYOND THE AUTO-COMPUTED MAG-
NETIC VARIATION MODEL. IN ALL CASES THE FLIGHT CREW
OF ANY AIRCRAFT OPERATING AT THESE LATITUDES MUST
CONSULT THE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT IN ORDER TO
OBTAIN SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY.
Manual Magnetic Variation Entry
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS to display until NAVIGATION Page 3 is
displayed.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR value
field.
3. Local Variation - INSERT (E or W first).
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. (MAN) will be annunciated adjacent to
the VAR field.
Returning To Automatic Variation
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 3 is displayed.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR value
field.
3. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO? will be displayed to advise the
pilot of the impending change.
NOTE: Insertion of E or W followed by ENTER will also revert the
system to Auto Variation.
TRUE HEADING
Aircraft Equipped With TRUE/MAG Switch

1. TRUE/MAG Switch - Place in TRUE position.
NOTE: Once the TRUE/MAG Switch is placed in the TRUE position
T is displayed adjacent to BRG, HDG and TK since they are now ref-
erenced to true north.
Rev. 0
System Operation
Aircraft Not Equipped With A TRUE/MAG Switch

NOTE: This procedure must be accompanied by the input of TRUE
heading into the system.
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 3 appears.
2. LINE SELECT Key - DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR
field.
3. INSERT E0.
NOTE: The Variation is now E0 and the system will be referenced to
TRUE north. There will be no T annunciation adjacent to BRG, HDG
and TK.
SET HEADING ENTRY

When an IRS is placed in the
Attitude Mode the message < NAVIGATION 3/4
ENTR SET HDG appears on FR ABQ 01:09
the SENSOR MESSAGES <
TO‘ PGS 01:57
Page. It is necessary to
DRIFT R 002
enter a set heading in order >
VAR E 12
to allow the IRS to output TAS 420 >
valid magnetic heading data. HDG ---
BRG 219
To Enter A Set Heading: TK 267
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS
until NAVIGATION Page Figure 3-207
3 is displayed. The
heading field may
appear as dashes. NAVIGATION 3/4
<
(Figure 3-207) FR ABQ 01:09
<
TO‘ PGS 01:57
DEPRESS to place the DRIFT R 002 >
cursor over HDG field. VAR E 12
The last valid heading TAS 420 >
value appears. (Figure HDG 269
BRG 219
3-208)
TK 267
3. HDG - VERIFY or INSERT.
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: In some cases, (MAN) will appear in the HDG field and the
SYSTEM MESSAGES Page will display USING MAN HDG mes-
sage.
LOSS OF POWER IN FLIGHT

THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE USED IN A REMOTE
AREA WHERE NAVAIDS ARE UNAVAILABLE AND THERE IS
REASON TO BELIEVE THE SENSORS CONTRIBUTING TO THE
COMPOSITE POSITION MAY BE IN ERROR.
The procedure allows the pilot to initialize enroute when the aircraft
has sustained a loss of power for more than 7 seconds. The Power
Off Waypoint, “#OFF”, provides a snapshot of system data at the
moment power was lost.
To Initialize when power is restored:
NOTE: When power returns, system performs Self Test and displays
the INITIALIZATION Page.
1. DATE and GMT - VERIFY
or ENTER current DATE POSITION FIX
and GMT if required.
POS N 40 55.30
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS W095 47.30
to place the cursor over >
IDENT #OFF
the POS field, if required. FIX ---------
< >
NOTE: The coordinates are ---------
DIF ---------
a rolling display of the real ---------
time blended position of the
sensors being updated.
Figure 3-209
to accept real time position.
SPECIAL WPT
WAYPOINT #OFF
5. Power Off Waypoint
IDENT - INSERT “#OFF”. POS N 38 37.20
(Figure 3-209). W105 37.00
GMT OFF 21:50
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. MINUTES OFF 00.6
LAST TK 060
7. MINUTES OFF, LAST LAST GS 407
TK, LAST GS - VERIFY
and RECORD for future
use. (Figure 3-210). Figure 3-210
Rev. 0
System Operation
8. BACK Key - DEPRESS to return to HOLD Page.

NOTE: An Offset Waypoint (#OFF*) can be input with a radial based
on the LAST TK value and distance calculated from the LAST GS
value as well as the time elapsed from power off, provided significant
changes to aircraft track or groundspeed have not been made. If the
aircraft has turned or if the speed has changed, the pilot should esti-
mate the track and distance traveled since the loss of power.
9. Offset Waypoint IDENT - INSERT.
10. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. OFFSET WPT 1/1
11. Recorded or Estimated
WAYPOINT #OFF*
Radial - INSERT LAST
TK value or averaged RAD 060.0 >
value. (Figure 3-211) DIS -----
POS --------
12. Distance - INSERT cal- --------
culated distance in NM
and tenths. 818 WPTS AVAIL

Figure 3-211
VERIFY for reasonability.
16. DIF - CHECK
If Update Desired:
17. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The VLF (RPU) sensor and the VPU
interfaced to the updated CDU are updated as well as the com-
posite position.
to cancel the HOLD.
CREATING/CHANGING PILOT ENTERED

(PERSONALIZED) WAYPOINTS
A personalized waypoint may be created by entering a non-NDB
(Nav Data Base) waypoint identifier and inserting the desired position
coordinates on the Waypoint Page.
Rev. 0
System Operation
The CDU has non-volatile storage for up to 999 waypoints which are
retained in memory ONLY if the waypoints are entered on a Stored
Flight Plan. The ICAO identifiers stored in the database can not be
used for personalized waypoints.
Attempting to enter more than 999 pilot entered waypoints in memory
causes MEM FULL to be displayed on the FLIGHT PLAN Page.
The message light will flash and WPT MEM FULL will be displayed
on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
Select the desired Flight Plan and position the cursor over the
desired field. If necessary, refer to the procedure for Creating a Flight
Plan or Modifying a Flight Plan.
Creating Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints:

1. Personalized IDENT- INSERT.
2. ENTER Key- DEPRESS.
(Figure 3-212) PILOT ENTERED WPT
3. Latitude- INSERT (N or S WAYPOINT GLOBAL

first, then degrees, min-
POS -------- >
utes, and hundredths). --------
5. Longitude- INSERT (E
944 WPTS AVAIL
or W first, degrees, then
minutes, and hun-
dredths). Figure 3-212
6. ENTER Key- DEPRESS. The display will change to the appro-
priate FLIGHT PLAN or DIRECT Page.
Changing Pilot Entered (Personalized) Waypoints:

1. Personalized IDENT- INSERT.
2. ENTER Key- DEPRESS. PILOT ENTERED WPT Page will
appear.
3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over POS field.
4. Repeat Steps 4 - 6 above.
NOTE: If an offset waypoint from a pilot entered waypoint is pro-
grammed, the RAD and DIS can be changed, but the coordinates
cannot be manually inserted.
Rev. 0
System Operation
CREATING AN OFFSET WAYPOINT

This procedure enables the system to create a waypoint at a given
radial and distance from a known point. The known point (parent
waypoint) may be any stored personalized or database waypoint.
An offset waypoint may be inserted in any Waypoint IDENT field.
The offset waypoint is retained in memory after system shutdown
ONLY if entered on a Stored Flight Plan.
Position the cursor over the desired waypoint IDENT field.
NOTE: The offset waypoint uses station declination, if available, or it
uses the calculated magnetic variation of the parent waypoint. All
waypoints defined by a VHF Navaid in the National/International
Airspace System are based on the VHF Navaid station declination.
Since the magnetic variation and station declination may not be the
same at a given Navaid, the calculated position and the defined
FMS position may differ.
<
FLIGHT PLAN 6 1/2
1. Parent Waypoint IDENT- KDAL - CMK
INSERT with an * follow- <
CHAD*
ing the entry. (Figure 3- KHART
213) <
19DFW
ELD
NOTE: More than one offset MEI >
<
waypoint is allowed from one DEPART XFILL
ARRIVE SELECT
parent, using *, *1, *A1, etc., <
APPROACH ERASE
>
as identifying notation.
2. ENTER Key-DEPRESS. Figure 3-213
NOTE: If field blinks, Parent Waypoint does not exist in CDU memo-
ry or in database and must be defined on a Flight Plan Page.
3. Desired Radial- INSERT. The degrees can be entered as whole
numbers and the .0 will be loaded automatically. i.e. type 77,
077.0 will be displayed. If a of a degree is desired, all 4 digits
must be entered. 0775 will be displayed as 077.5, 3001 will be
displayed as 300.1 etc.
4. ENTER Key-DEPRESS.
5. Desired Distance-INSERT (NM and tenths, 1999.9 NM maxi-
mum).
Rev. 0
System Operation
7. POS Coordinates- VER-

IFY for reasonability. OFFSET WPT 1/1
(Figure 3-214)
WAYPOINT CHAD*
RAD 030.0 >
NOTE: An Offset Waypoint DIS 12.3
is used in the same manner POS N 38 37.20
W105 37.00
as any other waypoint.
818 WPTS AVAIL
Figure 3-214
PERFORMING FDE PREDICTION FOR

OCEANIC/REMOTE OPERATION
This procedure must be performed prior to departure for a flight plan
involving Oceanic/Remote operation where GPS is to be the sole
source of navigation. The maximum segment length for which FDE
prediction can be calculated is 25 hours at a ground speed of 100
Kts.
PLAN 7/8
1. PLAN Key - DEPRESS FDE
to display PLAN 7/8 DEPART DT 20 DEC 95 <
FDE Page. See Figure DEPART GMT --:--
3-215 ROUTE SPACING -- <
EXPECTED GS ---
2. Line Select Key - START FDE WPT ----- <
DEPRESS if necessary END FDE WPT -----
EXCLUDE SATS (QTY 0)
to place the cursor over <
PREDICTION UNAVAIL
the DEPART DT field.
Enter the departure date
for which FDE prediction Figure 3-215
is desired.
NOTE: The date entered may be up to six months either side of the
current date.
4. Enter the departure time for which FDE prediction desired.
6. Enter the desired route spacing in nautical miles. 60NM is nor-
mal.
Rev. 0
System Operation

8. Enter the expected ground speed in knots. A value of 100 to 999
Kts may be entered.
10. Enter the starting waypoint of the active flight plan leg for which
FDE prediction is being calculated. Pressing the BACK Key will
cycle through the waypoints on the active flight plan. Dashes are
displayed prior to the last waypoint on the flight plan. Pressing
ENTER while the dashes are displayed will clear the start and
end waypoints, resulting in an undefined Oceanic/Remote seg-
ment.
12. Enter the ending waypoint of the active flight plan leg for which
FDE prediction is being calculated. The BACK and dashes
operate the same here as in the previous step.
14. If no satellites are to be excluded from the FDE prediction,
DEPRESS the lower right Line Select Key and proceed to Step
20. If specific satellites
are to be excluded from FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1
the FDE prediction, go to
Step 15. EXCLUDED SATS LIST
15. ENTER Key - <

DEPRESS to display the SAT #--
FDE EXCLUDE SATS <
1/1 Page. See Figure 3-
216 OK? ENTER
DEPRESS to position Figure 3-216
the cursor in the SAT #
field.
17. Enter the satellite number to be excluded.
18. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The satellite number is now displayed
in the EXCLUDED SATS LIST field.
Rev. 0
System Operation
NOTE: Entering a number

already listed and pressing FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1/1
ENTER will remove the
EXCLUDED SATS LIST
number from the list. 12 14 02 16 19 22 07
Pressing the Line Select Key
<
next to CLEAR ALL and SAT #02
pressing ENTER will remove CLEAR ALL <
all satellites from the exclu-
sion list.
OK? ENTER
19. ENTER Key -
DEPRESS when all desired Figure 3-217
satellites are entered. PLAN
7/8 FDE Page will again be
displayed. PLAN 7/8
FDE
20. START CALC? ENTER DEPART DT 25 DEC 95 <
is displayed at the bottom of DEPART GMT 13:00
the screen. See Figure 3- ROUTE SPACING 35 <
EXPECTED GS 300
218 START FDE WPT JFK <
END FDE WPT EBBR
EXCLUDE SATS (QTY 0) <
START CALC? ENTER
Figure 3-218
Rev. 0
System Operation
21. ENTER Key -

DEPRESS. PLAN 8/8 FDE PLAN 8/8
FDE COMPUTATION
COMPUTATION Page is
now displayed. COMPUT-
ING - STANDBY will flash COMPUTING - STANDBY
while FDE prediction is being
calculated and the percent- 51" COMPLETE
age completed will be
CANCEL COMPUTE
shown. When the prediction <
calculation is complete, an
FDE and NAV AVAILABLE Figure 3-219
or UNAVAILABLE message
will be displayed as shown in
PLAN 8/8
Figures 3-220 and 3-221.
FDE COMPUTATION
FDE AVAILABLE
NAV AVAILABLE
GPS PRIMARY MEANS

NAV OK
Figure 3-220
PLAN 8/8
FDE COMPUTATION
FDE UNAVAILABLE
NAV UNAVAILABLE
GPS PRIMARY MEANS

NAV NOT ALLOWED
Figure 3-221
Rev. 0
System Operation
Rev. 0
LOA Maps and VLF/OMEGA Transmitter Sites
SECTION 4
LORAN-C OPERATING AREAS (LOA) AND

VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES
LORAN-C OPERATING AREAS (LOA)

Loran-C Operating Areas are areas where the sensor can acquire the
Loran-C signals with the high degree of confidence needed for navi-
gation (i.e. on the proper cycle). However, navigation is possible
beyond LOAs, if the aircraft flies from inside an LOA boundary to out-
side, and continuous signal reception is maintained. The Loran-C
sensor will display DR when the signal conditions and geometry posi-
tion the aircraft outside the LOA.
The Loran-C chains used by the LCS are listed on the Loran Sensor
Status Page by their four-digit GRI (Group Repetition Interval) and a
mnemonic for the chain. The Loran-C chains are defined as follows:
GRI STATIONS MNEMONIC LORAN-C CHAIN
9990 MXYZ N PAC NORTH PACIFIC
9980 MWX ICELND ICELANDIC
9970 MWXYZ NW PAC NORTH WEST PACIFIC
9960 MWXYZ NE USA NORTHEAST USA
9940 MWXY WC USA WEST COAST USA
9610 MVWXYZ SOCUS SOUTH CENTRAL USA
8990 MVWXYZ N SAUD NORTH SAUDI ARABIA
8970 MWXY GT LKE GREAT LAKES
8940 MW FRANCE FRANCE
8290 MWXY NOCUS NORTH CENTRAL USA
7990 MXYZ MED MEDITERRANEAN SEA
7980 MWXYZ SE USA SOUTH EAST USA
7970 MWXYZ NORWAY NORWEGIAN SEA
7960 MXYZ GLF AK GULF OF ALASKA
7930 MWX N ATLN NORTH ATLANTIC
(LABRADOR SEA)
5990 MXYZ WC CAN WEST COAST CANADA
5970 MWXY KOREA KOREAN SEA OF JAPAN
5930 MXYZ EC CAN EAST COAST CANADA
4990 MXY C PAC CENTRAL PACIFIC
Rev. 0
The following maps depict areas where Loran-C coverage is expect-

ed. However, IFR operation relying on Loran-C is limited to those
specific areas defined in the aircraft Flight Manual Supplement. It is
the operator’s responsibility to determine when the Loran-C sensor
should be excluded from the composite position solution by manually
deselecting the sensor.
Figure 4-1 displays the approved IFR coverage for North America.
Figure 4-2 displays expected coverage for various chains.
Figure 4-3 displays the approved IFR coverage for the North Atlantic
area.
Figures 4-4 through 4-16 display single chain LOA coverage useful
for navigation in the manual mode.
Figure 4-17 displays the Loran-C Automatic Deselection Boundary
map.
Rev. 0
Figure 4-1
IFR North American Coverage
(Dual Chain–AUTO Mode)
Rev. 0
Figure 4-2
Expected North American Coverage
Rev. 0
Figure 4-3
Icelandic (9980), Norwegian Sea (7970), North Atlantic (7930), and
France (8940) Chains (Dual Chain–AUTO Mode)
Rev. 0
M ST PAUL ISLAND Y PORT CLARENCE

X ATTU Z NARROW CAPE
Figure 4-4
North Pacific Chain 9990 and other West Coast Chains
Rev. 0
M WILLIAMS LAKE Y GEORGE

X SHOAL COVE Z PORT HARDY
Figure 4-5
Canadian West Coast Chain GRI 5990
(Single Chain–MANUAL Mode)
Rev. 0
M FALLON X MIDDLETOWN
W GEORGE Y SEARCHLIGHT
Figure 4-6
U.S. West Coast Chain GRI 9940
Rev. 0
M HAVRE X GILLETTE
W BAUDETTE Y WILLIAMS LAKE
Figure 4-7
North Central U.S. Chain GRI 8290
Rev. 0
M BOISE CITY V GILLETTE W SEARCHLIGHT

X LAS CRUCES Y RAYMONDVILLE Z GRANGEVILLE
Figure 4-8
South Central U.S. Chain GRI 9610
Rev. 0
M MALONE W GRANGEVILLE
X RAYMONDVILLE Y JUPITER Z CAROLINA BEACH
Figure 4-9
Southeast U.S. Chain GRI 7980
Rev. 0
M SENECA W CARIBOU
X NANTUCKET Y CAROLINA BEACH Z DANA
Figure 4-10
Northeast U.S. Chain GRI 9960
Rev. 0
M DANA X SENECA
W MALONE Y BAUDETTE
Figure 4-11
Great Lakes Chain GRI 8970
Rev. 0
M CARIBOU Y CAPE RACE

X NANTUCKET Z FOX HARBOUR
Figure 4-12
Canadian East Coast Chain GRI 5930
Rev. 0
M JOHNSON ISLAND Y KURE ISLAND

X UPOLU PT
Figure 4-13
Central Pacific Chain GRI 4990
(AUTO or MANUAL Mode)
Rev. 0
Figure 4-14
Northwest Pacific Chain GRI 9970 and Korean Sea of Japan Chain
GRI 5970 (Dual Chain–AUTO Mode)
Rev. 0
Figure 4-15
North Saudi Arabia GRI 8990
Rev. 0
M SELLIA MARINA Y KARGABARUN

X LAMPEDUSA Z ESTARTIT
Figure 4-16
Mediterranean Sea Chain GRI 7990
Rev. 0
Figure 4-17
Loran-C Automatic Deselection Boundary
Rev. 0
VLF/OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES
VLF COMMUNICATIONS STATIONS
LETTER
DESIGNATION
WASHINGTON (WSH) Jim Creek, Washington
USA
AUSTRALIA (AUS) Northwest Cape, Australia
ANTHORNE (ANT) Anthorne, England
MAINE (MNE) Cutler, Maine USA
HAWAII (HAW) Lualualei, Hawaii USA
GREAT BRITAIN (GBR) Rugby, England
or
PUERTO RICO (PTR) Puerto Rico
ANNAPOLIS (ANN) Annapolis, Maryland USA
OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK
LETTER
DESIGNATION
NORWAY (NOR) Aldra, Norway
LIBERIA (LIB) Liberia, Africa
HAWAII (HAW) Haiku, Hawaii USA
NORTH DAKOTA (DAK) LaMoure, North Dakota USA
LA REUNION (REN) Reunion Island, Indian Ocean
ARGENTINA (ARG) Gulfo Nuevo, Argentina
AUSTRALIA (AUS) Darriman, Australia
JAPAN (JPN) Tsushima, Japan
Rev. 0
Database Update
SECTION 5
DATABASE UPDATE
DATA BASE UPDATE PROCEDURES
1. Apply aircraft power.
2. If applicable, connect DATA BASE UPDATE
DTU or PDTU. TYPE:WW DISK:1/3
REVISION: 3-95
3. Insert current Data Base EXPIRES: 13 MAR 95
Disk #1 into the DTU or
ENTER CHOICE:
PDTU. 1 BEGIN UPDATE
<
4. ON Key - DEPRESS to 2 RESTART NAV
turn on system. Figure <
(REMOVE DISK)
5-1 appears after SELF
TEST.
Figure 5-1
TO UPDATE
CAUTION: IF AN INTERRUPTION OF THE UPDATE PROCESS IS
DESIRED, REMOVE THE UPDATE DISK. DO NOT TURN OFF
POWER TO STOP THE UPDATE.
5. Line Select or 1 Key - DEPRESS to select BEGIN UPDATE, if
required. If update is not desired, depress the Line Select or 2
Key to select restart NAV.
6. With cursor over option UPDATING DATA BASE
1, ENTER Key - TYPE:WW DISK:1/3
DEPRESS. The Update REVISION: 3-95
- Data Base Page and, EXPIRES: 13 MAR 95
the message “INITIAL-
IZING” appears for
about 1 minute, then <
“COMPLETED X.X%” <

appears indicating the COMPLETED 2.8%
update is in progress.
Rev. 0
Database Update
7. After Data Base Disk #1

is loaded, the message
“INSERT DISK #2” is
displayed (Figure 5-3). INSERT DISK 2
PRESS ENTER
8. Remove Data Base Disk TO
#1 from the DTU or CONTINUE LOADING
PDTU. Insert Data Base
Disk #2 into the DTU or
PDTU. The “CONTINUE
LOADING” option will
be displayed (Figure 5- Figure 5-3
4).
9. Line Select or 1 key- UPDATING DATA BASE
DEPRESS to select TYPE:WW DISK:2/3
“CONTINUE LOAD- REVISION: 3-95
EXPIRES: 13 MAR 95
ING”. With cursor over
option 1, ENTER key- ENTER CHOICE:
DEPRESS to continue. 1 CONTINUE LOADING
<
Figure 5-2 reappears
and the update contin- 2 RESTART NAV
<
ues. (REMOVE DISK)
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 for

all Data Base Disks. Figure 5-4
NOTE: The number of Data

UPDATING DATA BASE
Base Disks will vary TYPE:WW DISK:3/3
depending on the Data REVISION: 3-95
Base type and date. EXPIRES: 13 MAR 95
11. Following the Data Base

update, the message <
“TESTING” appears TESTING
and a test of the Data <
Base update is per-
formed (Figure 5-5).
Figure 5-5
Rev. 0
Database Update
WHEN UPDATE IS COM-

PLETE UPDATE COMPLETE
If the update is successful,

Figure 5-6 is displayed.
PRESS ENTER
12. Turn system OFF or TO
DEPRESS ENTER Key RESTART NAV
to restart navigation.
IF UPDATE FAILS
If the database update fails, Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7 is displayed.
Be sure Data Base Disk #1 UPDATE ABORTED
is in DTU or PDTU. Depress
the 1 Key then ENTER Key
to retry the update or use the
following procedure. ENTER CHOICE:
Sometimes when a retry is 1 RETRY UPDATE
<
initiated, a display such as (INSERT DISK 1)
2 RESTART NAV
that shown in Figure 5-8 may <
(REMOVE DISK)
be seen.
1. Update Disk - REMOVE. Figure 5-7
2. Turn system OFF.
UPDATE DISK INVALID
3. Update Disk - INSERT
Data Base Disk #1 into
DTU or PDTU.
4. Turn system ON and ENTER CHOICE:
retry Update using 1 RETRY UPDATE
<
UPDATE PROCE- (INSERT DISK 1)
2 RESTART NAV
DURE, Steps 1-10. <
(REMOVE DISK)
Figure 5-8
Rev. 0
Database Update
Rev. 0
List of Abbreviations & Definitions
SECTION 6
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
DEFINITION
A AT or ABOVE (Ref. to VNAV Altitude Constraint)

ADC Air Data Computer
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
AFIS Airborne Flight Information System
AFM Aircraft Flight Manual
AHRS Attitude Heading Reference System
ALT Altitude
APRCH Approach
AR DME Arc
ARINC Aeronautical Radio, Inc.
ARP Airport Reference Point
ASU Antenna Switching Unit
ATC Air Traffic Control
AUTO Automatic
AZ Satellite Azimuth Relative to Aircraft Position
B AT or BELOW (Ref. VNAV Altitude Constraint)

Baro Barometric Altitude
BASIC OP WT Basic Operating Weight
BRG Bearing to Waypoint
BRT Bright
Rev. 0
DEFINITION
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
CDU Control Display Unit
CH Channel
CLIMB GRAD Current Aircraft Climb Performance in feet per
Nautical Mile
CRUISE ALT Cruise Altitude
d Direct To (Laterally)
DB Database
DEF Default
DIF Difference
DIR Direct
DIS Distance
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
DN Down
DTK Desired Track
EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument System

ECD Envelope to Cycle Discrepancy
EL Satellite Elevation Above the Horizon
ELEV Elevation
ENRTE Enroute
EST CROSSING Estimated Crossing Altitude
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
ETA @ Estimated Time of Arrival at Destination
ETE Estimated Time Enroute
EXP Expires
Rev. 0
DEFINITION
FCF Final Course (Alignment) Fix.

FL Flight Level
FAF Final Approach Fix
FDE Fault Detection and Exclusion. Detection mean-
ing the capability of the system to detect a satel-
lite failure that will affect navigation. Exclusion
meaning the capability of the system to exclude
one or more failed satellites from the prediction
solution, thus, preventing a satellite failure from
affecting navigation.
FMS Flight Management System - includes NMU,
CDU and optional RPU
FPA Flight Path Angle
FPL Flight Plan
FPM Feet per minute
FR From Waypoint
FREQ Frequency
FT feet
G Glide path (Ref. to VNAV Altitude Constraint)

GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GPS Global Positioning System
GRI Group Repetition Interval
GS Groundspeed
HDG Heading
HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision
HLTH Satellite Health (Good or Bad)
Rev. 0
DEFINITION
HP Holding Pattern
HPE Horizontal Position Error (A Quality Factor for
the GPS.)
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator
IAF Initial Approach Fix

ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
IDENT Identifier
ILS Instrument Landing System
INBOUND CRS Inbound Holding or Procedure Turn course
INS Inertial Navigation System
IRS Inertial Reference System
Jeppesen Name of Navigation Database Source
KEY CDU Keyboard Entry

KG Kilogram/Kilograms
kHz Kilohertz
LAT Latitude
LB Pound/Pounds
LCS LORAN-C System
LEG DIST Leg Distance
LON Longitude
LORAN LOng RAnge Navigation
Rev. 0
DEFINITION
MAG Magnetic
MAG VAR Magnetic Variation
MAN Manual Entry
MAN ALT Manual Altitude
MAP Missed Approach Point
MHz Megahertz
MSG Message
NAV Navigation
NAVAID Navigation Aid (Typically a Radio Station
Providing VOR and/or DME Position Data)
NDB NAV Database or Non-Directional Beacon
NM Nautical Miles
NOTAM Notice to Airman
NX Next Waypoint
NXT Next
OM Outer Marker
POS Position (Present or Waypoint)

PRESEL ALT Preselect Altitude
#PRESL Preselected Altitude Profile Point
PREV or PRV Previous
PRN Pseudo Random Noise (GPS Satellite Number)
PT Procedure Turn
Rev. 0
DEFINITION
RAD Radial
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
REM Remaining
REQ FPM Required Feet Per Minute
RCVD Received
RMI Radio Magnetic Indicator
RNAV Area Navigation or type of Non Precision
Approach
RNG Range
RPU Receiver Processor Unit (Contains the VLF
Omega)
RW Runway
SAT Satellite (PRN) Number

SID Standard Instrument Departure
SM Software MOD Level
SNR Signal to Noise Ratio
STAR Standard Terminal Arrival
SXTK Selected Crosstrack
T True ( Heading or Track) or whether a Satellite

is being tracked or not.
TACAN TACtical Air Navigation
TAS True Airspeed
TK Track Angle
TKE Track Error
Rev. 0
DEFINITION
#TOC Top of Climb Profile Point

#TOD Top of Descent Profile Point
TRANS LEVEL Transition Level (The Altitude at which Altitudes
Become Flight Levels)
TRCK Track (Satellite Status)
TRMNL Terminal
VAR Magnetic Variation

VERT DEV Vertical Deviation
VHF Very High Frequency
VLF Very Low Frequency
VNAV Vertical Navigation
VOR VHF Omnirange
VORTAC VHF Omnidirectional Range TACAN
VPU VORTAC Position Unit
Waypoint A Point Defined in Space Used in Navigation

WPT Waypoint
WW NDB Worldwide Coverage
XPDR Transponder
XTK Crosstrack
Rev. 0
Rev. 0
SECTION 7
AFIS
AIRBORNE FLIGHT INFORMATION SYSTEM
AND
SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
This section applies only to aircraft equipped with an AFIS system.
The purpose of this section is to acquaint users of AFIS Flight Plan

and Weather Advisory Services with the equipment, its capabilities,
and its operation. AFIS services are ADVISORY only, as they con-
tain elements provided by the National Weather Service and informa-
tion supplied by the pilot. Therefore, it is the responsibility of the pilot
in command to exercise reasonable and prudent judgment in the use
of these ADVISORY services.
Rev. 0
Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System AFIS Operation
Rev. 0
GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System AFIS Operation Dec/96
AFIS Operation
DESCRIPTION
AFIS is an Airborne Flight Information System that provides integrat-
ed flight planning and performance management interfaces to the
GNS-X C129 Nav Management System.
These interfaces consist of three major capabilities:
1. Access to ground based Global Data Center computers from a
Personal Computer for the purpose of generating or retrieving per-
formance optimized flight plans and current aviation weather;
2. Digital transfer of AFIS Flight Plan and weather data into the Nav
Management System for display and performance monitoring on
the GNS-X C129 Color CDU; and
3. Air/ground computer link interfacing the GNS-X C129 Nav
Management System to the ground based Global Data Center
computers for the purpose of providing enroute flight plan, weath-
er, performance updates, requesting pre-departure clearance,
and sending or receiving messages.
AFIS interfaces with ARINC, SITA and AVICOM VHF networks and
the Inmarsat satellite network to provide a communication link
between the aircraft and the Global Data Center. ARINC provides
coverage within the continental United States, Hawaii, Alaska, the
Aleutians, Guam, Saipan, Mexico, Puerto Rico, and parts of Canada;
SITA covers Europe, the South Pacific, Southeast Asia, the
Caribbean, and South and Central America and AVICOM covers
Japan. In most areas while using the VHF networks, data link cover-
age is excellent above Flight Level 200, but deteriorates below this
flight level. Satellite data link coverage is excellent both on the
ground and in-flight between 70° North and 70° South.
Many variables, including the amount of processing time and the
length of the message, effect the turnaround time for information.
Depending on the nature of the update request, the pilot should
expect a turnaround time of approximately five minutes when using
the VHF network and twelve minutes when using the satellite net-
work.
AFIS consists of the following components: Global Data Center
(GDC), Data Transfer Unit (DTU), Data Management Unit (DMU),
and Antenna Switching Unit (ASU).
Rev. 3
Oct/02 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-1
AFIS Operation
GLOBAL DATA CENTER (GDC)

The Global Data Center (GDC) is a ground based computer facility
built and operated by Honeywell for the purpose of providing flight
planning, aviation weather, and message forwarding services to AFIS
operators on a subscription basis. The GDC communicates with the
operator via data quality telephone lines to a Personal Computer as
well as through the ACARS and satellite networks directly to the air-
craft in flight.
DATA TRANSFER UNIT (DTU)

The Data Transfer Unit (DTU) is a 3.5 inch micro floppy disk drive
mounted in the cockpit. Once the GNS-X C129 is switched on and
the disk inserted in the DTU, the AFIS Flight Plan and weather data
are transferred to and stored in the Data Management Unit.
DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (DMU)

The Data Management Unit (DMU) computer formats the disk infor-
mation and presents it to the GNS-X C129 for display on the CDU.
The DMU also incorporates a data quality VHF transceiver. This
radio is tuned automatically by the DMU computer to the appropriate
ground station for the purpose of transmitting data to and receiving
data from the Global Data Center while in flight.
ANTENNA SWITCHING UNIT (ASU)

The Antenna Switching Unit (ASU) is required for those installations
where the DMU transceiver shares an existing VHF communications
antenna. The ASU switches the transmit side of the antenna
between the DMU data transmitter and the VHF voice transmitter.
During power up, the ASU defaults to the voice transmitter, if AFIS is
configured for a shared antenna. Pressing the AFIS annunciator on
the instrument panel switches the transmit side of the antenna to the
DMU data transmitter. Pressing the annunciator again, or pressing
the "push to talk" button on the VHF communications radio switches
the transmit side of the antenna back to the voice transmitter.
If AFIS is configured for non-shared antenna or there is no configura-
tion module, during power up the system will assume an antenna is
dedicated to AFIS.
Rev. 0
7-2 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Dec/96
AFIS Operation
The Satellite Data Communications System consists of the following

components: Satellite Communications Unit (SCU), High Power
Amplifier/ Low Noise Amplifier (HPA/LNA), and Satellite Antenna.
SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS UNIT (SCU)

The Satellite Communications Unit (SCU) incorporates the satellite
transceiver and instruction for transmitting to and receiving data from
the satellite network. The SCU also contains information to allow it to
tune the appropriate satellite operating region automatically and to
the appropriate ground stations.
HIGH POWER AMPLIFIER/ LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER (HPA/LNA)

The High Power Amplifier/ Low Noise Amplifier (HPA/LNA) amplifies
transmitted and received information while minimizing noise.
SATELLITE ANTENNA
The antenna is designed to meet the Inmarsat system specification.
PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST PAGE

If the GNS-X C129 is configured for AFIS, this page appears directly
after the Initialization Page. The DTU reads the inserted disk and
displays one of the following messages:
NO AFIS FLT PLANS ON
DISK: There are no AFIS Flight AFIS
Plans stored on the disk. FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
(Figure 7-1)
NO DISK: Either no disk was
NO AFIS FLT PLANS
inserted into the DTU prior to ON DISK
power up or the DTU cannot
read the disk.
READING DISK: The DTU is
transferring data from the disk Figure 7-1
to the DMU.
AIRCRAFT TYPE: The Global designated aircraft type as trans-
ferred from the disk or obtained by an Update or Recall procedure.
Rev. 0
Dec/96 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System 7-3
AFIS Operation
NOTE: Once the system is initialized, the page appears between the
Active Flight Plan Page and the first GNS-X C129 FLIGHT PLAN
LIST Page.
AFIS FLT PLAN LIST: A list of
AFIS generated Flight Plan ori- AFIS
gin/destination identifiers with FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
date of issue. (Figure 7-2) <
KABE-KVNY 04JAN9O
NOTE: Additional pages can <
KAPA-KTEB 04JAN90
be accessed when more than 6 KBUR-KLGA 04JAN90
Flight Plans are listed by <
KBZN-KLAN 04JAN90
KDAL-KDEN 04JAN90
DEPRESSING the FPL Key to KDAL-KJFK 04JAN90
<
access page.
LOADING FLIGHT PLAN:
The system is loading a select- Figure 7-2
ed AFIS Flight Plan.
REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?: Allows a selected AFIS Flight Plan to
replace an existing Active Flight Plan.
UPDA-XXXX: (Where XXXX is an ident) Indicates a Flight Plan
Update for an active Flight Plan has occurred.
FLIGHT PLAN PROGRESS (NAVIGATION PAGE 5)

HEC:KVNY: Current FROM
and TO waypoints. (Figure 7-
3) The FROM waypoint can be <
NAVIGATION 5/5
replaced by DIR TO for
DIRECT TO. HEC:KVNY FL390
PLAN ACT
FL: AFIS planned flight level F REM 2150 3380
FF P/E 625 0
for leg being flown. ETA 00:06 18:52
TAS 460 460
NOTE: Field is dashes when GS 448 460
aircraft is projected to be climb- WIND 330/ 40 360/ 0
ing or descending.
PLAN: Planned Figure 7-3
This column is AFIS planned data either transferred from the disk or
received via the data link.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
NOTE: Planned fields become

dashes when no planned data <
NAVIGATION 5/5
is available for the current leg.
DIR TO:PSB FL390
(Figure 7-4). PLAN ACT
F REM ------ 11952
ACT: Actual FF P/E ---- 0
ETA ----- 05:26
This column is GNS-X C129 TAS --- 300
GS --- 300
data.
NOTE: Actual fields become
dashes when cursor is posi- Figure 7-4
tioned over the leg identifiers.
(Figure 7-5).
F REM: Fuel Remaining <
NAVIGATION 5/5
Planned: AFIS planned fuel HEC:KVNY FL390

remaining at aircraft present PLAN ACT
position based on DMU inter- F REQ 375 ------
FF P/E 625 ----
polated values. ETE 0+16 -----
TAS 460 ---
Actual: The total fuel on board GS 448 ---
as calculated by the GNS-X
C129.
Figure 7-5
NOTE: Field changes to F
REQ when cursor is positioned over the leg identifiers
F REQ: Fuel Required
Planned: The AFIS planned fuel required to fly the leg displayed.
FF P/E: Fuel Flow per Engine
Planned: AFIS planned fuel flow per engine for leg displayed.
Actual: Total actual fuel flow divided by the number of engines. This
is an averaged quantity.
ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival
Planned: The sum of the AFIS planned time enroute for the leg dis-
played and the actual time of arrival over the previous waypoint.
Actual: The estimated time of arrival over TO waypoint based on
current groundspeed.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
NOTE: Field changes to ETE

when cursor is positioned over NAVIGATION 5/5
<
the leg identifiers. (Figure 7-6)
PGS:HEC FL390
ETE: Estimated Time Enroute PLAN ACT
F REQ 624 ------
Planned: The AFIS planned FF P/E 619 ----
time enroute for leg displayed. ETE 0+20 -----
TAS 457 ---
TAS: True Airspeed GS 452 ---
WIND 340/ 39 ---/---
Planned: AFIS planned true air-
speed for leg displayed. Figure 7-6
Actual: Actual true airspeed of
aircraft. The TAS value shown is the same as on NAVIGATION
Page 3.
GS: Groundspeed
Planned: AFIS planned groundspeed for leg displayed.
Actual: Actual groundspeed of the aircraft as calculated by the GNS-
X C129. The GS value shown is the same as on NAVIGATION
Page 1.
WIND:
Planned: AFIS forecast wind for leg displayed. Direction is displayed
relative to True North with velocity in knots.
Actual: Actual wind for leg as computed by the system. Direction is
displayed relative to True North with velocity in knots.
AFIS MENU PAGE

AFIS FLT PLAN: Review of
the AFIS Flight Plan displaying: AFIS MENU
• Fuel and time requirements <

1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMENTS
• Weights, flight level, and <
3 TERMINAL WX
4 WINDS ALOFT
route 5 RECALL AFIS FPL
<
6 SEND AFIS MSG
• Operator inputs used in 7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
generating Flight Plan 8 OPERATING MODES
• Performance bias entered

by operator Figure 7-7
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
SIGMETS: Review of all SIGMETS(SIGnificant METeorology) trans-

ferred via the disk and/or received via the data link.
TERMINAL WX: Review of all Terminal Weather transferred via the
disk and/or received via the data link. Additional requests can be
entered.
WINDS ALOFT: Review of all Winds Aloft identifiers transferred via
the disk and/or received via the data link. Additional requests can be
entered.
RECALL AFIS FPL: Allows operator to recall a previously accessed
flight plan and associated weather from the Global Data Center via
the data link.
SEND AFIS MSG: Allows operator to send non-flight related text
messages via the satellite data link and flight related text messages
via the satellite or VHF data link.
DISPL AFIS MSG: Allows operator to display flight related mes-
sages received via the data link.
OPERATING MODES: Allows operator to select operating mode for:
• AUTO REPORT
• AUTO WX UPDT
• VHF NETWORK (ARINC, SITA/AVICOM) and if applicable,
• SAT (satellite) NETWORK
• PRINTER CTRL.
AFIS FLT PLAN PAGES

The AFIS Flight Plan Pages are
accessed by selecting Option 1
on the AFIS MENU Page. AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4
FUEL TIME
FR KSNA
AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 1 TO KJFK 8806 4+30
HOLDING ----- -----
TO ---- ----- -----
FUEL AND TIME REQUIRE- RESERVE 2000 1+03
MENTS
TOTALS 10806 5+33
FR: The origin airport identifier.
(Figure 7-8) When there is an
enroute update to the flight plan,
Figure 7-8
the identifier will change to
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
UPDATE. UPDATE refers to

the Lat/Lon position of aircraft at AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4
time of last update request. FUEL TIME
(Figure 7-9). FR UPDA
TO KJFK 6400 4+04
TO: The TO waypoint identifier. HOLDING ----- -----
TO ---- ----- -----
TO/FUEL: Projected fuel RESERVE 5563 2+32
required from FROM waypoint
TOTALS 11963 6+36
to TO waypoint as transferred
from disk or updated enroute via
the data link.
Figure 7-9
TO/TIME: The estimated time
enroute in hours and minutes from the FROM waypoint to the TO
waypoint as transferred from the disk or updated through the data
link.
HOLDING/FUEL: Projected fuel required for Holding Time as trans-
ferred from disk or received via the data link.
HOLDING/TIME: The holding time in hours and minutes as trans-
ferred from disk or received via the data link.
TO/FUEL: Projected fuel required from TO waypoint to alternate air-
port as transferred from disk or received via the data link.
TO/TIME: The estimated time enroute in hours and minutes from TO
waypoint to alternate airport as transferred from disk or received via
the data link.
RESERVE FUEL: Projected reserve fuel at TO waypoint as trans-
ferred from the disk or received via the data link.
RESERVE TIME: Projected flight time remaining at TO waypoint to
consume the displayed RESERVE FUEL.
TOTALS: Sum of planned enroute and reserve fuel and sum of
planned enroute and reserve time.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 2

AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4
WEIGHTS, FLIGHT LEVEL RAMP WT 30365
AND ROUTE FPL LDWT 21559
FLT LVL 410/450
RAMP WT: Planned ramp ROUTE
weight in lbs prior to starting KSNA-HEC-PGS-DBL-
CYS-J148-ONL-J94-
engines as transferred from disk DBQ-GIJ-J554-CRL-
or received via the data link. PSB-KJFK
(Figure 7-10)
GROSS WT: Sum of basic
operating weight, payload, and Figure 7-10
fuel remaining as calculated by
GNS-X C129. (Figure 7-11)
AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4
NOTE: RAMP WT changes to RAMP WT 30365
GROSS WT if there is an auto- FPL LDWT 21559
matic FUEL FLOW input, FUEL FLT LVL 410/450
ROUTE
REMAINING quantity, and KSNA-HEC-PGS-DBL-
input for basic operating weight CYS-J148-ONL-J94-
and PAYLOAD input. DBQ-GIJ-J554-CRL-
PSB-KJFK
FPL LDWT: Flight planned
landing weight of aircraft at des-
tination as transferred from disk Figure 7-11
or received via the data link.
FLT LVL: Planned flight
level(s) as transferred from disk or received via the data link.
ROUTE: Planned route of flight as computed by Global Data Center
and transferred from disk or received via the data link.
NOTE: Pressing the AFIS or NXT Key displays the remainder of the
route (up to 50 waypoints).
UPDATE: Waypoint identifier defining position of aircraft at time of
last update request.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
OPERATOR INPUTS
FROM: Origin airport identifier as transferred from disk or received
via the data link, or UPDATE
waypoint defining position of air-
craft at time of last update AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4
request. (Figure 7-12) FROM KSNA
TO KJFK
TO: Destination waypoint trans- DEP TIME 22:00
ferred from disk or received via BASIC OP WT 18959
the data link. PAYLOAD 600
RAMP FUEL 10806
DEP TIME: Estimated time of RESERVE FUEL 2000
PERF OPTION M80 / F
departure in GMT. This field
changes to UPDATE TIME
when a flight plan is updated
and indicates time of issued Figure 7-12
update. (Figure 7-13)
BASIC OP WT: AFIS planned
basic operating weight as trans- AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4
ferred from disk or received via FROM UPDA
the data link. TO KJFK
UPDATE TIME 22:03
PAYLOAD: AFIS planned pay- BASIC OP WT 18959
load weight as transferred from PAYLOAD 1200
RAMP FUEL 11963
disk or received via data link. RESERVE FUEL 5563
PERF OPTION M80
RAMP FUEL: AFIS planned
total trip fuel as transferred from
disk or received via data link.
This field changes to UPDATE Figure 7-13
FUEL when a flight plan is
updated and refers to the actual fuel remaining at time of last update
request.
FPL RES FUEL: AFIS planned reserve fuel remaining at destination
as transferred from disk or received via the data link. This field
changes to RESERVE FUEL when a flight plan is updated and refers
to the updated estimate of fuel remaining at destination.
PERF OPTION: AFIS planned cruise mode as transferred from disk
or received via the data link. Alternate cruise mode options may be
requested and updated via the data link.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
PERFORMANCE BIAS
This page allows a review of the
operator entered performance
bias data transferred from disk AFIS FLT PLAN 4/4
or received via the data link. MIN FLT LVL ---
MAX FLT LVL ---
(Figure 7-14) HOLD TIME -----
ALTERNATE ----
SIGMETS PAGES CLIMB F/T 100 --
ARRIV F/T 100 5
AFIS SIGMETS pages are
accessed by selecting Option 2
on the AFIS MENU Page.
This page allows a review of all Figure 7-14
SIGMETS transferred from disk
or received via the airborne data
link. SIGMETS may consist of
one or more pages of text and <
AFIS SIGMETS 1/7
display their FAA code names
FR KSNA TO KJFK
followed by text. CONVECTIVE SIGMET
51C
DATE: Issue date of SIGMET. VALID UNTIL 1955Z
This field may be blank if trans- MO
ferred from disk. FROM 40S IRK-50WSW
SGF
NOTE: Date field will remain
blank if no date is supplied on
disk or by UPDATE. Figure 7-15
FR: Desired start VOR, airport,
waypoint, Lat/Lon, VORTAC
ident, or NAT (North Atlantic AFIS SIGMETS 1/29
<
Tracks). (Figure 7-15 or 7-16)
FR NAT TO
NOTE: Parentheses remain NAT TRACKS FLS 310
until a SIGMET update is 370 INCLUSIVE APRIL
received via the data link. 01/1130Z TO APRIL
01/1900Z
TO: Desired end VOR, airport,
A 63/30 63/40 63/50
waypoint, Lat/Lon or VORTAC
ident. No entry is required if FR
is NAT.
Figure 7-16
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
TRANSMIT REQUEST?: When cursor is on this field and ENTER is

pressed, a SIGMET update request is sent to the Global Data Center
via data link. DATA LINK DISABLED will appear if the data link is
disabled and the request will not be transmitted.
NOTE: This field only appears
when the FR or TO fields are in <
AFIS SIGMETS 1/1
parentheses.
FR KSNA TO KMIA
If no SIGMETS are on disk, the NO SIGMENTS
message NO SIGMETS ON
DISK appears. If there are no
SIGMETS via a Flight Plan
update the message reads NO
SIGMETS. (Figure 7-17)
TERMINAL WEATHER Figure 7-17

PAGES
The TERMINAL WEATHER Menu Page is accessed by selecting
Option 3 on the AFIS MENU Page.
Terminal identifiers for which associated weather data is available to
review are listed. The identifiers in parentheses represent pilot
entered requests for additional weather not stored in the DMU. The
parentheses disappear when weather updates have been received
via the data link.
TRANSMIT REQUEST?:
When cursor is on this field and
AFIS TERMINAL WX
ENTER is pressed, a weather
update request is sent to the
< >
Global Data Center via data (KSNA) (KENO)
link. (Figure 7-18) < >
(KSTL) (KDQO)
DATA LINK DISABLED: < >
Aircraft equipped with the (KMKC)
Antenna Switching Unit must < >
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
DEPRESS momentary AFIS
annunciator to enable the air to
ground data link. VHF or satel- Figure 7-18
lite network must also be
enabled.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
TERMINAL WX DATA PAGES

These pages are accessed by
selecting a terminal weather
TERMINAL WX 1/12
identifier on the TERMINAL >
KDEN 10JAN97
WEATHER Menu Page.
METAR: 10/1710
They allow review of Terminal 101703Z COR 04008KT
Weather by identifier as trans- 1SM -SN BR BKN016
ferred from disk or received by BKN025 OVC036
the Global Data Center via the 10/1710 M16/M17
A2994 RMK AO2 P0000
data link. TAF: 101308Z 101312
DATE: Issue date of actual
weather. This field may be blank Figure 7-19
if transferred from disk.
Weather available for review includes:
• METAR (Aviation Routine Weather Report)
• NOTAMS (Notices to Airmen)
• PIREPS (Pilot Reports)
WINDS ALOFT PAGES

The AFIS WINDS ALOFT Menu Page is accessed by selecting
Option 4 on the AFIS MENU
Page.
AFIS WINDS ALOFT
The WIND identifiers represent
VOR, airport, waypoint, Lat/Lon < >
(SNA ) (ENO )
or VORTAC locations, for
< >
which associated weather data (STL ) (DQO )
is available. < >
(MKC )
< >
WINDS ALOFT DATA PAGES TRANSMIT REQUEST?
These pages are accessed by
selecting a wind identifier on Figure 7-20
the WINDS ALOFT MENU
page.
They allow review of Winds Aloft data by VOR, airport, waypoint,
Lat/Lon or VORTAC identifier as transferred from disk or received via
the data link.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
DATE/TIME: Actual day and time of the issue of the wind informa-
tion. This field may be blank if transferred from disk. The number is
read 12th day 2356 ZULU.
(Figure 7-21)
WINDS ALOFT
Wind data available to review SNA 122356Z
includes:
18000 000/ 1 -9
• Flight Level 24000 320/ 2 -21
30000 290/ 4 -36
34000 260/ 6 -46
• Wind Direction (True North)
39000 270/ 9 -55
45000 280/ 13 -63
• Wind Velocity (Knots)
• Temperature (Degrees
Celsius) Figure 7-21
RECALL AFIS FPL PAGE

This page is accessed by RECALL AFIS FPL
selecting Option 5 on the AFIS
MENU Page. <
FPL-# D8751
DATE
This page allows the pilot to ETD
recall previously computed FR
TO
AFIS Flight Plan and Weather
requests from the Global Data
Center via the data link. TRANSMIT REQUEST?
FPL-#: A Global Data Center Figure 7-22

generated Flight Plan number.
Entered as an alpha character
followed by four numeric digits.
If FPL# is entered, other entries
are not required. (Figure 7-22) RECALL AFIS FPL
DATE: Issue date of recalled <

FPL-#
AFIS Flight Plan. DATE 29MAY91
ETD 12:00
ETD: Estimated time of depar- FR KSNA
ture in GMT of recalled AFIS TO KLAX
Flight Plan .
FR: Origin of recalled AFIS
Flight Plan.
Figure 7-23
TO: Destination of recalled
AFIS Flight Plan. (Figure 7-23)
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
TRANSMIT REQUEST?: When cursor is on this field and ENTER is

pressed, the recall request is sent to the Global Data Center via data
link. (Figure 7-22)
DATA LINK DISABLED: Aircraft equipped with the Antenna
Switching Unit, must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to
enable the air to ground data link. VHF or satellite network must also
be enabled.
SEND AFIS MESSAGE PAGE
This page is accessed by selecting Option 6 on the AFIS MENU

Page.
↑ ↓ indicate that pressing the Line Select Key adjacent the arrow will
move the cursor in the direction of the arrow.
PPM: Preprogrammed messages that can be stored in non-volatile
memory, selected and sent without being re-entered.
TO: Receiver of message.
FROM: Sender's identification (name or tail number).
#: Receiver's address. See Table A-1 for possible address varia-
tions and the method in which the Global Data Center processes the
message.
MESSAGE TEXT: Fifteen lines of text entry available. Text must be
flight related when using the VHF network operating mode.
SEND MESSAGE: When cur-
sor is over this field and ENTER
is pressed the message is sent $ SEND AFIS MSG >
via the data link. (Figure 7-24) TO: GLOBAL PPM
% FR: N214SC
DATA LINK DISABLED: #:FAX 752 0604
Aircraft equipped with the DELAYED DUE TO WX
Antenna Switching Unit, must NEW ETA IS 1400Z
annunciator to enable the air to < >
SEND MESSAGE?
ground data link. VHF or satel-
lite network must also be
enabled. Figure 7-24
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
Phone number #206 869 6450

• GDC will deliver message verbally to given number.
AFIS-equipped aircraft #N4322B
• GDC will deliver message to aircraft specified.
"A" followed by phone number #A206 869 6458
• GDC will deliver message to PC at given number.
"AI" followed by Country Code, City Code, and phone number #AI4118106530
• GDC will deliver message to PC located outside the
US or Canada.
"F" followed by phone number #F206 869 6464
• GDC will deliver message to FAX machine at given number
"FI" followed by Country Code, City Code and phone number #FI4118108708
• GDC will deliver message FAX machine located
outside the US or Canada.
"A" followed by ARINC or SITA address #AHDQGLXH
• GDC will deliver message to ARINC or SITA address given.
Auto Forward Code #GWSOPS
• GDC will deliver message to PC, FAX, or ARINC/SITA
as defined in GDC database.
GDC Code #GWSPJC
• GDC will search database for phone number and special
contact name or message associated with code and
deliver message verbally.
ADCUS XXX #ADCUS TEB
• GDC will search database for customs phone number
at specified airport and deliver message verbally.
PDC XXX #PDC LAX
• GDC will search database for pre-departure clearance
and forward to aircraft if found.
Global Defined Codes
• BASEOPS International #BASEOPS or
#BOPS
• Air Routing International #ARC
• Universal Weather #UNIVERSAL or
#UV or #UVAIR
• Jeppesen Data Plan #JETPLAN or
#DATAPLAN
or #JEPPESEN
• Medlink #MEDLINK
GDC #GDC
• Message will be printed at GDC further action.
AFIS Addresses
Table 1
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
PPM MENU PAGE (PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGES)

This page is accessed from the
SEND MESSAGE Page by PPM MENU
selecting PPM in the upper right
hand corner. <
1 SNA-PRC STD MSG
PPM can only be selected when <
2 PRC-SNA STD MSG
an entry has been made in the 3 MSG MECH
TO or # fields on the SEND <
4
5
MESSAGE Page. The TO, 6
<
FROM, and # data are used
when sending a prepro-
grammed message.
Figure 7-25
Titles for up to six prepro-
grammed messages can be list-
ed for selection to review,
change, and send.
PREPROGRAMMED MES-
SAGE PAGES PREPROGRAMMED MSG
These pages display the mes- NEW ETA MKC****
NEW ETA IS 1300 MKC
sage text for each prepro- <
HAVE A GOOD DAY
grammed message title select-
ed from the PPM MENU Page.
Up to seven lines of text may be
entered. Preprogrammed
< >
Messages will remain in non- SEND MESSAGE?
volatile memory and can be
removed by editing the title on
the PREPROGRAMMED MSG Figure 7-26
Menu Page.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
DISPLAY AFIS MSG PAGE

The message page is displayed
by selecting Option 7 on the DISPLAY AFIS MSG 3/7
AFIS MENU Page.
7-JUN-90 20:00Z
All text messages sent to the tail FR:OFFICE
number of the aircraft being TO:CAPTAIN
PLEASE CALL HOME
flown appear in this section. Up ASAP.
to 15 pages of text can be 7-JUN-90 20:04Z
stored according to time FR:222
received, with the newest mes- TO:111
sage appearing first. Messages
can originate from: Figure 7-27
• Another AFIS equipped aircraft,

• third party, or
• Global Data Center.
OPERATING MODES PAGE (FOR AFIS USERS EQUIPPED

WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM)
Operating modes information is accessed by selecting option 8 on
the AFIS MENU Page.
AUTO REPORT: AFIS OPERATING MODES
ON: The aircraft will auto- >

matically report position and AUTO REPORT OFF
AUTO WX UPDT ON
station ID for weather updates VHF NETWORK ON
>
to the Global Data Center via SAT NETWORK ON

>
the data link on a timed basis.
OFF: The automatic reporting ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
capability has been manually
inhibited by the pilot.
Figure 7-28
AUTO WX UPDT (WEATHER
UPDATE):
ON: The Global Data Center will automatically send weather/wind
updates for the displayed idents when new information is issued.
OFF: The auto weather update function is not enabled.
Rev. 3
7-18 GNS-X C129 (GNS-XLS CDU) Flight Management System Oct/02
AFIS Operation
VHF NETWORK:
Ground networks that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link
with the Global Data Center.
ON: The appropriate VHF network will automatically be selected
whenever the aircraft present position is within the specified bound-
aries. (Figure 7-28)
OFF: Network is not enabled.
SAT NETWORK:
Satellite network that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with
the Global Data Center.
ON: The appropriate satellite region will automatically be selected
whenever the aircraft present position is within the specified bound-
aries.
PRINTER CTRL
Allows access to the Printer Control Page.
ACTIVE LINK: AFIS OPERATING MODES

Indicates the network in service,
>
i.e. ARINC, SITA, or SATCOM. AUTO REPORT OFF
(Figure 7-29) AUTO WX UPDT ON >
VHF NETWORK OFF
NONE: All networks are turned SAT NETWORK ON
>
OFF or current position does PRINTER CTRL
not correspond with the manual- ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM
ly selected boundaries.
NOTE: The VHF network has Figure 7-29
precedence over the satellite
network in areas of shared coverage and must be turned OFF in
order for SATCOM to be the Active Link. AUTO REPORT, AUTO
WX UPDT and OPERATING MODE selection status are stored in
non-volatile memory. If the operator turns to OFF the operator must
reselect to turn ON.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
VHF LINK CONTROL PAGE

This page is accessed when the
VHF Network is turned ON.
AFIS OPERATING MODES
ARINC, SITA/AVICOM: VHF LINK CONTROL
Ground networks that AFIS ARINC AUTO
>
interfaces with to establish a SITA/AVICOM AUTO >

data link with the Global Data
Center.
AUTO: The VHF network will
automatically be selected when-
ever the aircraft present position
is within the appropriate bound- Figure 7-30
aries. (Figure 7-30)
MAN (manual): The desired network will be maintained independent
of the present position. In manual, the system will only allow trans-
mission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries.
All other networks will be turned OFF if one is in MAN.
SAT LINK CONTROL PAGE

This page is accessed when the SAT Network is turned ON.
SAT COMM:
AUTO: The satellite network will automatically be selected whenever
the aircraft present position is within the appropriate boundaries and
VHF Network is turned OFF or is not in VHF coverage.
MAN (manual): The desired region will be maintained independent
mission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries
and VHF network is turned OFF or is not in VHF coverage.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
REGION: The four satellite

regions, West Atlantic, East AFIS OPERATING MODES
Atlantic, Pacific Ocean and $ SAT LINK CONTROL
%
Indian Ocean, that AFIS inter- SAT COM: MAN
faces with to establish a data
link with the Global Data Center. REGION: E. ATLANTIC
(Figure 7-31)
LINK: LINK:OPERATIONAL
OPERATIONAL: Message indi-

cating the SAT COMM link is
enabled. Figure 7-31
NONE: Current position does

not correspond with the manual- AFIS OPERATING MODES
ly selected boundaries or satel- SAT LINK CONTROL
lite link is not operational.
SAT COM: MAN
ACTIVATE?: Use to enable
REGION: W. ATLANTIC
satellite network in AUTO or
MAN. (Figure 7-32)
LINK:ACTIVATE?
Figure 7-32
OPERATING MODES PAGE (FOR AFIS USERS NOT EQUIPPED

WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM)
Operating Modes information is accessed by selecting Option 8 on
the AFIS MENU Page.
AUTO REPORT:
ON: The aircraft will automatically report position and station ID
for weather updates to the Global Data Center via the data link on a
timed basis.
OFF: The automatic reporting capability has been manually inhibit-
ed by the pilot.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
AUTO WX UPDT (WEATHER UPDATE):

ON: The Global Data Center
will automatically send weath-
er/wind updates for the dis- AFIS OPERATING MODES
played idents when new infor-
mation is issued. AUTO REPORT ON
>
AUTO WX UPDT ON
OFF: The auto weather ARINC AUTO
>
update function is not enabled. SITA/AVICOM OFF >

PRINTER CTRL
ARINC, SITA, AVICOM: ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Ground networks that AFIS
interfaces with to establish a
data link with the Global Data Figure 7-33
Center.
AUTO: The desired network will automatically be selected whenever
the aircraft present position is within the appropriate boundaries.
MAN (manual): The desired network will be maintained independent
mission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries.
NOTE: If a ground network is placed in manual mode, all others will
go to OFF.
PRINTER CTRL
Allows access to the Printer
Control Page. >
AUTO REPORT OFF
AUTO WX UPDT ON
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC OFF
>
SITA/AVICOM AUTO
Indicates the network in service, PRINTER CTRL
>
i.e. ARINC, SITA, AVICOM.

ACTIVE LINK: NONE
NONE: All networks are turned
OFF or current position does
not correspond with the select- Figure 7-34
ed mode.
NOTE: AUTO REPORT, AUTO WX UPDT and OPERATING
MODE selection status are stored in non-volatile memory. If the
operator turns to OFF or MAN, the operator must reselect to turn ON.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE (FOR AFIS FLIGHT PLAN

UPDATING)
AFIS UPDATE: Allows pilot to:
• Amend an existing AFIS <
ACTIVE FPL 1/1
Flight Plan KSEA - KLAX
<
ELMAA
• Update SIGMETS HQM
<
KLAX
• Request a new AFIS Flight ******
Plan < >
DEPART AFIS UPDATE
<
ARRIVE ETA >
AFIS UPDATE VERIFICATION APPROACH ERASE
PAGE
ACTUAL FL: Actual flight level Figure 7-35
of aircraft rounded to nearest
100 ft. as entered by the pilot.
AFIS UPDATE
ASSIGNED FL: Current Flight
Level assigned by ATC as veri-
fied or amended by the pilot. ACTUAL FL 410
ASSIGNED FL 370
PAYLOAD: Current aircraft PAYLOAD 1200
payload verified or amended by FUEL REM 11985
the pilot. CRUISE MODE M80
FUEL REM: Actual fuel TRANSMIT REQUEST?

remaining as calculated by the
GNS-X C129 or amended by Figure 7-36
the pilot.
CRUISE MODE: Current air-
craft Cruise Mode as verified or AFIS UPDATE
amended by the pilot.
TRANSMIT REQUEST: When ACTUAL FL 410
cursor is over this field and ASSIGNED FL 370
PAYLOAD 1200
ENTER is pressed, the update FUEL REM 11985
request is sent via the data link. CRUISE MODE
(Figure 7-36)
DATA LINK DISABLED
DATA LINK DISABLED:
Aircraft equipped with the
Antenna Switching Unit, must Figure 7-37
annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. VHF or satellite
network must also be enabled.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
SYSTEM MESSAGES PAGE

AFIS related messages appear
on the SYSTEM MESSAGES
Page (see Section 2 of the SYSTEM MESSAGES 1/1
Operators Manual). When new *SEE AFIS MSG
messages are added, the MSG *WX UPDATED
DATA CENTER AK
Key will flash and a flashing NDB- WW EXP 31MAY
asterisk will appear next to the
new message.
SYSTEM MESSAGES
ADVISORY: Figure 7-38
The following are the advisory messages which pertain to AFIS and
may appear on the GNS-X C129 SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
SYSTEM MESSAGE EXPLANATION
WX UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS terminal weather
update from the Global Data Center.
WINDS UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS Winds Aloft
SIGMETS UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS SIGMETS
FPL UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS Flight Plan update
from the Global Data Center.
1 NO COMM AFIS update request initiated by the pilot has not
been acknowledged by the ground communications network.
DOWNLINK FAIL The last AFIS downlink request contained
an invalid character and was not transmitted to the ground network.
UPLINK FAIL The last AFIS uplink attempt by the ground network
was not accepted by the DMU.
FPL RECALLED The DMU has received a previously
accessed AFIS Flight Plan from the Global Data Center.
DATA CENTER AK Global Data Center has acknowledged a
downlink request.
AFIS CONFIG CHG. Configuration information in the DMU has
been changed to agree with interfaced configuration module
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
AFIS CONFIG FAIL Configuration module has failed. DMU non-

volatile memory configuration information will be used.
AFIS CONFIG LOST DMU non-volatile memory has lost its con-
figuration information and the configuration module has failed.
NOTE: Message may not cause MSG Annunciator to flash.
ACTION REQUIRED:
The following are the action required messages which pertain to AFIS
and may appear on the GNS-X C129 SYSTEM MESSAGES Page.
SEE AFIS MSG There is a text message on the AFIS MESSAGES
page which requires acknowledgement and possibly pilot action.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
SYSTEM OPERATION
PRE-DEPARTURE
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN SELECTION
The AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears after the Initialization
Page. The page also appears between the Active Flight Plan Page
and the first GNS-X C129 FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page.
NOTE: For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit,
DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground
data link.
TO ENTER AN AFIS FLIGHT

PLAN AFIS
FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
<
1. Preprogrammed AFIS Disk CYUL-KJFK 06APR9O
- INSERT disk into DTU. <
KJFK-KORD 06APR90
KORD-KSNA 06APR90
2. Select AFIS FLIGHT PLAN KSNA-KSTL 09APR90
<
LIST Page using either (a)
or (b).
GUIII
a. Initialization Page -
Enter Date, GMT, and Initial
Position. AFIS FLIGHT Figure 7-39
PLAN LIST Page appears.
b. FPL Key - DEPRESS until desired AFIS FLIGHT PLAN
LIST Page appears. (Figure 7-39)
NOTE: Desired flight plan may be found on a subsequent page if
more than six flight plans have been either transferred from the disk or
received via the data link. If there is more than one Flight Plan with the
same Departure/ Destination pair
a random letter will be displayed AFIS
between the Depart?Dest pair FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/4
and the date. This letter and the <
CYUL-KJFK 06APR9O
date distinguish one FPL from KJFK-KORD 06APR90
<
the other. KORD-KSNA 06APR90
<
KSNA-KSTL 09APR90
DEPRESS to place cursor
over desired Flight Plan. REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?
(Figure 7-40)
Figure 7-40
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
4. FPL Date - VERIFY.

NOTE: If an Active Flight Plan exists, the message REPLACE
ACTIVE FPL? appears. DEPRESS ENTER to replace the Active
Flight Plan with the AFIS Flight Plan.
6. ACTIVE FPL - CONFIRM. AFIS Flight Plan becomes the Active
Flight Plan. The initial leg must be established on the NAV Page
so the system can navigate normally.
NAVIGATION 5/5
ENROUTE <
PRC: GUP FL410
PLAN ACT
REVIEWING FLIGHT PLAN F REM 9642 9685
FF P/E 1832 1800
PROGRESS ETA 02:09 02:08
1. NAV Key - DEPRESS until TAS 488 485
GS 507 519
NAVIGATION Page 5, WIND 300/ 26 310/ 38
Flight Plan Progress Page
Figure 7-41
2. Current Leg Data - CON-
FIRM. Observe AFIS
Planned data vs. Actual <
NAVIGATION 5/5
GNS-X C129 calculated
data. PRC: GUP FL410
PLAN ACT
F REQ 1330 ------
REVIEWING AFIS PLANNED FF P/E 1832 ----
LEG DATA ETE 0+22 -----
TAS 488 ---
3. Line Select Key - GS 507 ---
DEPRESS to position cur- WIND 300/ 26 ---/---
sor over Leg Identifiers.
NOTE: ACTUAL data fields

<
NAVIGATION 5/5
become dashes, F REM field
becomes F REQ and ETA field DIR TO ICT FL---
becomes ETE. PLAN ACT
F REQ ------ 9475
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to FF P/E ---- 1800
review Planned data for ETA ----- 03:17
TAS --- 485
future legs of the Active GS --- 491
AFIS Flight Plan. WIND ---/--- 310/ 38
Figure 7-43
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
5. BACK or PRV Key - DEPRESS to review Planned data for pre-

vious legs of the AFIS Flight Plan.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to remove cursor from page and
return to Current Leg Progress.
NOTE: If the current leg displayed does not agree with a planned
AFIS leg, the PLAN fields display dashes. (Figure 7-43) If AFIS
Flight Plan is updated via the data link, new values will appear. Refer
to Updating AFIS Flight Plan for update procedure.
REVIEWING AFIS FLIGHT AFIS MENU

PLAN DATA
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to <
2 SIGMETS
display AFIS MENU Page. 3 TERMINAL WX
<
4 WINDS ALOFT
2. Line Select Key - Place cur- 5 RECALL AFIS FPL
<
sor over menu Option 1, 6 SEND AFIS MSG
AFIS FLT PLAN. (Figure 7- <
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
44)
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 1 AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4

FUEL TIME
4. REVIEW fuel and time data. FR KSNA
(Figure 7-45) If the Flight TO KSTL 10859 2+51
Plan has been updated, the HOLDING ----- -----
FROM identifier (origin air- TO ---- ----- -----
RESERVE 2500 0+45
port) will be changed to
UPDATE. (Figure 7-46) TOTALS 13359 3+36
Fuel and time data change as a

result of the updated informa- Figure 7-45
tion. The TOTALS reflect the
changes in the TO and
RESERVE fields. AFIS FLT PLAN 1/4
FUEL TIME
FR UPDATE
TO KSTL 9285 1+58
HOLDING ----- -----
TO ---- ----- -----
RESERVE 2700 0+49
TOTALS 11985 2+47
Figure 7-46
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
5. AFIS or NXT Key - DEPRESS to display AFIS Flight Plan Page 2.

NOTE: Pressing the PRV or BACK Key will re-display the AFIS
MENU Page with the cursor positioned over Option 1.
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 2

6. WEIGHTS, FLIGHT LEVEL
and ROUTE - REVIEW AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4
RAMP WT 52185
(Figure 7-47). If the Flight FPL LDWT 42700
Plan has been updated, the FLT LVL 410
first route identifier will be ROUTE
UPDATE, followed by the KSNA-MUSEL-TRM-
updated route to destina- J134-STL-KSTL
tion. FPL LDWT and FLT
LVL values may change as
data is updated.
NOTE: If Automatic Fuel Flow Figure 7-47
is interfaced to the GNS-X
C129, RAMP WT changes to
GROSS WT after the engines
are started and the GROSS WT
value field decreases on a peri-
AFIS FLT PLAN 2/4
odic basis as the GNS-X C129
RAMP WT 51900
recalculates. (Figure 7-48) FPL LDWT 42500
FLT LVL 370
7. AFIS or NXT Key - ROUTE
DEPRESS. Subsequent UPDATE-ICT-J134-
pages of the Route will STL-KSTL
appear as needed (up to 50
waypoints) or AFIS FLT
PLAN Page 3 appears.
NOTE: DEPRESSING PRV or Figure 7-48
BACK Key will display AFIS
FLT PLAN Page 1.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation

8. Pilot Inputs - REVIEW. AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4
(Figure 7-49) FROM KSNA
TO KSTL
NOTE: If there has been an DEP TIME 23:45
BASIC OP WT 39000
update to the flight plan: FROM PAYLOAD 1200
identifier (origin airport) changes RAMP FUEL 13359
to UPDATE; DEP TIME RESERVE FUEL 2500
changes to UPDATE TIME; PERF OPTION M80 / 2
RAMP FUEL changes to
UPDATE FUEL; FPL RES
FUEL changes to RESERVE Figure 7-49
FUEL; and the values in the
respective fields change to
reflect the updated information. AFIS FLT PLAN 3/4
(Figure 7-50) FROM UPDATE
TO KSTL
9. AFIS or NXT Key - DEP TIME 00:54
DEPRESS to display AFIS BASIC OP WT 39000
FLT PLAN Page 4. PAYLOAD 1200
RAMP FUEL 11985
RESERVE FUEL 2700
NOTE: DEPRESSING PRV or
PERF OPTION M80 / 2
BACK Key will display AFIS
FLT PLAN Page 3.
Figure 7-50
10. Performance Bias Data -
REVIEW. (Figure 7-51)
11. AFIS or NXT Key - AFIS FLT PLAN 4/4
DEPRESS to return to AFIS MIN FLT LVL 330
MENU Page, where the MAX FLT LVL 410
cursor will be positioned HOLD TIME -----
ALTERNATE ----
over Option 2. CLIMB F/T ---- --
ARRIV F/T ---- --
NOTE: Pressing the BACK or
PRV Key throughout the Flight
Plan Pages will cause the previ-
ous Flight Plan Page to appear.
Figure 7-51
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
SIGMETS REVIEW/UPDATE
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 2,
SIGMETS.
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to
display first SIGMETS Page. <
AFIS SIGMETS 1/2
(Figure 7-52 or 7-53) 9APR95
FR KLAS TO KLAX
NOTE: If no SIGMETS have
been recorded on the disk, a SIGMET ECHO 7 VALID
UNTIL 222205
page appears displaying the CA
message NO SIGMETS ON FROM RNO TO EED TO
DISK. If there are no SIGMETS
via a Flight Plan update the
message reads NO SIGMETS.
Depress AFIS, PRV, or BACK Figure 7-52
Key to return to AFIS MENU
Page.
4. Select Key - DEPRESS TO AFIS SIGMETS 1/26
POSITION cursor over 20OCT95
FROM field FR NAT TO
NAT TRACKS FLS 310
5. FROM Identifier - VERIFY 370 INCLUSIVE OCT
or INSERT. 20/11 30Z TO OCT 20
190002
The cursor will automatically A 53/15 52/20 50/30
move to the TO Identifier
field.
Figure 7-53
7. TO Identifier- VERIFY or
INSERT.
AFIS SIGMETS
The cursor will automatically
FR (KSNA) TO (KMIA)
move to TRANSMIT
REQUEST? (Figure 7-54) NO SIGMETS

The request is downlinked
and the system will display
TRANSMIT REQUEST?
the AFIS MENU Page with
the cursor over Option 3.
Figure 7-54
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple

requests. A ( ) around the FR and TO waypoints indicates that the
updated information has not yet been received.
10. AFIS or NXT Key - DEPRESS. Subsequent SIGMETS Pages
will appear or AFIS MENU Page returns with cursor positioned
over Option 3.
TERMINAL WEATHER MENU - DATA UPDATE AND REVIEW

DEPRESS to position cur-
sor over Option 3, TERMI- AFIS MENU
NAL WX. (Figure 7-55)
<
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to 2 SIGMETS
3 TERMINAL WX
display TERMINAL WX <
4 WINDS ALOFT
Menu Page. (Figure 7-56) 5 RECALL AFIS FPL
<
6 SEND AFIS MSG
4. Line Select Key - 7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
DEPRESS to position cur- 8 OPERATING MODES
sor over the desired
Terminal Wx airport identifi-
Figure 7-55
er.
If the desired identifier is TERMINAL WX
enclosed in parentheses,
<
KSNA (ENO)
pressing the ENTER Key will >
cause it to blink, indicating no KSTL (DQO)

< >
weather information is available
for that identifier. <
(KMKC)
>
If no identifiers are displayed, < >

TRANSMIT REQUEST?
they may be inserted by press-
ing the Line Select Key, which
will create a cursor over the first Figure 7-56
blank identifier position.
INSERT an airport identifier.
7. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT
REQUEST?
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Identifiers listed on this page will be

transmitted to the ground via the data link.
NOTE: Wait for DATA CEN-
TERMINAL WX 1/12
TER AK message if sending >
KDEN 10JAN97
multiple requests.
METAR: 10/1710
9. If there are identifiers: 101703Z COR 04008KT
Placing the cursor over the 1SM -SN BR BKN016
selected identifier on the ter- BKN025 OVC036
10/1710 M16/M17
minal weather and pressing A2994 RMK AO2 P0000
ENTER will display the TAF: 101308Z 101312
weather information for the
airport. (Figure 7-57) Figure 7-57
10. Weather information - REVIEW.
TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER:

11. Line Select - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the identifier field.
12. IDENTIFIER - INSERT. The data text fields will go blank.
13. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The TERMINAL WX Menu Page
appears with the new identifier in place of the original identifier,
and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier
selected. If there is no data available for this new identifier, it will
appear in parentheses.
TO DELETE TEXT WHEN THERE IS NO DATA ENTRY IN

PROGRESS:
14. Place cursor over airport identifier on TERMINAL WX page.
15. Depress BACK key. DELETE? will appear.
16. ENTER Key- Depress to delete the airport identifier.
AFIS MENU
WINDS ALOFT MENU - DATA
UPDATE AND REVIEW <
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to 3 TERMINAL WX
<
display AFIS MENU Page. 4 WINDS ALOFT
<
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
2. Line Select Key - 6 SEND AFIS MSG
DEPRESS to position cur- <
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
sor over Option 4, WINDS 8 OPERATING MODES
ALOFT. (Figure 7-59)
Figure 7-59
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation

display WINDS ALOFT
AFIS WINDS ALOFT
Menu Page. (Figure 7-60)
KSNA (ENO)
4. Line Select Key - < >
DEPRESS to position cur- KSTL (DQO)

< >
sor over the desired Wind
identifier. <
(MKC)
>
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. < >

TRANSMIT REQUEST?
If the desired identifier is
enclosed in parentheses, Figure 7-60
pressing the ENTER Key will
cause it to blink, indicating no weather information is available for that
identifier.
If no identifiers are displayed, they may be inserted by pressing the
Line Select Key, which will create a cursor over the first blank identifi-
er position. INSERT an identifier. (Usually a VOR or intersection)
REQUEST?
Identifiers listed on this
page will be transmitted to WINDS ALOFT
the ground via the data link. ICT 122356Z
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER 18000 310/23-17

AK message if sending multiple 24000 290/34-31
requests. 30000 290/44-47
34000 300/53-54
9. If there are identifiers, upon 39000 310/68-56
depressing the ENTER Key, 45000 310/57-59
the WINDS ALOFT Data
Pages pertaining to the
selected identifier appear.
10. Wind information -
REVIEW.
TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER:

11. Press Line Select Key to position the cursor over the identifier
field.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
13. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The WINDS ALOFT Menu Page

selected. If there is no data available for the new identifier, it will
TO DELETE TEXT WHEN THERE IS NO DATA ENTRY IN

PROGRESS:
14. Place cursor over identifier on AFIS WINDS ALOFT page.
15. Depress BACK key the the ENTER Key.
RECALLING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN

This procedure allows a previ-
ously accessed AFIS Flight AFIS MENU
Plan and associated weather to 1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
be recalled from the Global 2 SIGMETS
Data Center. <
3 TERMINAL WX
4 WINDS ALOFT
<
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
RECALL OPTION 1: 6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to <
8 OPERATING MODES
display AFIS MENU Page.
sor over Option 5, RECALL
AFIS FPL. (Figure 7-63)
RECALL AFIS FPL
RECALL AFIS FPL Page <
FPL-# A1234
appears. DATE
ETD
FR
TO
sor next to FPL # field.
5. FPL # - INSERT desired
AFIS Flight Plan number. Figure 7-64
(Figure 7-64)
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. Cursor is positioned over TRANSMIT

REQUEST? (Figure 7-65)
initiate recalling of AFIS RECALL AFIS FPL
Flight Plan from Global Data FPL-# A1234
<
Center. DATE
ETD
NOTE: For aircraft equipped FR
with the Antenna Switching Unit, TO
if DATA LINK DISABLED mes-
sage appears DEPRESS TRANSMIT REQUEST?
momentary AFIS annunciator to
enable the air to ground data
Figure 7-65
link. Also enable VHF or satel-
lite network.
Wait for DATA CENTER AK
message if sending multiple RECALL AFIS FPL
requests.
<
FPL-#
DATE
RECALL OPTION 2: ETD
FR
If Flight Plan Number field is TO
blank:
Cursor will position itself
over date field. (Figure 7- Figure 7-66
66)
2. DATE - INSERT issue date (day, month, year, digits only) of
AFIS Flight Plan being recalled.
4. ETD - INSERT estimated time of departure in GMT of AFIS Flight
Plan being recalled.
6. FR field - INSERT origin ICAO Identifier.
8. TO field - INSERT destination ICAO Identifier.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation

Cursor is positioned over RECALL AFIS FPL
TRANSMIT REQUEST? FPL-#
<
(Figure 7-67) DATE07MAR90
ETD 14:30
10. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to FR KSNA
initiate recalling of AFIS TO KDEN
Flight Plan from Global Data
Center. AFIS MENU Page TRANSMIT REQUEST?
will appear with cursor posi-
tioned over Option 6.
Figure 7-67
NOTE: SIGMETS ,Winds and
Term Wx are automatically
updated once the FPL is recalled.
requests.
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE

OR PDC AFIS MENU
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to 1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
display AFIS MENU Page. 2 SIGMETS
<
3 TERMINAL WX
2. Line Select Key - 4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
sor over Option 6, SEND 6 SEND AFIS MSG
AFIS MSG. (Figure 7-68) <
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
SEND AFIS MESSAGE Figure 7-68
Page appears. (Figure 7-
69) If not requesting PDC
proceed to step 7
4. Line Select Key - Depress $ SEND AFIS MSG
MESSAGE PPM
to position cursor over #: % TO:
field. FR:
#:
5. INSERT - PDCXXX (XXX is
departure airport identifier).
6. ENTER Key - Depress twice < >
to transmit request. SEND MESSAGE?
7. TO - INSERT receiver of Figure 7-69

message.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation

9. FR - INSERT sender's iden-
tification (name or tail num- $ SEND AFIS MSG >
ber). MESSAGE PPM
% TO: DISPATCH
10. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. FR: N2175C
#: SNABCDE
11. # - INSERT receiver's
address. See Table 1 for DELAYED DUE TO WX
possible addresses. NEW ETA IS 1430Z
< >
12. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. SEND MESSAGE?
13. Message - INSERT text

Figure 7-70
message using the ENTER
Key to access each succes-
sive line. (Figure 7-70)
NOTE: The cursor remains
fixed and the page display $ SEND AFIS MSG >
moves up or down one line at a
time through the cursor. Fifteen % DELAYED DUE TO WX
lines of text can be entered. NEW ETA IS 1430Z
PLS ARR GND TRANS
(Figure 7-71) ALSO PLS HAV MECH
AVAIL TO DISCUSS POS
The following guidelines are MAINT PROB
used for entering and editing
< >
text: SEND MESSAGE?
a. Entering a character
causes the character at Figure 7-71
the cursor position and
all the characters to the
right to be shifted one
position.
b. The BACK Key may be used to delete characters one at a
time from right to left.
c. The SP Key may be used as a spacer to separate words.
d. The PRV Key may be used to move the cursor one space to
the left.
e. The NXT Key may be used to move the cursor one space to
the right.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
f. The Line Select Key moves cursor to SEND MESSAGE?

field if a TO or # entry field has been inserted.
g. Top two left Line Select keys move cursor up and down
page.
11. Line Select Key - DEPRESS
to position over SEND MES-
SAGE? It will be necessary $ SEND AFIS MSG >
to press the ENTER Key
after 15 lines of text, or if % DELAYED DUE TO WX
NEW ETA IS 1430Z
there are two succeeding PLS ARR GND TRANS
blank lines, in order for the ALSO PLS HAV MECH
cursor to appear over SEND AVAIL TO DISCUSS POS
MESSAGE? field. (Figure MAINT PROB
7-72) < >
SEND MESSAGE?
The message is sent to the Figure 7-72
Global Data Center via the
data link.
requests.
TO RETURN TO THE AFIS MENU PAGE

13. Press AFIS or NXT Key with the cursor off the page.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
SENDING/BUILDING A PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE

The PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGES MENU Page is accessed
from the SEND AFIS MSG
Page. (Figure 7-73) An entry in
$ SEND AFIS MSG
the TO or # field must be made >
MESSAGE PPM
before access to PPM is avail- % TO: DISPATCH
able. FR: N2175C
#: SNABCDE
DEPRESS to position cur- DELAYED DUE TO WX
sor over the PPM field. NEW ETA IS 1430Z
< >
2. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. SEND MESSAGE?
Up to six messages can be
listed on the PPM MENU Figure 7-73
Page which appears.
3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over desired mes-
sage title or blank title field.
(Figure 7-74)
PPM MENU
4. MESSAGE TITLE - VERIFY
or ENTER. A new title may <
be entered with a maximum 1 ETA CHANGE
2 FILE FLT PLAN REQ
of 18 characters. <
3 HOTEL RESERVATIONS
4
To change an existing title, <
5
type characters over the old 6
<
Title. The BACK Key can
be used to delete charac-
ters one at a time. Figure 7-74
NOTE: Whenever a title is
changed or erased, the preprogrammed message associated with
the title will be erased also.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The preprogrammed message associ-
ated with that title will appear. If no message has been pro-
grammed the display will be blank. Insert message as required
up to 7 lines of text.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
EDITING/ENTERING A PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE

6. TEXT - EDIT or ENTER using the following guidelines.
a. Entering a character causes the character at the cursor posi-
tion and all the characters to the right to be shifted one position.
b. The BACK Key may be
used to delete characters
one at a time from right to PPM MENU
left.
<
1 ETA CHANGE
c. The SP Key may be 2 FILE FLT PLAN REQ
<
used as a spacer to sepa- 3 HOTEL RESERVATIONS
rate words. <
4
5
d. The PRV Key may be <
6
used to move the cursor
one space to the left.
Figure 7-75
e. The NXT Key may be
used to move the cursor
one space to the right.
CONTINUE SENDING MESSAGE

7. NXT Key - DEPRESS to
position cursor over the
SEND MESSAGE? field. It PREPROGRAMMED MSG
will be necessary to press ETA CHANGE
the ENTER Key after seven <
NEW ETA IS 1300 KPRC
lines of text in order for the HAVE A GOOD DAY
SEND MESSAGE? field to
appear. (Figure 7-76)
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. < >
The message will be down- SEND MESSAGE?
linked and the AFIS MENU
Page will appear. TO, Figure 7-76
FROM and # field informa-
tion of SEND MESSAGE
Page will be used in down-
link message.
NOTE: DATA LINK DISABLED will appear in the SEND MES-
SAGE? field if the downlink is disabled.
Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
AFIS MESSAGES REVIEW

1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to
display AFIS MENU Page. AFIS MENU

1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
DEPRESS to position cur- 3 TERMINAL WX
<
sor over Option 7, DISPL 4 WINDS ALOFT
AFIS MSG. (Figure 7-77) <
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
DISPLAY AFIS MSG Page 8 OPERATING MODES
appears.
Figure 7-77
4. MESSAGE - REVIEW.
(Figure 7-78)
DISPLAY AFIS MSG 1/1
5. AFIS, NXT, PRV or BACK
Key - DEPRESS. DISPATCH:
Subsequent message MESSAGE RECEIVED.
pages appear or old AFIS NEW ETA IS 1430Z.
TRANSPORTATION
MENU Page returns with ARRANGED.
cursor positioned over
Option 8.
NOTE: Messages will remain in
the system until the system is Figure 7-78
powered off.
SELECTING OPERATING MODES (FOR AFIS USERS

EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM)
AUTO REPORTING
When the system is initialized, the Automatic Reporting and Auto Wx
update function will retain the status at aircraft shutdown. The follow-
ing procedures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
TURNING AUTO REPORT / AUTO WX UPDATE OFF

<
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS 3 TERMINAL WX
<
to position cursor over 4 WINDS ALOFT
Option 8, OPERATING <
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
MODES. (Figure 7-79) 7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
8 OPERATING MODES

DEPRESS to position cur- AFIS OPERATING MODES
sor over ON option of
>
AUTO REPORT or AUTO AUTO REPORT ON
WX UPDATE field. (Figure AUTO WX UPDT ON >
7-80) VHF NETWORK ON
SAT NETWORK ON
>
PRINTER CTRL
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC

OFF appears in the cursor.

turn OFF the AUTO AFIS OPERATING MODES
REPORT or AUTO WX
>
UPDATE function. AUTO REPORT OFF
AUTO WX UPDT ON >
VHF NETWORK ON
SAT NETWORK ON
>
NOTE: If all networks are OFF, PRINTER CTRL
then AUTO REPORT and
AUTO WX UPDATE will be ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
OFF.
Figure 7-81
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
RETURNING TO AUTO REPORT/AUTO WX UPDATE

2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to AFIS MENU

position cursor over Option 8, 1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
OPERATING MODES. 2 SIGMETS
(Figure 7-82) <
3 TERMINAL WX
4 WINDS ALOFT
<
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES

sor over OFF option of
AUTO REPORT or AUTO
WX UPDATE field. (Figure AFIS OPERATING MODES
7-83)
>
AUTO REPORT OFF
AUTO WX UPDT ON >
VHF NETWORK ON
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. SAT NETWORK ON
>
ON appears in the cursor. PRINTER CTRL
(Figure 7-84)
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to Figure 7-83

turn ON the AUTO
REPORT or AUTO WX
UPDATE function.
>
NOTE: If all networks are OFF, AUTO REPORT ON
then AUTO REPORT and AUTO WX UPDT ON >
AUTO WX UPDATE will be VHF NETWORK ON
SAT NETWORK ON
OFF. PRINTER CTRL
>
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-84
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
AUTO WEATHER UPDATE

When the system is initialized, AFIS MENU
the Automatic Weather Update 1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
function will retain the status at 2 SIGMETS
aircraft shutdown. The following <
3 TERMINAL WX
procedures allow the function to 4 WINDS ALOFT
be turned OFF and back ON. <
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
<
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
TURNING AUTO WX UPDT 8 OPERATING MODES
OFF
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to Figure 7-85
sor over Option 8, OPER-
>
ATING MODES. (Figure 7- AUTO REPORT ON
85) AUTO WX UPDT ON >
VHF NETWORK ON
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. SAT NETWORK ON
>
PRINTER CTRL
DEPRESS to position cur- ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
sor over ON option of
AUTO WX UPDT field. Figure 7-86
(Figure 7-86)
(Figure 7-87)
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to >
AUTO REPORT ON
turn OFF the AUTO WX AUTO WX UPDT OFF >
UPDT function. VHF NETWORK ON
SAT NETWORK ON
>
NOTE: A Weather Update PRINTER CTRL
Request must be performed to
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
notify the GDC of the change in
status of AUTO WX UPDT.
Figure 7-87
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
RETURNING TO AUTO WX UPDT

<
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
3 TERMINAL WX
DEPRESS to position cur- 4 WINDS ALOFT
sor over Option 8, OPER- <
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
ATING MODES. (Figure 7- 7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
88) 8 OPERATING MODES
Figure 7-88
4. Line Select Key - AFIS OPERATING MODES

>
sor over OFF option of AUTO REPORT OFF
AUTO WX UPDT field. AUTO WX UPDT OFF >
(Figure 7-89) VHF NETWORK ON
SAT NETWORK ON
>
PRINTER CTRL
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC

ON appears in the cursor.

turn ON the AUTO WX AFIS OPERATING MODES
UPDT function.
>
AUTO REPORT OFF
AUTO WX UPDT ON >
NOTE: A Weather Update VHF NETWORK ON
Request must be performed to SAT NETWORK ON
>
PRINTER CTRL
status of AUTO WX UPDT. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-90
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
VHF AND SATELLITE NETWORK OPERATING MODES

The status of each network is
held in non-volatile memory.
all networks will prefill with the
status at system shut-down. <
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
The following procedures allow 3 TERMINAL WX
<
the VHF and satellite networks 4 WINDS ALOFT
to be manually operated, turned <
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
OFF, or returned to AUTO. 6 SEND AFIS MSG
<
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
TURNING VHF NETWORK OFF
The VHF network has prece- Figure 7-91
dence over the satellite network
in areas of shared coverage and
must be turned OFF in order for
SATCOM to be the Active Link.
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to AUTO REPORT ON
>
display AFIS MENU Page. AUTO WX UPDT ON >

VHF NETWORK ON
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS SAT NETWORK ON
>
to position cursor over Option PRINTER CTRL
8, OPERATING MODES.
(Figure 7-91) ACTIVE LINK: ARINC

to position cursor over ON
option of VHF NETWORK AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO REPORT ON
OFF? appears in the cursor. AUTO WX UPDT ON >
(Figure 7-93) VHF NETWORK OFF?
SAT NETWORK ON
>
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to PRINTER CTRL
turn the VHF network OFF.
ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM
NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK infor-
mation at the bottom of the page Figure 7-93
indicates the network that is
being serviced at that time. If all networks are turned OFF or none are
operational, NONE will be displayed.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
TURNING VHF NETWORK ON


DEPRESS to position cur- >
sor over Option 8, OPER- AUTO REPORT ON
AUTO WX UPDT ON
ATING MODES. VHF NETWORK OFF
>
SAT NETWORK ON
>
PRINTER CTRL
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM
Figure 7-94
to position cursor over OFF
option of VHF NETWORK
field. (Figure 7-94) AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
AUTO REPORT ON
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AUTO WX UPDT ON >
VHF NETWORK ON ?
ON? appears in the cursor. SAT NETWORK ON
>
(Figure 7-95) PRINTER CTRL
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC

turn VHF network on. VHF Figure 7-95
LINK CONTROL Page

VHF LINK CONTROL
NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK
>
information at the bottom of the ARINC AUTO
page indicates the network that SITA/AVICOM AUTO >
is being serviced at that time.

sor over AUTO option of Figure 7-96
desired ground network.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
TURNING AUTO TO MAN OR OFF

NOTE: SITA/AVICOM are two different ground networks covering
different regions. The appropriate network is automatically selected
for operation based on current Lat/Lon location of aircraft, if mode is
set to AUTO.
until MAN or OFF appears AFIS OPERATING MODES
in the cursor. VHF LINK CONTROL
>
9. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to ARINC MAN
select MAN or OFF. SITA/AVICOM OFF >
NOTE: If MAN is selected, all

other networks will indicate
OFF. (Figure 7-97)
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 to
turn OFF desired ground Figure 7-97
networks or DEPRESS
ENTER Key to cursor through option fields and return to AFIS
OPERATING MODEs Page.
RETURNING TO AUTO
11. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF or MAN
option of desired ground network.
until AUTO appears in cur- AFIS OPERATING MODES
sor. (Figure 7-98) VHF LINK CONTROL
>
13. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to ARINC AUTO
select AUTO option. SITA/AVICOM OFF >
14. Repeat Steps 11 through 13

to return desired ground
networks to AUTO or
DEPRESS ENTER Key to
cursor through option fields
and return to AFIS Figure 7-98
Operating Modes Page.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
TURNING SATELLITE NETWORK OFF

AFIS MENU
<
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2. Line Select Key - 2 SIGMETS
3 TERMINAL WX
4 WINDS ALOFT
sor over Option 8, OPER- 5 RECALL AFIS FPL
<
ATING MODES. (Figure 7- 6 SEND AFIS MSG
99) <
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
Figure 7-99

sor over ON option of SAT AUTO REPORT ON
>
(satellite) NETWORK field. AUTO WX UPDT ON >

(Figure 7-100) VHF NETWORK OFF
SAT NETWORK ON
>
PRINTER CTRL
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM

OFF? appears in the cursor.
Figure 7-100

turn the satellite network
OFF. (Figure 7-101) AFIS OPERATING MODES
>
AUTO REPORT ON
NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK AUTO WX UPDT ON >
information at the bottom of the VHF NETWORK OFF
page indicates the network that SAT NETWORK OFF?
>
PRINTER CTRL
is being serviced at that time. If
all networks are turned OFF or ACTIVE LINK: NONE
none are operational, NONE will
be displayed.
Figure 7-101
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
TURNING SATELLITE NETWORK ON

The satellite network must be
turned ON to send non-flight AFIS OPERATING MODES
related messages. Since the
VHF network has precedence AUTO REPORT ON
>
over the satellite network in areas AUTO WX UPDT ON >

of shared coverage, the VHF VHF NETWORK OFF
NETWORK must be turned OFF SAT NETWORK OFF
>
in order for SATCOM to be the PRINTER CTRL
Active Link. If the VHF network ACTIVE LINK: NONE
cannot be received and the SAT-
COM mode is set to ON the sys-
tem will automatically select the Figure 7-102
SATCOM mode for transmit and
receive.
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to dis-
play AFIS MENU Page. >
AUTO REPORT ON
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS AUTO WX UPDT ON >
to position cursor over Option VHF NETWORK OFF
8, OPERATING MODES. SAT NETWORK ON ?
>
PRINTER CTRL
ACTIVE LINK: SATCOM
to position cursor over OFF Figure 7-103
option of SAT NETWORK
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AFIS OPERATING MODES
ON? appears in the cursor. $ SAT LINK CONTROL
(Figure 7-103) %
SAT COM: AUTO
NOTE: The ACTIVE LINK infor-
mation at the bottom of the page REGION: W. ATLANTIC
indicates the network that is
being serviced at that time. LINK:OPERATIONAL

turn satellite network on.
SAT (satellite) LINK Figure 7-104
CONTROL Page appears
with cursor over AUTO. (Figure 7-104)
DEPRESS ENTER Key to cursor through option fields and return to
AFIS OPERATING MODES Page or proceed to Step 7.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
TURNING AUTO TO MAN

DEPRESS until MAN AFIS OPERATING MODES
appears in the cursor. $ SAT LINK CONTROL
%
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. SAT COM: MAN
Cursor moves to REGION
REGION: PACIFIC
field.
9. BACK Key - DEPRESS LINK:OPERATIONAL
until desired region appears
in cursor, either W. Atlantic,
E. Atlantic, Pacific, or Figure 7-105
Indian. (Figure 7-105)
select region. Cursor AFIS OPERATING MODES
moves to LINK field. $ SAT LINK CONTROL
(Figure 7-106) %
SAT COM: MAN
NOTE: All other regions are
REGION: PACIFIC
now considered OFF.
11. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to LINK:ACTIVATE?
ACTIVATE the SAT net-
work link as operational and
return to AFIS OPERATING Figure 7-106
MODES Page.
NOTE: When in MAN mode, the ACTIVE LINK will display NONE
until the aircraft is within the boundaries of the selected region.
RETURNING TO AUTO
12. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over MAN field.
13. BACK Key - DEPRESS until AUTO appears in cursor.
14. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to select AUTO option. Cursor moves
to the LINK field.
15. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to ACTIVATE the SAT network link as
operational and return to AFIS OPERATING MODES Page.
Rev. 0
AFIS Operation
PRINTER CTRL
The AFIS DMU has two RS-232 printer interfaces. Users may print
messages or weather to either or both printer ports. Automatic print-
ing is also available. Controls for these options, as well as Auto Form
Feed control, are accessed on the PRINTER CONTROL page. Auto
Form Feed currently applies to the -0211 and the -2011 DMUs.
Access the PRINTER CONTROL page by line selecting the PRINT-
ER CTRL field on the OPERATING MODES page and pressing
ENTER.
MESSAGE DEST
The Message Destination field is used to assign the printer port that
will be used when messages are printed. Messages can be sent to
printer port 1 (PRT1), printer port 2 (PRT2), or BOTH.
1. AFIS key - DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page.
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING
MODES.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over the PRINT-
ER CTRL field. SEL will appear in the field.
5. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL
page.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over MESSAGE
DEST.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to cycle destination field between PRT1,
PRT2, and BOTH.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Message Destination field to its
present value (PRT1, PRT2, or BOTH.)
WEATHER DEST
The Weather Destination field is used to assign the printer port that
will be used when weather is printed. Weather can be sent to printer
port 1 (PRT1), printer port 2 (PRT2), or BOTH.
MODES.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation

4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option
of PRINTER CTRL field.
page.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over WEATHER
DEST.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to cycle destination field between PRT1,
PRT2, and BOTH.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Message Destination field to its
present value (PRT1, PRT2, or BOTH.)
AUTO FORM FEED

The Auto Form Feed option, when set to YES, will cause the printer
to Form Feed, or eject the page, after each message or weather
report is printed. Setting the Auto Form Feed option to NO will print
messages and weather reports on the same page until the page is
full, then eject the page.
MODES.
page.
6. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO
FORM FEED.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to toggle Auto Form Feed option
between YES and NO.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Auto Form Feed to its present
value (YES or NO.)
Auto Form Feed currently applies to the -0211 and the -2011 DMUs.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
AUTO PRINT MSG

The Auto Print Message field is used to select or deselect the auto-
matic printing of messages. If AUTO PRINT MSG is set to YES, then
messages will automatically be printed upon receipt. If AUTO PRINT
MSG is set to NO, then messages will not be printed upon receipt.
MODES.
page.
PRINT MSG.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to toggle Auto Print Message field
between YES and NO.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Auto Print Message field to its
present value (YES or NO.)
AUTO PRINT WX
The Auto Print Weather field is used to select or deselect the auto-
matic printing of weather. If AUTO PRINT WX is set to YES, then
weather will automatically be printed upon receipt. If AUTO PRINT
WX is set to NO, then weather will not be printed upon receipt.
MODES.
page.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
PRINT WX.
7. BACK Key - DEPRESS to toggle Auto Print Weather field
between YES and NO.
8. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to set Auto Print Weather field to its
present value (YES or NO.)
PRINTING PROCEDURES
PRINTING FLIGHT PLANS

Following is a step by step procedure to print a flight plan in the air-
craft:
Note: The aircraft must be specially REGISTERED with the Global
Data Center (GDC) for this feature.
1. Enable AUTO PRINT WX from the printer control page of the
AFIS OPERATING MODES page.
2. Select SEND AFIS MSG from the AFIS MENU.
3. Leave the TO and FR fields blank. At the address (#) field, type:
PRFPD1234, where D1234 is the flight plan number.
4. Transmit the request to the GDC.
5. When uplinked, the flight plan will be treated like weather and will
print automatically.
PRINTING MESSAGES
Messages may be printed automatically as the message is uplinked,
and/or individually at any time.
To Automatically Print Messages Upon Receipt:

1. Select AUTO PRINT MSG from the AFIS OPERATING MODES,
PRINTER CONTROL page, to YES. All uplinked messages will
print automatically upon receipt.
To Manually Print a Message:

1. While reviewing the message, line select one of the white caret
symbols at the bottom of the message page.
2. The PRINT MESSAGE? prompt will display. Press ENTER to
send the message to the printer currently selected for messages.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
To Manually Print All Messages:

1. From the AFIS MENU, select the SEND AFIS MSG page.
2. On the send message page, leave the TO and FR fields blank.
At the address (#) field, type ONE of the following commands:
MSG 1 Send messages to printer one.
MSG 2 Send messages to printer two.
MSG 3 Send messages to both printers.
3. Press ENTER until the SEND MESSAGE? prompt is displayed.

Press ENTER again to initiate printing to the specified printer(s).
PRINTING WEATHER
SIGMETS, Winds Aloft, and Terminal Weather may be printed auto-
matically or manually.
To Automatically Print SIGMETS, Winds Aloft, and Terminal

Weather Upon Receipt:
1. Select AUTO PRINT WX from the AFIS OPERATING MODES,
PRINTER CONTROL page. All SIGMETS, Winds Aloft, and
Terminal Weather reports will print automatically as they are
received.
To Manually Print All SIGMETS, Winds Aloft, or Terminal

Weather:
1. From the AFIS MENU, select the SEND AFIS MSG page.
2. On the send message page, leave the TO and FR fields blank.
At the address (#) field, type ONE of the following commands
(note- there is a space between the command and the numeral,
ex. SIG<space>1):
SIG 1 Send SIGMETS to printer one.
SIG 2 Send SIGMETS to printer two.
SIG 3 Send SIGMETS to both printers.
WND 1 Send Winds Aloft to printer one.

WND 2 Send Winds Aloft to printer two.
WND 3 Send Winds Aloft to both printers.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
TWX 1 Send Terminal Weather to printer one.

TWX 2 Send Terminal Weather to printer two.
TWX 3 Send Terminal Weather to both printers.
3. Press ENTER until the SEND MESSAGE? prompt is displayed.

Press ENTER again to initiate printing to the specified printer.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
SELECTING OPERATING MODES (FOR AFIS USERS NOT

EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM)
AUTO REPORTING
the Automatic Reporting and or
Auto Wx update function will <
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
retain the status at aircraft shut- 3 TERMINAL WX
<
down. The following proce- 4 WINDS ALOFT
dures allow the function to be <
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
turned OFF and back ON. 6 SEND AFIS MSG
<
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
TURNING AUTO REPORT
OFF Figure 7-107
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
>
107) AUTO REPORT ON
AUTO WX UPDT ON >
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. ARINC AUTO
SITA/AVICOM OFF >
4. Line Select Key - PRINTER CTRL
sor over ON option of ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
AUTO REPORT field.
(Figure 7-109) AFIS OPERATING MODES
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to >

turn OFF the AUTO AUTO REPORT OFF
REPORT function. AUTO WX UPDT ON >
ARINC AUTO
SITA/AVICOM OFF >
NOTE: If all ground networks PRINTER CTRL
are OFF, then AUTO REPORT
will be OFF. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-109
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
RETURNING TO AUTO REPORT

AFIS MENU
<
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
3 TERMINAL WX
sor over Option 8, OPER- 4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
ATING MODES. (Figure 7- <
6 SEND AFIS MSG
110) 7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
8 OPERATING MODES

sor over OFF option of
AUTO REPORT field. >
(Figure 7-111) AUTO REPORT OFF
AUTO WX UPDT ON >
ARINC AUTO
SITA/AVICOM OFF >
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. PRINTER CTRL
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC

turn ON the AUTO
REPORT function. (Figure
7-112)
NOTE: If all ground networks >

are OFF, then AUTO REPORT AUTO REPORT ON
AUTO WX UPDT ON
will be OFF. ARINC AUTO
>
SITA/AVICOM OFF >

PRINTER CTRL
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-112
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
AUTO WEATHER UPDATE

the Automatic Weather Update
function will retain the status at <
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
aircraft shutdown. The following 2 SIGMETS
procedures allow the function to <
3 TERMINAL WX
4 WINDS ALOFT
be turned OFF and back ON. 5 RECALL AFIS FPL
<
6 SEND AFIS MSG
TURNING AUTO WX UPDT <
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
OFF
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to Figure 7-113

to position cursor over
Option 8, OPERATING
>
MODES. (Figure 7-113) AUTO REPORT ON
AUTO WX UPDT ON >
ARINC AUTO
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. SITA/AVICOM OFF >
PRINTER CTRL
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC

DEPRESS to position cursor
over ON option of AUTO Figure 7-114
WX UPDT field. (Figure 7-
114)
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS. AFIS OPERATING MODES

(Figure 7-115) AUTO REPORT ON
>
AUTO WX UPDT OFF >

ARINC AUTO
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to SITA/AVICOM OFF >
PRINTER CTRL
turn OFF the AUTO WX
UPDT function. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-115
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
RETURNING TO AUTO WX UPDT

AFIS MENU
<
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
3 TERMINAL WX
sor over Option 8, OPER- 4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
ATING MODES. (Figure 7- <
6 SEND AFIS MSG
116) 7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
8 OPERATING MODES

sor over OFF option of >
AUTO WX UPDT field. AUTO REPORT OFF
(Figure 7-117) AUTO WX UPDT OFF >
ARINC AUTO
SITA/AVICOM OFF >
PRINTER CTRL
ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
(Figure 7-118)
Figure 7-117

turn ON the AUTO WX AFIS OPERATING MODES
UPDT function.
>
AUTO REPORT ON
AUTO WX UPDT ON >
NOTE: A Weather Update ARINC AUTO
Request must be performed to SITA/AVICOM OFF >
PRINTER CTRL
status of AUTO WX UPDT. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
Figure 7-118
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
GROUND NETWORK OPERATING MODES

The status of each network is
held in non-volatile memory.
all networks will prefill with the
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
status at system shut-down. <
2 SIGMETS
The following procedures allow 3 TERMINAL WX
<
the ground networks to be man- 4 WINDS ALOFT
ually operated, turned OFF, or <
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
returned to AUTO. 7 DISPL AFIS MSG
<
8 OPERATING MODES
NOTE: SITA/AVICOM are two
different ground networks cover-
ing different regions. The Figure 7-119
appropriate network is selected
for operation based on current
Lat/Lon location of aircraft.
AUTO TO MAN OR OFF MODE >

AUTO REPORT ON
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to AUTO WX UPDT ON >
display AFIS MENU Page. ARINC AUTO
SITA/AVICOM AUTO >
2. Line Select Key - PRINTER CTRL
DEPRESS to position cur- ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
ATING MODES. (Figure 7-
119) Figure 7-120

sor over AUTO option of >
AUTO REPORT ON
desired ground network AUTO WX UPDT ON >
field. (Figure 7-120) ARINC MAN
SITA/AVICOM OFF >
5. BACK Key - DEPRESS PRINTER CTRL
until MAN or OFF appears
in the cursor. ACTIVE LINK: ARINC

select MAN or OFF mode.
(Figure 7-121)
NOTE: If MAN is selected, all other networks will indicate OFF.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
RETURNING TO AUTO
2. Line Select Key - 1 AFIS FLT PLAN
<
DEPRESS to position cur- 2 SIGMETS
sor over Option 8, OPER- <
3 TERMINAL WX
ATING MODES. (Figure 7- 4 WINDS ALOFT
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
122) <
6 SEND AFIS MSG
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
DEPRESS to position cur- Figure 7-122
sor over MAN or OFF
option of ground network
until AUTO appears in the >
AUTO REPORT ON
cursor. (Figure 7-124) AUTO WX UPDT ON >
ARINC OFF
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to SITA/AVICOM OFF >
select AUTO mode. PRINTER CTRL
NOTE: AUTO REPORT, ACTIVE LINK: NONE

AUTO WX UPDT, and OPER-
ATING MODE selection status
are stored in non-volatile memo- Figure 7-123
ry. If the operator turns to OFF
or MAN, the operator must res-
elect to turn ON.
The ACTIVE LINK information AFIS OPERATING MODES
at the bottom of the page indi-
cates the network that is being AUTO REPORT ON
>
serviced at that time. If the AUTO WX UPDT ON >

system is operating in automatic ARINC AUTO
mode and the network selected SITA/AVICOM OFF >
by the present position informa- PRINTER CTRL
tion is turned OFF or none are ACTIVE LINK: ARINC
operational, NONE will be dis-
played.
Figure 7-124
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
UPDATING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN AND WEATHER
UPDATING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS to dis-
< ACTIVE FPL 1/1
play Active Flight Plan Page. FR RW19R ----- 1
<
TO ORD ----- 2
2. Active Flight Plan - VERIFY AZO ----- 3
the Active Flight Plan route or KDTW ----- 4
<
AMEND as necessary. ******
<
3. Line Select Key - DEPRESS DEPART AFIS UPDATED
until cursor is positioned over <
ARRIVE ETE >
ERASE ERASE
AFIS UPDATE? (Figure 7-
125)
Figure 7-125
AFIS FPL UPDATE Page
appears with cursor posi- AFIS FPL UPDATE
tioned over ACTUAL FL
value field. (Figure 7-126)
ACTUAL FL
NOTE: Values entered are ASSIGNED FL
PAYLOAD
checked against aircraft limita- FUEL REM
tions stored in GDC computers. CRUISE MODE
Invalid entries prevent cursor
movement and cause the field to
flash. Amend and re-enter to
advance cursor. Figure 7-126
NOTE: SIGMETS Winds and Terminal Wx are automatically updated
when a AFIS FPL update is received.
5. ACTUAL FL value - VERIFY or INSERT actual flight level.
7. ASSIGNED FL value - VERIFY or INSERT new flight level assign-
ment.
9. PAYLOAD value - VERIFY or INSERT amended payload value.
11. FUEL REM value - VERIFY or INSERT amended fuel remaining
value.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
13. CRUISE MODE - VERIFY or

INSERT an amended cruise AFIS FPL UPDATE
mode.
ACTUAL FL 410
14. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. ASSIGNED FL 370
The cursor positions over PAYLOAD 1200
TRANSMIT REQUEST? FUEL REM 11985
field. (Figure 7-127) CRUISE MODE M80
15. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to TRANSMIT REQUEST?

initiate a Flight Plan Update.
ACTIVE FPL Page will Figure 7-127
appear.
NOTE: For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit, if DATA
LINK DISABLED message appears DEPRESS momentary AFIS
annunciator to enable the air to ground data link. Also enable VHF or
satellite network.
Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests.
SELECTING UPDATE AS ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

1. FPL Key - DEPRESS until
AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST AFIS
Page appears with Updated
<
Flight Plan (UPDA - XXXX). CYUL-KJFK 06APR9O
(Figure 7-128) <
UPDA-KORD 16APR90

to position cursor over
Updated Flight Plan.
REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?
Cursor positions itself over Figure 7-128
REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?
4. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to AFIS
replace Active Flight Plan
<
with Updated Flight Plan. CYUL-KJFK 06APR9O
(Figure 7-129) <
UPDA-KORD 16APR90
5. ACTIVE FPL - CONFIRM.

Updated Flight Plan
becomes the Active Flight
REPLACE ACTIVE FPL?
Plan.
Figure 7-129
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
UPDATING SIGMETS
DEPRESS to position cur- AFIS SIGMETS 1/2
<
sor over Option 2, SIG- 9APR90
METS. (Figure 7-130) FR (KSNA) TO (KMIA)
ALPHA 2: SEV CAT
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to EXT FR SO CENT VA
display first SIGMETS THRU DE AT 14000 TO
Page. 24000 FT.

TRANSMIT REQUEST?
sor over FROM field.
Figure 7-130
5. Desired Identifier - INSERT.
NOTE: Parentheses appear AFIS SIGMETS 1/2
<
indicating a request has not yet 9APR90
been sent or received. FR KSNA TO KMIA
SIGMET ECHO 7 VALID
7. Line Select Key - UNTIL 222205 CA
DEPRESS to position cur- FROM RNO TO EED TO
sor over TO field.
8. Desired Identifier - INSERT.
sor over TRANSMIT
REQUEST? (Figure 7-131)
AFIS SIGMETS 1/26
11. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to 20OCT91
FR NAT TO
initiate a SIGMET update. NAT TRACKS FLS 310
370 INCLUSIVE OCT
NOTE: When an updated SIG- 20/11 30Z TO OCT 20
MET is received it replaces all 190002
previous SIGMETS. If NAT is
entered as FR option, a North
Atlantic Tracks update is sent. A 53/15 52/20 50/30
(Figure 7-132)
Figure 7-132
Wait for DATA CENTER AK if
sending multiple requests.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
UPDATING WEATHER
1. AFIS Key - DEPRESS to dis-
play AFIS MENU Page. AFIS MENU
2. Line Select Key - DEPRESS <

1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
to position cursor over Option 3 TERMINAL WX
3, TERMINAL WX. (Figure <
4 WINDS ALOFT
7-133) <
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to <
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
display TERMINAL WX 8 OPERATING MODES
Menu Page.
4. Line Select Key - DEPRESS Figure 7-133
to position cursor in next
available field. (Figure 7-134)
NOTE: If desired, when no field TERMINAL WX
is available, place cursor over an
existing identifier. < >
KSNA (ENO)
5. Terminal ICAO Identifier - < >
KSTL (DQO)
INSERT.
< >
(KMKC)
< >
The newly entered ID TRANSMIT REQUEST?
appears in parentheses on
the Menu.
Figure 7-134
7. Repeat Steps (5) and (6) to
enter additional requests.
REQUEST?
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK if sending multiple requests.
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
TO UPDATE TERMINAL
WEATHER DATA PAGES TERMINAL WX 1/12
>
KDEN 10JAN97
10. Access the TERMINAL
WEATHER Data Page METAR: 10/1710
101703Z COR 04008KT
(Figure 7-135) by selecting 1SM -SN BR BKN016
an Identifier on the TERMI- BKN025 OVC036
NAL WX MENU Page. 10/1710 M16/M17
A2994 RMK AO2 P0000
TAF: 101308Z 101312
TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFI-
ER Figure 7-135
11. Line Select Key - DEPRESS to position the cursor over the iden-
tifier field.
13. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The TERMINAL WEATHER Menu
Page appears with the new identifier in place of the original iden-
tifier, and the cursor positioned at the location of the original iden-
tifier selected. If there is no data available for the new identifier, it
will appear in parentheses.
UPDATING WINDS ALOFT

AFIS MENU
1 AFIS FLT PLAN
2 SIGMETS
DEPRESS to position cur- 3 TERMINAL WX
<
sor over Option 4, WINDS 4 WINDS ALOFT
ALOFT. (Figure 7-137) <
5 RECALL AFIS FPL
6 SEND AFIS MSG
3. ENTER Key - DEPRESS to <
7 DISPL AFIS MSG
8 OPERATING MODES
display WINDS ALOFT
Menu Page.
Figure 7-137
DEPRESS to position cur- TERMINAL WX
sor in next available field.
(Figure 7-138) < >
KSNA (ENO)
NOTE: If desired, when no field < >
KSTL (DQO)
is available, place cursor over
< >
existing identifier. (MKC)
< >
5. Desired Identifier - INSERT. TRANSMIT REQUEST?
Figure 7-138
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
NOTE: Identifier can be VOR, airport, waypoint, Lat/Lon or VORTAC

ident.
6. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The newly entered ID appears in
parentheses on the Menu.
7. Repeat Steps (5) and (6) to enter additional requests.
REQUEST?
NOTE: Wait for DATA CENTER AK if sending multiple requests.
TO UPDATE THE WINDS ALOFT DATA PAGES

10. Access the WINDS ALOFT
Data Pages (Figure 7-139) WINDS ALOFT
by selecting an identifier on ICT 122356Z
the WINDS ALOFT menu
18000 310/23-17
Page. 24000 290/34-31
30000 290/44-47
TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER 34000 300/53-54
39000 310/68-56
11. Line Select Key - DEPRESS 45000 310/57-59
to position the cursor over
the identifier field.
Figure 7-139
12. IDENTIFIER - INSERT.
The data text fields will go blank.
13. ENTER Key - DEPRESS. The WINDS ALOFT Menu Page
selected. If there is no data available for the new identifier, it will
Rev. 3
AFIS Operation
Rev. 3
Index
A
ACARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Actual Vertical Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-59, 3-93, 6-1
ADI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Advisory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30, 2-78, 7-24
Airborne Flight Information System (AFIS) 1-1, 1-6, 2-2, 2-13, 2-21, 2-26, 2-29, 2-35,
2-43, 2-45, 3-4~3-5, 3-78, 3-85, 6-1, 7-1~7-66
Aircraft Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aircraft Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 3-105
Airdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
Airport Continuation Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71, 3-3
Airport Reference Point(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71, 3-3, 6-1
Airports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-68, 2-70, 3-55
Airspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65, 2-73, 2-79, 3-37, 3-63, 3-133
Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 2-65, 2-80, 3-16, 6-6, 7-6
Airways
Enroute Airway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Jet Airway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Red Airway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Upper Green . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
VOR Airway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-13~2-14, 2-35, 2-81, 3-67, 3-86
Altitude Preselector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41, 3-72, 3-84~3-85
Altitude Trajectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37, 2-43
Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
APPR/APRCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-78, 3-40~3-41, 3-45, 6-1
APPROACH. . . . . . 1-2, 2-3~2-5, 2-7~2-12, 2-18, 2-30, 2-41, 2-57, 2-67, 2-78, 2-81,
3-7~3-9, 3-16~3-17, 3-20, 3-27, 3-29, 3-32~3-42, 3-44~3-49, 3-51, 3-54,
3-61~3-63, 3-73, 3-75, 3-78, 3-80, 3-82, 3-114, 3-116, 6-1, 6-3~6-6
Approach Armed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37, 3-114
APPROACH CANCELED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35~3-36, 3-54
ARINC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1, 7-1, 7-7, 7-19~7-20, 7-22
Armed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78, 3-36~3-37, 3-39, 3-41, 3-44, 3-46, 3-114
ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68, 2-71, 3-3~3-4, 3-54, 3-75, 3-85, 6-1
Asterisk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 2-72, 2-76, 2-78, 2-81, 3-127, 7-24
Rev. 0
Dec/96 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System I-1
Index
At or Above/Below. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-36, 2-40, 2-43, 3-72~3-73, 3-80, 6-1

ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39~3-40, 3-44, 6-1, 7-23
Atlantic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 4-1~4-2, 4-5, 7-11, 7-21, 7-53, 7-62
Auto Leg Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-10, 2-18, 2-41, 3-10, 3-37, 3-108~3-109
Auto Report . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7, 7-18~7-19, 7-21~7-22, 7-44~7-45, 7-54~7-55, 7-59
Auto-computed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Auto-TAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80, 3-117~3-118
Automatic Fuel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50, 2-52, 3-95~3-96, 3-102, 7-9, 7-30
Automatic Weather Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46, 7-56
AVICOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-7, 7-20, 7-22, 7-50, 7-58
B
BARO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35, 2-40, 3-76, 3-82, 3-85, 6-1
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-20, 2-27, 2-59, 3-55, 3-93, 6-1
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 3-1
BUSY-STANDBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
C
CALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47~2-48, 2-53, 3-136
Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30, 2-53, 3-85, 3-137
CDI Sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-78, 3-37, 3-54
CDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-1, 3-1, 4-1, 5-1, 6-1, 7-1~7-66
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27~2-28, 2-30, 6-2
Circling Type Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32, 3-38
Closest Airport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68, 3-54
COMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 3-89
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-78
Company Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 3-36.1, 3-36.2
Composite Position . . . . . . 1-1, 2-20~2-21, 2-25~2-26, 2-29, 2-32, 2-67, 2-80, 3-15,
3-110~3-113, 3-125, 3-130, 4-2
Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 2-53~2-54, 2-82, 3-137
CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24~7-25
Constraint. . . 2-11~2-13, 2-36~2-37, 2-40, 3-49, 3-72~3-75, 3-78~3-80, 3-82~3-84,
3-86, 3-116, 6-1, 6-3
Constraint Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 2-13, 2-36, 2-40, 2-43
Coordinate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72, 3-5, 3-112, 3-117
Cross-at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78, 3-86
Rev. 1
I-2 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Aug/97
Index
Cross-AT-or-BELOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Cross-AT-or-ABOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Cross-BETWEEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78, 3-80
Cross-between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78, 3-80
Crossfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Crosstrack Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18~2-19, 2-80, 3-58
Crosswind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
CRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 2-65, 3-63~3-64, 3-66, 6-4
Cruise Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36, 2-41, 3-71~3-72, 3-84, 6-2
Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
D
DATA CENTER AK . . . . . . 7-24, 7-33~7-35, 7-37~7-38, 7-40, 7-42, 7-61~7-63, 7-65
DATA LINK DISABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12, 7-15, 7-23, 7-37, 7-42, 7-61
Data-base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Database Expiration Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Dead Reckoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-26, 2-78~2-79, 2-82, 3-110
Declination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73, 3-133
DEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45, 3-74, 3-77, 6-2
DEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-31
Departing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Departure-destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Descents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Deselect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 2-34, 3-120, 3-123, 3-125
Desired Track . . . . . 2-14, 2-18~2-19, 2-48, 2-57, 3-49, 3-55, 3-58~3-60, 3-114, 6-2
DEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82, 7-27
Deviation(s) (DEV). . 1-1, 2-35~2-37, 2-42, 2-57, 2-78, 3-16, 3-74~3-78, 3-83, 3-85,
3-114, 6-2, 6-7
Digital Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Direct To. . . . . . 2-9, 2-48, 2-50, 2-57, 2-66~2-68, 2-74, 3-2, 3-13~3-14, 3-35~3-36,
3-41~3-42, 3-46, 3-48, 3-51~3-56, 3-59, 3-63, 3-65~3-66, 3-68, 3-77, 3-81,
3-83, 3-96, 3-98, 3-100~3-101, 3-103~3-104, 3-108, 3-114, 3-126, 6-2, 7-4
Discontinuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-11, 2-18, 2-41
Discrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-81, 3-37, 3-86
Displacement (DISPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 7-7, 7-43
DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65, 3-64, 3-66, 6-4
Rev. 0
Index
DME Arc . 2-4, 2-8, 2-10, 2-13, 2-15~2-17, 2-19, 3-33, 3-39, 3-41, 3-44~3-47, 3-60,
6-1
DN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37, 2-44, 3-74, 6-2
Downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-42
Drift Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
DRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
DTK 2-14, 2-48, 2-57, 3-14, 3-40, 3-45, 3-49, 3-51~3-52, 3-54~3-62, 3-99, 3-107,
6-2
E
EFIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-35, 2-75, 2-79, 3-39, 3-46, 3-126, 6-2
ELEV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69, 6-2
Endpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
ENRTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 6-2
ENTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82, 3-129
ENTR SET HDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82, 3-129
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 3-118
EST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37, 2-43, 6-2
Estimated Fuel Remaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Estimated Position Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE) . . 2-4, 2-11, 2-14, 2-16~2-17, 2-37, 2-42, 2-48, 2-81,
3-44, 3-47, 3-85~3-86, 3-99, 3-114, 6-2, 7-6, 7-8, 7-28
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) . 2-4, 2-11, 2-13, 2-15, 2-18, 2-47, 3-49, 3-72, 3-99,
3-115, 6-2, 7-5, 7-28
Estimated Time of Departure (ETD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-14, 7-37
EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126~3-127
Exit Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15~2-16, 2-65, 3-67
Exit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 2-66, 3-65~3-66
EXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 6-2
Expiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 3-2
EXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
F
FAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-21, 2-26, 2-81, 6-4
FCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-33, 6-3
FDE Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53, 3-137
Rev. 0
I-4 GNS-X (XLS CDU) Flight Management System Dec/96
Index
FDE Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52, 3-134~3-135, 3-137

Fence . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-9~2-11, 2-18, 2-48, 3-10, 3-36~3-37, 3-54, 3-108, 3-126
FF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Final Approach Course Alignment Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-33
Final Approach Fix (FAF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-8, 2-12, 2-35, 2-67, 2-78
3-33, 3-37, 3-40~3-41, 3-44~3-46, 3-62, 6-3
Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Flight Level . . 2-12, 2-36, 2-40, 3-71, 3-73, 3-80, 6-3, 7-1, 7-4, 7-6, 7-9, 7-14, 7-23,
7-30, 7-60
Flight Path Angle (FPA) . . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-36~2-37, 2-42, 2-44, 3-71~3-80, 3-82, 6-3
FPL FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7, 3-25~3-26
FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37, 2-44, 6-3, 6-6
Frequency (FREQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59~2-60, 2-69, 3-89, 3-91, 6-3
FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68, 2-78, 6-3, 7-13, 7-23
Fuel Flow . . . . . . 1-1, 2-46~2-47, 2-49~2-50, 2-52, 3-95~3-96, 3-102~3-103, 3-105,
7-5, 7-9, 7-30
Fuel Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-49, 2-68, 3-99~3-101, 3-103~3-104
Fuel Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45, 2-50, 3-95, 3-100, 3-103
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-1, 2-72, 3-36, 3-96, 3-100
G
GDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1~7-2, 7-46~7-47, 7-57, 7-60
Glide Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-36, 2-40, 3-75, 6-3
GPS 1-1, 2-20, 2-29~2-31, 2-48, 2-52, 2-54, 2-78, 2-81, 3-15, 3-37~3-39, 3-104,
3-110, 3-112~3-113, 3-125, 3-134, 6-3~6-5
GPS Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30, 3-104
GRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37, 6-2
Groundspeed . . . . . 2-11, 2-14, 2-17, 2-37, 2-43, 2-47, 2-49~2-51, 2-75, 2-77, 2-80,
3-15, 3-98~3-104, 3-131, 6-3, 7-5~7-6
Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-14, 3-37, 3-39, 3-41, 3-44, 3-46, 3-75, 3-83
Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70, 7-39, 7-42
H
H-field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 2-80, 3-119
HDOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Heading Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-56, 3-16, 3-37, 3-48, 3-57~3-61
Headwind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Rev. 0
Index
HLTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31, 6-3

Holding . . . 1-5, 2-4, 2-8, 2-10, 2-13, 2-15~2-17, 2-19, 2-36, 2-61, 2-65~2-67, 2-79,
3-33, 3-52, 3-63, 6-4, 7-8
Holding Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-15~2-17, 2-61, 2-65, 3-66~3-68
Holding Pattern . 1-5, 2-4, 2-8, 2-10, 2-13, 2-15~2-16, 2-61, 2-65~2-67, 2-79, 3-33,
3-52, 3-63, 6-4
Holding Pattern Entry
Direct Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 2-61, 3-63
Parallel Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 2-61, 2-64
Teardrop Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 2-61, 2-63
Holding Status Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29, 2-81, 6-3~6-4
Horizontal Position Error (HPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29, 2-81, 6-4
HPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
HQM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
I
ICAO Airport Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-18
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59, 7-18, 7-21, 7-63, 7-65
Ident-insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-39
Identifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73, 3-133
Idents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-22
ILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37, 3-91, 6-4
In-flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117, 7-1
Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35, 2-40, 3-114
Inbound CRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 2-65, 3-63~3-64, 3-66, 6-4
Indented Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-10
Inertial Reference System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-15, 6-4
Initial Approach Fix (IAF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-8, 2-67, 3-33, 3-44, 3-46, 6-4
Initialize(d) 2-30, 3-109, 3-117~3-118, 3-130, 7-4, 7-43, 7-46, 7-48, 7-54, 7-56, 7-58
INMARSAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-3
INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-25, 6-4
Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75, 3-25~3-26, 3-107, 3-131
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-66
Rev. 0
Index
Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-48, 2-52, 2-81, 6-6

INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 3-61
Intercept Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 3-61
Intercept . . . . 2-13, 2-15, 2-37, 2-56~2-57, 2-74~2-75, 2-81, 3-16, 3-40, 3-44~3-45,
3-47~3-49, 3-55, 3-57, 3-59~3-62, 3-85~3-86, 3-109, 3-114
Interfaced Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 7-1, 7-19~7-22
Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68, 2-72
Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-14
IRS-align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
J
Jeppesen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70, 2-72, 6-4
K
KG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45, 3-96, 6-4
KHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
KTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15, 3-134~3-135
L
Land(ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 3-10, 3-104, 6-4, 7-9
Latitude insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5, 3-53~3-54, 3-107, 3-112
Latitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118, 3-128
LB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45, 2-47, 3-95, 6-4
LDWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9, 7-30
Leg Change Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 2-17, 3-55~3-56, 3-59~3-61, 3-109
Leg Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49, 3-103
Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96, 3-98, 7-28~7-29
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16, 7-60
Line-of-sight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Load(ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22, 3-30, 3-38, 3-65, 3-75, 5-2, 7-4
LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
LON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 7-8, 7-11, 7-13, 7-50, 7-58, 7-65
Longitude insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5, 3-53~3-54, 3-107~3-108, 3-112
LORAN . . 1-1, 2-20, 2-32~2-34, 2-81, 3-15, 3-112~3-113, 3-121, 4-1~4-2, 4-19, 6-4
LVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9, 7-30
Rev. 0
Index
M
MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-65, 3-128, 6-5
Magnetic Variation . . . . 2-19, 2-69, 2-73, 2-77, 3-115, 3-118, 3-128, 3-133, 6-5, 6-7
MAN HDG REQD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 3-119
MAN TAS REQD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 3-118
Manual Fuel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52, 3-95, 3-102
Manual Ground Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 2-35
MEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 2-81, 3-7, 3-132
MEM FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81, 3-7, 3-132
Message Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Miscompare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Missed Approach Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-67, 3-16, 3-33, 3-37, 6-5
Missed Approach Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-36~3-38, 3-48~3-49
MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 7-1
N
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61, 3-11, 6-4, 7-15, 7-39
Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-18, 3-47
NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-62
NAV RDY-VERIFY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Navaids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-68, 3-15, 3-91, 3-130
Navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15, 7-28
Navigational. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
NAVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 3-90
NB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
NDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-69~2-70, 2-79, 3-7, 3-37, 6-5, 6-7
NDB-WW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
NO AFIS FLT PLANS ON DISK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
NO APPROACH AVAILABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
NO ARC INTERCEPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 3-45, 3-61
NO AUTO LEG CHG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 3-54, 3-108~3-109, 3-126~3-127
NO COURSE INTERCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 3-61
No Data Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Rev. 0
Index
NO DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
NO FPL AVAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
NO ROOM ON FPL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
NO SIDS AVAILABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-19
NO SIGMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12, 7-32
NO STARS AVAILABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 3-28
Non-directional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70, 6-5
Non-enterable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Non-ICAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Non-IRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 3-3
Non-precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-7, 3-61
Non-standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
NOPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
NOTAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13~2-14, 2-17, 2-19, 3-46, 3-67, 6-5
O
Oceanic/Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52~2-53, 2-75, 3-9, 3-134~3-135
Offset(s) . . . . . . 1-2, 2-11~2-13, 2-19, 2-36, 2-40, 2-44, 2-68, 2-73, 3-7, 3-51, 3-54,
3-73~3-74, 3-79~3-82, 3-84, 3-100, 3-107, 3-112, 3-114, 3-116, 3-118, 3-127,
3-131~3-134
Omega Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22, 2-24
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34, 3-47, 3-66, 3-79, 7-10
Outer Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Overflying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111~3-112
Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37~3-39
P
Parallax Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 3-1
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30, 2-61, 3-63, 3-79, 3-105
Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Path Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36, 2-40, 2-42, 2-44, 3-74, 3-78, 3-81, 3-83
Personalized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68, 2-72, 3-131~3-133
PIREPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Plan Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Position Fix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 2-30, 2-66, 2-75, 3-112~3-113
Rev. 0
Index
Position Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110~3-113, 3-118

PPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-17, 7-41
Pre-departure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 3-71, 7-1, 7-27
Pre-selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, 3-84, 3-86
PRED IN PROGRESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Prefill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5~2-7, 2-56, 3-73, 3-77, 7-48, 7-58
Preselector (PRESL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41, 3-72, 3-84, 6-5
Prev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Procedure Turn 2-4, 2-8, 2-10, 2-13, 2-15~2-17, 2-19, 2-67, 3-33, 3-39~3-42, 3-44,
3-62, 3-75, 6-4~6-5
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 3-57, 3-63, 3-74, 3-83, 3-86
Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 3-89
Pseudo-VORTAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-55~3-56, 3-58~3-60
Q
QTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53~2-54
Quality Factor (QUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-21, 2-26, 2-81, 6-4
R
RAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73, 3-132, 6-6
Radar (Vectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 3-39, 3-44, 3-126
Radial insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113, 3-131
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-58, 3-89, 3-92, 3-94
RAIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-20, 2-31, 2-48, 2-78, 2-81, 3-37, 3-99, 6-6
RCVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22, 6-6
RCVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 2-82
RDY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 2-81, 3-16, 3-110, 3-117
RDY-verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
READING DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-48, 6-6
REQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44, 6-6, 7-5, 7-28
REQD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 3-118~3-119
Required Vertical Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37, 2-44
RNAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 3-37, 6-6
RNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27, 6-6
Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-80, 3-16, 3-51, 3-114
Rev. 0
Index
Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80, 3-10, 3-24

Rubidium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-82
Runway Thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Runways (RWY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-68, 3-33, 3-35~3-36
S
SATCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-48, 7-52
SATS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31, 2-53, 3-135
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 3-36, 3-39~3-41, 3-44~3-46
SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 3-33, 3-36
SEL RWY FROM STAR PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 3-33, 3-36
Selected Crosstrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 3-114, 6-6
Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 3-1, 3-130, 5-1
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-78, 3-36~3-37, 3-54
Sensor Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-24, 2-26, 2-76, 2-81, 3-2, 3-15, 3-125, 3-129
Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-42, 3-47
Shutdown . . . . . 1-4, 2-12, 2-35, 2-46, 3-3, 3-5, 3-95, 3-133, 7-43, 7-46, 7-48, 7-54,
7-56, 7-58
SID 1-2, 2-3~2-4, 2-6, 2-10, 3-7~3-9, 3-16~3-23, 3-29~3-30, 3-73, 3-75, 3-80,
3-82, 3-116, 6-6
SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11~7-12, 7-62
Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 2-80, 2-82, 3-121, 4-1, 6-6
Signal-to-noise (SNR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31, 2-34, 3-121, 6-6
Software Modification Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52, 3-134
SPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-24
Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 2-54, 3-61, 3-137
STAR . . . . 1-2, 2-3~2-4, 2-7~2-8, 2-10, 3-7~3-9, 3-16~3-17, 3-20, 3-27~3-31, 3-33,
3-36, 3-73, 3-75, 3-78, 3-80, 3-82, 3-116, 6-6
Station Amplitude Ranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 2-34
STD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-82
Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-19, 2-80, 3-114
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72, 3-132
Rev. 0
Index
Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-58, 3-127

STRG (INVALID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80, 3-58
Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
SYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
System Messages. . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-76, 3-2, 3-7, 3-37, 3-61, 3-109~3-110, 3-119,
3-126~3-127, 3-130, 3-132, 7-24~7-25
T
TACAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91, 6-6~6-7
Tailwind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50, 3-16, 3-104
Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36~2-37, 2-40
Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 2-24, 3-1, 3-130, 5-1~5-2
TK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-75, 2-79, 3-128, 6-6
TKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 6-6
Too Far . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 2-34
Top of Climb (TOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36~2-37, 2-40, 3-72, 3-84, 6-7
Top of Descent (TOD) . . . . . . . . . 2-36~2-37, 2-40, 2-42, 2-81, 3-72, 3-78, 3-84, 6-7
Total Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45, 2-50, 3-102, 7-5
Track Angle (Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-20, 6-6
Trajectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37, 2-43
TRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, 3-71, 6-7
Transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2~7-3
Transition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41, 3-71~3-73, 3-80, 6-7
Transitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1, 7-2
Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60, 3-93, 6-7
TRMNL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 3-39, 3-41, 3-44, 3-46, 6-7
True Airspeed (TAS). . . . . 2-19, 2-51, 2-65, 2-77, 2-79, 3-16, 3-104, 3-117, 6-6, 7-6
Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58, 2-60, 3-28, 7-19, 7-22, 7-59
U
UG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Unavailable (UNAVAIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30~2-31, 2-54, 3-130, 3-137
UNCERT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Unstable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-24
Rev. 0
Index
UPDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
UPDA-XXXX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Update . . . . 1-5, 2-20, 2-35, 2-45~2-46, 2-66, 2-78, 3-2, 3-95, 3-100, 3-103~3-105,
3-110~3-113, 3-117~3-118, 3-127, 3-131, 5-1, 7-1, 7-3~7-4, 7-7~7-12,
7-18~7-19, 7-21~7-24, 7-29~7-34, 7-43~7-47, 7-54, 7-56~7-57, 7-60~7-65
Uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
USING MAN HDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80, 3-119, 3-130
UTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
V
Valids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 3-104
Variations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Vectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39, 3-44
Velocity (ies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-30, 3-112~3-113, 3-118, 3-125, 7-6, 7-14
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 2-45, 3-95, 7-23
VERIFY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77, 3-110, 3-117
VERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35~2-37, 2-42, 6-7
Vertical Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-36, 3-74~3-78, 3-83, 3-85, 3-114, 6-7
Vertical Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43, 3-84
VLF/Omega. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
VNAV Direct To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81, 3-83
VNAV Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35, 2-40
VNAV Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
VS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
VSPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
W
Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Warn(ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33~2-34, 2-77~2-78, 2-80, 3-37, 3-63
Waypoint-to-waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Waypoints
Database Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 3-10, 3-107~3-108, 3-133
Descent Reference Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37, 3-78, 3-85~3-87
Duplicate Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
External Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 3-126
Identifiers . . . 1-2, 2-3, 2-10, 2-41, 2-70, 2-72, 3-3, 3-7, 3-11, 3-17~3-18, 3-26,
3-100, 3-107, 3-132, 7-4~7-7, 7-12~7-13, 7-28, 7-33~7-35, 7-63, 7-65
Rev. 0
Index
Intersection Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

Obsolete Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68, 2-76
Oceanic Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53, 3-134
Offset Waypoint . . . . . . . . . 2-73, 3-51, 3-54, 3-81, 3-100, 3-107, 3-112, 3-127,
3-131~3-134
Pilot Entered Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53, 3-127, 3-132
Power Off Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75, 3-130
Special Waypoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
VNAV Profile Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
VNAV Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, 3-73~3-77, 3-79~3-83, 3-116
Waypoints of STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Weight-off-wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 3-15~3-16, 3-104, 3-117
Weight-on-wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 3-104
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-32, 2-51~2-52, 2-79, 3-105, 6-1, 7-9~7-10
Wind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-17, 3-118, 7-6, 7-13~7-14, 7-19, 7-22, 7-35
WPT MEM FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81, 3-7, 3-132
WPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72, 3-33
WSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 4-20
X
XFILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 2-14, 3-6, 3-44, 3-46, 3-66
XPDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-59, 3-93, 6-7
XTK 2-18, 2-35, 3-114, 6-7
Y
Z
Rev. 0
Honeywell International Inc.
One Technology Center
23500 West 105th Street
Olathe, Kansas 66061
FAX 913-791-1302
Telephone: (913) 782-0400
006-08872-0000
Rev 3 10/02 N

GNS-X C129: Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GNS-X C129: Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GNS-X C129: Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GNS-X C129

with GNS-X CDU

Prior to export of this document, review for export license requirement is

©1997 - 2002 Honeywell International Inc.

Reproduction of this publication or any portion thereof by any means without

Revision History and Instructions

Title Page Remove and Replace

Revision History and Instructions

Revision History and Instructions

Revision History and Instructions

GENERAL TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

BRIGHTNESS (BRT): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

MESSAGE KEY/ANNUNCIATOR (MSG): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

ALPHA KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

NUMERIC KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

HOLD KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

BACK KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

ENTER Key: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

DISPLAY SELECTOR KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

PREVIOUS (PRV) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

NEXT (NXT) KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

LINE SELECT KEYS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

PAGE DISPLAYS AT POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

SELF TEST PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

INITIALIZATION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

FLIGHT PLAN SECTION (FPL KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

FLIGHT PLAN PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

FLIGHT PLAN “X” 1/1 (Page 1 of 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

NAVIGATION SECTION (NAV KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

NAVIGATION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

NAVIGATION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

NAVIGATION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

NAVIGATION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

NAVIGATION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

VLF SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

VLF SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

VLF SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

VLF SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

VLF SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

IRS/INS SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

IRS (or INS) SUBSECTION 1/2 (Page 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

IRS SUBSECTION 2/2 (Page 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

VPU SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

VPU SUBSECTION 1/4 (Page 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

VPU SUBSECTION 2/4 (Page 2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

VPU SUBSECTION 3/4 (Page 3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

VPU SUBSECTION 4/4 (Page 4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

GPS SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

GPS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

GPS SUBSECTION 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

LORAN-C (LCS) SUBSECTION PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

LCS SUBSECTION 1/3 (Page 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

LCS SUBSECTION 2/3 (Page 2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

LCS SUBSECTION 3/3 (Page 3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

VERTICAL NAVIGATION SECTION (VNAV KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35